Haier R410A 0000001653 User Manual To The Fafb00f1 4123 49b3 A856 717a53959ad0

User Manual: Haier R410A to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 414 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HWE09080 GB

Safety Precautions

Before installing the unit, thoroughly read the following safety precautions.

Observe these safety precautions for your safety.

WARNING

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid

the risk of serious injury or death.

CAUTION

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid

the risk of serious injury or damage to the unit.

After reading this manual, give it to the user to retain for future reference.

Keep this manual for easy reference. When the unit is moved or repaired, give this manual to those who provide these

services.

When the user changes, make sure that the new user receives this manual.

WARNING

Ask your dealer or a qualified technician to install the

unit.

Improper installation by the user may result in water leak-

age, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Properly install the unit on a surface that can with-

stand the weight of the unit.

Unit installed on an unstable surface may fall and cause in-

jury.

Only use specified cables. Securely connect each ca-

ble so that the terminals do not carry the weight of the

cable.

Improperly connected or fixed cables may produce heat

and start a fire.

Take appropriate safety measures against strong

winds and earthquakes to prevent the unit from falling.

If the unit is not installed properly, the unit may fall and

cause serious injury to the person or damage to the unit.

Do not make any modifications or alterations to the

unit. Consult your dealer for repair.

Improper repair may result in water leakage, electric shock,

smoke, and/or fire.

Do not touch the heat exchanger fins.

The fins are sharp and dangerous.

In the event of a refrigerant leak, thoroughly ventilate

the room.

If refrigerant gas leaks and comes in contact with an open

flame, poisonous gases will be produced.

When installing the All-Fresh type units, take it into

consideration that the outside air may be discharged

directly into the room when the thermo is turned off.

Direct exposure to outdoor air may have an adverse effect

on health. It may also result in food spoilage.

Properly install the unit according to the instructions

in the installation manual.

Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric

shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Have all electrical work performed by an authorized

electrician according to the local regulations and in-

structions in this manual, and a dedicated circuit must

be used.

Insufficient capacity of the power supply circuit or improper

installation may result in malfunctions of the unit, electric

shock, smoke, and/or fire.

HWE09080 GB

WARNING

Securely attach the terminal block cover (panel) to the

unit.

If the terminal block cover (panel) is not installed properly,

dust and/or water may infiltrate and pose a risk of electric

shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Only use the type of refrigerant that is indicated on the

unit when installing or reinstalling the unit.

Infiltration of any other type of refrigerant or air into the unit

may adversely affect the refrigerant cycle and may cause

the pipes to burst or explode.

When installing the unit in a small room, exercise cau-

tion and take measures against leaked refrigerant

reaching the limiting concentration.

Consult your dealer with any questions regarding limiting

concentrations and for precautionary measures before in-

stalling the unit. Leaked refrigerant gas exceeding the lim-

iting concentration causes oxygen deficiency.

Consult your dealer or a specialist when moving or re-

installing the unit.

Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric

shock, and/or fire.

After completing the service work, check for a gas

leak.

If leaked refrigerant is exposed to a heat source, such as a

fan heater, stove, or electric grill, poisonous gases may be

produced.

Do not try to defeat the safety features of the unit.

Forced operation of the pressure switch or the temperature

switch by defeating the safety features of these devices, or

the use of accessories other than the ones that are recom-

mended by MITSUBISHI may result in smoke, fire, and/or

explosion.

Only use accessories recommended by MITSUBISHI.

Ask a qualified technician to install the unit. Improper instal-

lation by the user may result in water leakage, electric

shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Control box houses high-voltage parts.

When opening or closing the front panel of the control box,

do not let it come into contact with any of the internal com-

ponents. Before inspecting the inside of the control box,

turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,

and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on

INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. (It takes about

10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is

turned off.)

iiiiii

HWE09080 GB

Precautions for handling units for use with R410A

CAUTION

Do not use the existing refrigerant piping.

A large amount of chlorine that is contained in the residual

refrigerant and refrigerator oil in the existing piping may

cause the refrigerator oil in the new unit to deteriorate.

R410A is a high-pressure refrigerant and can cause the

existing pipes to burst.

Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized

copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes

clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides,

dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water.

These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes

may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.

Store the pipes to be installed indoors, and keep both

ends of the pipes sealed until immediately before braz-

ing. (Keep elbows and other joints wrapped in plastic.)

Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system

may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate or

cause the unit to malfunction.

Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylben-

zene to coat flares and flanges.

Infiltration of a large amount of mineral oil may cause the re-

frigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous re-

frigerant) into the system.

If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the com-

position of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and

may result in performance loss.

Use a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.

If a vacuum pump that is not equipped with a reverse-flow

check valve is used, the vacuum pump oil may flow into the

refrigerant cycle and cause the refrigerating machine oil to

deteriorate.

Prepare tools for exclusive use with R410A. Do not use

the following tools if they have been used with the con-

ventional refrigerant (gauge manifold, charging hose,

gas leak detector, reverse-flow check valve, refrigerant

charge base, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery

equipment.).

If the refrigerant or the refrigerating machine oil left on

these tools are mixed in with R410A, it may cause the re-

frigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Infiltration of water may cause the refrigerating machine

oil to deteriorate.

Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not

detect an R410A leak because R410A is free of chlorine.

Do not use a charging cylinder.

If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of the refrig-

erant will change, and the unit may experience power loss.

Exercise special care when handling the tools for use

with R410A.

Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system

may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Only use refrigerant R410A.

The use of other types of refrigerant that contain chlorine

(i.e. R22) may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteri-

orate.

HWE09080 GB

Before installing the unit

WARNING

Do not install the unit where a gas leak may occur.

If gaseous refrigerant leaks and piles up around the unit, it

may be ignited.

Do not use the unit to keep food items, animals, plants,

artifacts, or for other special purposes.

The unit is not designed to preserve food products.

Do not use the unit in an unusual environment.

Do not install the unit where a large amount of oil or steam

is present or where acidic or alkaline solutions or chemical

sprays are used frequently. Doing so may lead to a re-

markable drop in performance, electric shock, malfunc-

tions, smoke, and/or fire.

The presence of organic solvents or corrosive gas (i.e.

ammonia, sulfur compounds, and acid) may cause gas

leakage or water leakage.

When installing the unit in a hospital, take appropriate

measures to reduce noise interference.

High-frequency medical equipment may interfere with the

normal operation of the air conditioner or vice versa.

Do not install the unit on or over things that cannot get

wet.

When the humidity level exceeds 80% or if the drainage

system is clogged, the indoor unit may drip water. Drain wa-

ter is also discharged from the heat source unit. Install a

centralized drainage system if necessary.

HWE09080 GB

Before installing the unit (moving and reinstalling the unit) and performing

electrical work

CAUTION

Properly ground the unit.

Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe,

lightning rod, or grounding wire from a telephone pole. Im-

proper grounding may result in electric shock, smoke, fire,

and/or malfunction due to noise interference.

Do not put tension on the power supply wires.

If tension is put on the wires, they may break and result in

excessive heat, smoke, and/or fire.

Install an earth leakage breaker to avoid the risk of

electric shock.

Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in

electric shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Use the kind of power supply wires that are specified

in the installation manual.

The use of wrong kind of power supply wires may result in

current leak, electric shock, and/or fire.

Use breakers and fuses (current breaker, remote

switch <switch + Type-B fuse>, moulded case circuit

breaker) with the proper current capacity.

The use of wrong capacity fuses, steel wires, or copper

wires may result in malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire.

Do not spray water on the air conditioner or immerse

the air conditioner in water.

Otherwise, electric shock and/or fire may result.

When handling units, always wear protective gloves to

protect your hands from metal parts and high-tempera-

ture parts.

Periodically check the installation base for damage.

If the unit is left on a damaged platform, it may fall and

cause injury.

Properly install the drain pipes according to the in-

structions in the installation manual. Keep them insu-

lated to avoid dew condensation.

Improper plumbing work may result in water leakage and

damage to the furnishings.

Exercise caution when transporting products.

Products weighing more than 20 kg should not be carried

alone.

Do not carry the product by the PP bands that are used on

some products.

Do not touch the heat exchanger fins. They are sharp and

dangerous.

When lifting the unit with a crane, secure all four corners

to prevent the unit from falling.

Properly dispose of the packing materials.

Nails and wood pieces in the package may pose a risk of

injury.

Plastic bags may pose a risk of choking hazard to chil-

dren. Tear plastic bags into pieces before disposing of

them.

HWE09080 GB

Before the test run

CAUTION

Turn on the unit at least 12 hours before the test run.

Keep the unit turned on throughout the season. If the unit is

turned off in the middle of a season, it may result in malfunc-

tions.

To avoid the risk of electric shock or malfunction of the

unit, do not operate switches with wet hands.

Do not touch the refrigerant pipes with bare hands dur-

ing and immediately after operation.

During or immediately after operation, certain parts of the

unit such as pipes and compressor may be either very cold

or hot, depending on the state of the refrigerant in the unit

at the time. To reduce the risk of frost bites and burns, do

not touch these parts with bare hands.

Do not operate the unit without panels and safety

guards.

Rotating, high-temperature, or high-voltage parts on the unit

pose a risk of burns and/or electric shock.

Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping

the operation.

Keep the unit on for at least five minutes before turning off

the power to prevent water leakage or malfunction.

Do not operate the unit without the air filter.

Dust particles may build up in the system and cause mal-

functions.

CONTENTS

HWE09080 GB

Read Before Servicing

[1] Read Before Servicing.............................................................................................................. 3

[2] Necessary Tools and Materials ................................................................................................ 4

[3] Piping Materials ........................................................................................................................ 5

[4] Storage of Piping ...................................................................................................................... 7

[5] Pipe Processing........................................................................................................................ 7

[6] Brazing...................................................................................................................................... 8

[7] Air Tightness Test..................................................................................................................... 9

[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) ..................................................................................................10

[9] Refrigerant Charging .............................................................................................................. 12

[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak............................................................ 12

[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ............................................ 13

[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil...................................................................................... 14

Restrictions

[1] System configuration .............................................................................................................. 17

[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables .................................................................. 18

[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings .................................................................................... 19

[4] Sample System Connection ................................................................................................... 26

[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected ........................... 27

[6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected ........................... 49

[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and

ME Remote Controller are connected .................................................................................... 53

[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length.................................................................................................... 58

III

Heat source Unit Components

[1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit........................................................... 75

[2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit ....................................................................................... 78

[3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board ............................................................................................... 81

[4] BC Controller Components..................................................................................................... 88

[5] Control Box of the BC Controller ............................................................................................91

[6] BC Controller Circuit Board .................................................................................................... 92

Remote Controller

[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers .......................................... 97

[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller .................................... 98

[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller .................................................................. 102

[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller........................................ 103

Electrical Wiring Diagram

[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit................................................................ 107

[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller..................................................................... 111

[3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster.............................................................. 120

Refrigerant Circuit

[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram .................................................................................................. 123

[2] Principal Parts and Functions ............................................................................................... 126

VII

Control

[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches .............................................................. 137

[2] Controlling the Heat source Unit........................................................................................... 143

[3] Controlling BC Controller ...................................................................................................... 160

[4] Operation Flow Chart............................................................................................................ 161

VIII

Test Run Mode

[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run................................................................................ 175

[2] Test Run Method .................................................................................................................. 176

[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount................................................................ 177

[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount......................................................................................... 177

[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode.......................................................................................... 182

[6] The following symptoms are normal. .................................................................................... 186

[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ......................................................................... 187

CONTENTS

HWE09080 GB

Troubleshooting

[1] Error Code Lists.................................................................................................................... 227

[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller........................................................ 230

[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise ............................................................... 303

[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts............................................................................................ 306

[5] Refrigerant Leak ................................................................................................................... 343

[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions................................................................................. 347

[7] Servicing the BC controller ................................................................................................... 353

[8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display .......................................... 356

LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board

[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ...................................................................... 359

- 1 -

HWE09080 GB

Read Before Servicing

[1] Read Before Servicing ....................................................................................................... 3

[2] Necessary Tools and Materials.......................................................................................... 4

[3] Piping Materials .................................................................................................................5

[4] Storage of Piping ............................................................................................................... 7

[5] Pipe Processing................................................................................................................. 7

[6] Brazing............................................................................................................................... 8

[7] Air Tightness Test.............................................................................................................. 9

[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) ........................................................................................... 10

[9] Refrigerant Charging........................................................................................................12

[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak ....................................................... 12

[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants .......................................13

[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil ................................................................................. 14

- 2 -

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 3 -

HWE09080 GB

I Read Before Servicing

[1] Read Before Servicing

1. Check the type of refrigerant used in the system to be serviced.

Refrigerant Type

Multi air conditioner for building application CITY MULTI WY/WR2 THMU-A/YHMU-A series: R410A

2. Check the symptoms exhibited by the unit to be serviced.

Refer to this service handbook for symptoms relating to the refrigerant cycle.

3. Thoroughly read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual.

4. Preparing necessary tools: Prepare a set of tools to be used exclusively with each type of refrigerant.

Refer to "Necessary Tools and Materials" for information on the use of tools.(page 4)

5. Verification of the connecting pipes: Verify the type of refrigerant used for the unit to be moved or replaced.

Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free

of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water.

These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.

6. If there is a leak of gaseous refrigerant and the remaining refrigerant is exposed to an open flame, a poisonous gas

hydrofluoric acid may form. Keep workplace well ventilated.

CAUTION

Install new pipes immediately after removing old ones to keep moisture out of the refrigerant circuit.

The use of refrigerant that contains chloride, such as R22, will cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 4 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Necessary Tools and Materials

Prepare the following tools and materials necessary for installing and servicing the unit.

Tools for use with R410A (Adaptability of tools that are for use with R22 or R407C)

1. To be used exclusively with R410A (not to be used if used with R22 or R407C)

2. Tools and materials that may be used with R410A with some restrictions

3. Tools and materials that are used with R22 or R407C that may also be used with R410A

4. Tools and materials that must not be used with R410A

Tools for R410A must be handled with special care to keep moisture and dust from infiltrating the cycle.

Tools/Materials Use Notes

Gauge Manifold Evacuation and refrigerant charging Higher than 5.09MPa[738psi] on the

high-pressure side

Charging Hose Evacuation and refrigerant charging The hose diameter is larger than the

conventional model.

Refrigerant Recovery Cylinder Refrigerant recovery

Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The refrigerant type is indicated. The

cylinder is pink.

Charging Port on the Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The charge port diameter is larger

than that of the current port.

Flare Nut Connection of the unit with the pipes Use Type-2 Flare nuts.

Tools/Materials Use Notes

Gas Leak Detector Gas leak detection The ones for use with HFC refrigerant

may be used.

Vacuum Pump Vacuum drying May be used if a check valve adapter

is attached.

Flare Tool Flare processing Flare processing dimensions for the

piping in the system using the new re-

frigerant differ from those of R22. Re-

fer to I [3] Piping Materials.

Refrigerant Recovery Equipment Refrigerant recovery May be used if compatible with

R410A.

Tools/Materials Use Notes

Vacuum Pump with a Check Valve Vacuum drying

Bender Bending pipes

Torque Wrench Tightening flare nuts Only the flare processing dimensions

for pipes that have a diameter of

ø12.70 (1/2") and ø15.88 (5/8") have

been changed.

Pipe Cutter Cutting pipes

Welder and Nitrogen Cylinder Welding pipes

Refrigerant Charging Meter Refrigerant charging

Vacuum Gauge Vacuum level check

Tools/Materials Use Notes

Charging Cylinder Refrigerant charging Prohibited to use

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 5 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Piping Materials

1. Copper pipe materials

The distinction between O-materials (Annealed) and 1/2H-materials (Drawn) is made based on the strength of the pipes them-

selves.

2. Types of copper pipes

3. Piping materials/Radial thickness

Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper.

The operation pressure of the units that use R410A is higher than that of the units that use R22.

Use pipes that have at least the radial thickness specified in the chart below.

(Pipes with a radial thickness of 0.7 mm or less may not be used.)

The pipes in the system that uses the refrigerant currently on the market are made with O-material (Annealed), even if the

pipe diameter is less than ø19.05 (3/4"). For a system that uses R410A, use pipes that are made with 1/2H-material (Drawn)

unless the pipe diameter is at least ø19.05 (3/4") and the radial thickness is at least 1.2t.

The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes

that meet the local standards.

O-material (Annealed) Soft copper pipes (annealed copper pipes). They can easily be bent with hands.

1/2H-material (Drawn) Hard copper pipes (straight pipes). They are stronger than the O-material (Annealed)

at the same radial thickness.

Maximum working pressure Refrigerant type

3.45 MPa [500psi] R22, R407C etc.

4.30 MPa [624psi] R410A etc.

Pipe size (mm[in]) Radial thickness (mm) Type

ø6.35 [1/4"] 0.8t

O-material (Annealed)

ø9.52 [3/8"] 0.8t

ø12.7 [1/2"] 0.8t

ø15.88 [5/8"] 1.0t

ø19.05 [3/4"] 1.0t

1/2H-material,

H-material (Drawn)

ø22.2 [7/8"] 1.0t

ø25.4 [1"] 1.0t

ø28.58 [1-1/8"] 1.0t

ø31.75 [1-1/4"] 1.1t

ø34.93 [1-3/8"] 1.1t

ø41.28 [1-5/8"] 1.2t

Do not use the existing piping!

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 6 -

HWE09080 GB

4. Thickness and refrigerant type indicated on the piping materials

Ask the pipe manufacturer for the symbols indicated on the piping material for new refrigerant.

5. Flare processing (O-material (Annealed) and OL-material only)

The flare processing dimensions for the pipes that are used in the R410A system are larger than those in the R22 system.

(ø19.05 pipes should have a radial thickness of 1.2 t and be made of annealed materials.)

If a clutch-type flare tool is used to flare the pipes in the system using R410A, the length of the pipes must be between 1.0

and 1.5 mm. For margin adjustment, a copper pipe gauge is necessary.

6. Flare nut

The flare nut type has been changed to increase the strength. The size of some of the flare nuts have also been changed.

The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes

that meet the local standards.

Flare processing dimensions (mm[in])

Pipe size (mm[in]) A dimension (mm)

R410A R22, R407C

ø6.35 [1/4"] 9.1 9.0

ø9.52 [3/8"] 13.2 13.0

ø12.7 [1/2"] 16.6 16.2

ø15.88 [5/8"] 19.7 19.4

ø19.05 [3/4"] 24.0 23.3

Flare nut dimensions (mm[in])

Pipe size (mm[in]) B dimension (mm)

R410A R22, R407C

ø6.35 [1/4"] 17.0 17.0

ø9.52 [3/8"] 22.0 22.0

ø12.7 [1/2"] 26.0 24.0

ø15.88 [5/8"] 29.0 27.0

ø19.05 [3/4"] 36.0 36.0

Dimension A

Dimension B

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 7 -

HWE09080 GB

[4] Storage of Piping

1. Storage location

Store the pipes to be used indoors. (Warehouse at site or owner's warehouse)

If they are left outdoors, dust, dirt, or moisture may infiltrate and contaminate the pipe.

2. Sealing the pipe ends

Both ends of the pipes should be sealed until just before brazing.

Keep elbow pipes and T-joints in plastic bags.

The new refrigerator oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional refrigerating machine oil (such as Suniso) and, if not

handled with care, could easily introduce moisture into the system. Keep moisture out of the pipes, for it will cause the oil to

deteriorate and cause a compressor failure.

[5] Pipe Processing

Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges.

Use a minimum amount of oil.

Use only ester oil, ether oil, and alkylbenzene.

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 8 -

HWE09080 GB

[6] Brazing

No changes have been made in the brazing procedures. Perform brazing with special care to keep foreign objects (such as oxide

scale, water, and dust) out of the refrigerant system.

Example: Inside the brazed connection

1. Items to be strictly observed

Do not conduct refrigerant piping work outdoors if raining.

Use non-oxidized solder.

Use a brazing material (BCuP-3) that requires no flux when brazing between copper pipes or between a copper pipe and

copper coupling.

If installed refrigerant pipes are not immediately connected to the equipment, then braze and seal both ends.

2. Reasons

The new refrigerating machine oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional oil and is more likely to cause unit failure if

water infiltrates into the system.

Flux generally contains chloride. Residual flux in the refrigerant circuit will cause sludge to form.

3. Notes

Do not use commercially available antioxidants because they may cause the pipes to corrode or refrigerating machine oil to

deteriorate.

Use of oxidized solder for brazing Use of non-oxidized solder for brazing

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 9 -

HWE09080 GB

[7] Air Tightness Test

No changes have been made in the detection method. Note that a refrigerant leak detector for R22 will not detect an R410A leak.

1. Items to be strictly observed

Pressurize the equipment with nitrogen up to the design pressure (4.15MPa[601psi]), and then judge the equipment's air tight-

ness, taking temperature variations into account.

Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state (vs. gaseous state).

2. Reasons

Oxygen, if used for an air tightness test, poses a risk of explosion. (Only use nitrogen to check air tightness.)

Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state. If gaseous refrigerant in the cylinder is drawn out first, the composition

of the remaining refrigerant in the cylinder will change and become unsuitable for use.

3. Notes

Procure a leak detector that is specifically designed to detect an HFC leak. A leak detector for R22 will not detect an

HFC(R410A) leak.

Halide torch R22 leakage detector

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 10 -

HWE09080 GB

[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation)

1. Vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve (Photo1)

To prevent the vacuum pump oil from flowing into the refrigerant circuit during power OFF or power failure, use a vacuum

pump with a reverse-flow check valve.

A reverse-flow check valve may also be added to the vacuum pump currently in use.

2. Standard of vacuum degree (Photo 2)

Use a vacuum pump that attains 0.5Torr(65Pa) or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation, and connect it directly

to the vacuum gauge. Use a pump well-maintained with an appropriate lubricant. A poorly maintained vacuum pump may not

be able to attain the desired degree of vacuum.

3. Required precision of vacuum gauge

Use a vacuum gauge that registers a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa) and measures at intervals of 1Torr(130Pa). (A recom-

mended vacuum gauge is shown in Photo2.)

Do not use a commonly used gauge manifold because it cannot register a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa).

4. Evacuation time

After the degree of vacuum has reached 5Torr(650Pa), evacuate for an additional 1 hour. (A thorough vacuum drying re-

moves moisture in the pipes.)

Verify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1Torr(130Pa) 1hour after evacuation. A rise by less than

1Torr(130Pa) is acceptable.

If the vacuum is lost by more than 1Torr(130Pa), conduct evacuation, following the instructions in section 6. Special vacuum

drying.

5. Procedures for stopping vacuum pump

To prevent the reverse flow of vacuum pump oil, open the relief valve on the vacuum pump side, or draw in air by loosening

the charge hose, and then stop the operation.

The same procedures should be followed when stopping a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.

6. Special vacuum drying

When 5Torr(650Pa) or lower degree of vacuum cannot be attained after 3 hours of evacuation, it is likely that water has pen-

etrated the system or that there is a leak.

If water infiltrates the system, break the vacuum with nitrogen. Pressurize the system with nitrogen gas to

0.5kgf/cm2G(0.05MPa) and evacuate again. Repeat this cycle of pressurizing and evacuation either until the degree of vac-

uum below 5Torr(650Pa) is attained or until the pressure stops rising.

Only use nitrogen gas for vacuum breaking. (The use of oxygen may result in an explosion.)

(Photo1) 15010H (Photo2) 14010

Recommended vacuum gauge:

ROBINAIR 14010 Thermistor Vacuum Gauge

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 11 -

HWE09080 GB

7. Notes



To evacuate air from the entire system

Applying a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2) is not enough to attain the

desired vacuum pressure.

Be sure to apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2) and also through the

check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1 and 2).



To evacuate air only from the heat source units

Apply a vacuum through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1, and 2).



To evacuate air from the indoor units and extension pipes

Apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2).

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 12 -

HWE09080 GB

[9] Refrigerant Charging

1. Reasons

R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend (boiling point R32=-52°C[-62°F], R125=-49°C[-52°F]) and can almost be handled

the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid

phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and be-

come unsuitable for use.

2. Notes

When using a cylinder with a siphon, refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without the need for turning it upside down. Check

the type of the cylinder on the label before use.

[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak

If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced. (Charge refrigerant in the

liquid state.)

Refer to "IX [5] Refrigerant Leak."(page 343)

Cylinder with a siphon

Cylinder color R410A is pink. Refrigerant charging in the liquid state

Cylin-

der

liquid

Valve Valve

liquid

Cylin-

der

Cylinder without a siphon

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 13 -

HWE09080 GB

[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants

1. Chemical property

As with R22, the new refrigerant (R410A) is low in toxicity and chemically stable nonflammable refrigerant.

However, because the specific gravity of vapor refrigerant is greater than that of air, leaked refrigerant in a closed room will

accumulate at the bottom of the room and may cause hypoxia.

If exposed to an open flame, refrigerant will generate poisonous gases. Do not perform installation or service work in a con-

fined area.

*1 When CFC11 is used as a reference

*2 When CO2 is used as a reference

2. Refrigerant composition

R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To

be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn

out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use.

If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced.

3. Pressure characteristics

The pressure in the system using R410A is 1.6 times as great as that in the system using R22.

New Refrigerant (HFC type) Conventional Refriger-

ant (HCFC type)

R410A R407C R22

R32/R125 R32/R125/R134a R22

Composition (wt%) (50/50) (23/25/52) (100)

Type of Refrigerant Pseudo-azeotropic

Refrigerant

Non-azeotropic

Refrigerant

Single Refrigerant

Chloride Not included Not included Included

Safety Class A1/A1 A1/A1 A1

Molecular Weight 72.6 86.2 86.5

Boiling Point (°C/°F) -51.4/-60.5 -43.6/-46.4 -40.8/-41.4

Steam Pressure

(25°C,MPa/77°F,psi) (gauge)

1.557/226 0.9177/133 0.94/136

Saturated Steam Density

(25°C,kg/m3/77°F,psi)

64.0 42.5 44.4

Flammability Nonflammable Nonflammable Nonflammable

Ozone Depletion Coefficient (ODP)*1 0 0 0.055

Global Warming Coefficient (GWP)*2 1730 1530 1700

Refrigerant Charging Method Refrigerant charging in

the liquid state

Refrigerant charging in

the liquid state

Refrigerant charging in

the gaseous state

Replenishment of Refrigerant after a Refrigerant

Leak

Available Available Available

Temperature (°C/°F)

Pressure (gauge)

R410A R407C R22

MPa/psi MPa/psi MPa/psi

-20/-4 0.30/44 0.18/26 0.14/20

0/32 0.70/102 0.47/68 0.40/58

20/68 1.34/194 0.94/136 0.81/117

40/104 2.31/335 1.44/209 1.44/209

60/140 3.73/541 2.44/354 2.33/338

65/149 4.17/605 2.75/399 2.60/377

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

- 14 -

HWE09080 GB

[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil

1. Refrigerating machine oil in the HFC refrigerant system

HFC type refrigerants use a refrigerating machine oil different from that used in the R22 system.

Note that the ester oil used in the system has properties that are different from commercially available ester oil.

2. Effects of contaminants*1

Refrigerating machine oil used in the HFC system must be handled with special care to keep contaminants out.

The table below shows the effect of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.

3. The effects of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.

Refrigerant Refrigerating machine oil

R22 Mineral oil

R407C Ester oil

R410A Ester oil

*1. Contaminants is defined as moisture, air, processing oil, dust/dirt, wrong types of refrigerant, and refrigerating machine oil.

Cause Symptoms Effects on the refrigerant cycle

Water infiltration Frozen expansion valve

and capillary tubes

Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes

Poor cooling performance

Compressor overheat

Motor insulation failure

Burnt motor

Coppering of the orbiting scroll

Lock

Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Hydrolysis

Sludge formation and ad-

hesion

Acid generation

Oxidization

Oil degradation

Air infiltration Oxidization

Infiltration of

contaminants

Dust, dirt

Adhesion to expansion valve and capillary

tubes

Clogged expansion valve, capillary tubes, and

drier

Poor cooling performance

Compressor overheat

Infiltration of contaminants into the com-

pressor

Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Mineral oil

etc.

Sludge formation and adhesion Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes

Poor cooling performance

Compressor overheat

Oil degradation Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

- 15 -

HWE09080 GB

Restrictions

[1] System configuration ....................................................................................................... 17

[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables ........................................................... 18

[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings ............................................................................. 19

[4] Sample System Connection............................................................................................. 26

[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected..................... 27

[6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected..................... 49

[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and

ME Remote Controller are connected.............................................................................. 53

[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length .............................................................................................58

- 16 -

[ II Restrictions ]

- 17 -

HWE09080 GB

II Restrictions

[1] System configuration

1. Table of compatible indoor units <PQHY>

The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units.

1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names.

2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source

unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a com-

bination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit

whenever possible.

1. Table of compatible indoor units <PQRY>

The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units.

1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names.

2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source

unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a com-

bination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit

whenever possible.

Heat

source

units

Composing units Maximum total capacity

of connectable indoor

units

Maximum number

of connectable in-

door units

Types of connectable in-

door units

P72 - - - 36 - 93 1 - 15 P06 - P96 models

R410A series indoor units

P96 - - - 48 - 124 1 - 20

P120 - - - 60 - 156 1 - 26

P144 P72 P72 - 72 - 187 1 - 31

P168 P96 P72 - 84 - 218 1 - 36

P192 P96 P96 - 96 - 249 1 - 41

P216 P120 P96 - 108 - 280 2 - 46

P240 P120 P120 - 120 - 312

2 - 50

P264 P96 P96 P72 132 - 343

P288 P96 P96 P96 144 - 374

P312 P120 P96 P96 156- 405

P336 P120 P120 P96 168 - 436

P360 P120 P120 P120 180 - 468

Heat

source

units

Composing units Maximum total capacity

of connectable indoor

units

Maximum number

of connectable in-

door units

Types of connectable in-

door units

P72 - - 36- 108 1 - 18 P06 - P96 models

R410A series indoor units

P96 - - 48 - 144 1 - 24

P120 - - 60 - 180 1 - 30

P144 P72 P72 72 - 216 1 - 36

P168 P96 P72 84 - 252 1 - 42

P192 P96 P96 96 - 288 1 - 48

P216 P120 P96 108 - 324 2 - 50

P240 P120 P120 120 - 360

[ II Restrictions ]

- 18 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables

1. Wiring work

(1) Notes

1) Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this man-

ual.

2) Install external transmission cables at least 5cm [1-31/32"] away from the power supply cable to avoid noise interference.

(Do not put the control cable and power supply cable in the same conduit tube.)

3) Provide grounding for the heat source unit as required.

4) Run the cable from the electric box of the indoor or heat source unit in such way that the box is accessible for servicing.

5) Do not connect power supply wiring to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the electronic compo-

nents on the terminal block.

6) Use 2-core shielded cables as transmission cables.

Use a separate 2-core control cable for each refrigerant system. Do not use a single multiple-core cable to connect indoor

units that belong to different refrigerant systems. The use of a multiple-core cable may result in signal transmission errors and

malfunctions.

(2) Control wiring

Different types of control wiring are used for different systems.

Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System

to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work.

Types and maximum allowable length of cables

Control lines are categorized into 2 types: transmission line and remote controller line.

Use the appropriate type of cables and observe the maximum allowable length specified for a given system. If a given system

has a long transmission line or if a noise source is located near the unit, place the unit away from the noise source to reduce

noise interference.

1) M-NET transmission line

Cable type

Facility

type All facility types

Type Shielded cable CVVS, CPEVS, MVVS

Number of

cores 2-core cable

Cable size Larger than 1.25mm2 [AWG16]

Maximum transmission

line distance between the

heat source unit and the

farthest indoor unit

200 m [656ft] max.

Maximum transmission

line distance for central-

ized control and Indoor-

heat source transmission

line (Maximum line dis-

tance via heat source unit)

500 m [1640ft] max.

*The maximum overall line length from the power supply unit on the transmission lines for

centralized control to each heat source unit or to the system controller is 200m [656ft] max.

3TB

7TB

3TB

7TB

3TB

7TB

3TB

7TB

3TB

TB3: Terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line TB7: Terminal block for centralized control

multiple-core cable

BC Controller Indoor unit

Remote Controller

2-core shielded cable

Heat source unit

BC Controller Indoor unit

Heat source unit

[ II Restrictions ]

- 19 -

HWE09080 GB

2) Remote controller wiring

*1 MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and

wireless remote controller.

*2 M-NET remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller.

*3 The use of cables that are smaller than 0.75mm2 [AWG18] is recommended for easy handling.

*4 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the cable size specifi-

cations shown in the parenthesis.

[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings

1. Switch setting

Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System

to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work.

Set the switches while the power is turned off.

If the switch settings are changed while the unit is being powered, those changes will not take effect, and the unit will not

function properly.

*1. Applicable when LOSSNAY units are connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line.

*2. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity

from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).

*3. Turn off the power to all the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit.

MA remote controller*1 M-NET remote controller*2

Cable type

Type VCTF, VCTFK, CVV, CVS, VVR, VVF, VCT Shielded cable MVVS

Number of

cores 2-core cable 2-core cable

Cable size

0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3

[AWG22 to 16]

(0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) *4

[AWG18 to 16]

0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3

[AWG22 to 16]

(0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) *4

[AWG18 to 16]

Maximum overall line

length 200 m [656ft] max.

The section of the cable that exceeds 10m

[32ft] must be included in the maximum in-

door-heat source transmission line distance.

Units on which to set the switches Symbol Units to which the power must be shut off

CITY MULTI indoor unit Main/sub unit IC Heat source units *3 and Indoor units

LOSSNAY, OA processing unit *1 LC Heat source units *3 and LOSSNAY

M-NET remote controller Main/sub remote

controller

RC Heat source units *3

MA remote controller Main/sub remote

controller

MA Indoor units

CITY MULTI heat source unit*2 OC,OS Heat source units *3

BC controller Main BC Heat source units *3 and BC controller

Sub1, 2 BS1, BS2 Heat source units *3 and BC controller

[ II Restrictions ]

- 20 -

HWE09080 GB

2. M-NET Address settings

(1) Address settings table

The need for address settings and the range of address setting depend on the configuration of the system.

*1. If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to other units, use a different, unused address within the

setting range.

*2. To set the heat source unit address or the auxiliary heat source unit address to "100," set the rotary switches to "50."

*3. To set the M-NET remote controller address to "200," set the rotary switches to "00."

*4. Some models of indoor units have two or three control boards.

Assign an address to the No.1, No. 2, and No. 3 control boards so that the No. 2 control board address equals the No. 1 control

board address plus 1, and that the No. 3 control board address equals the No. 1 control board address plus 2.

*5. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, and OS. They are designated as

OC, and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same).

*6. No address settings are required for units in a system with a single heat source unit (with some exceptions).

Address setting is required if a sub BC controller is connected.

Unit or controller Sym-

bol

Address

setting

range

Setting method Factory

address

setting

CITY MULTI

indoor unit

Main/sub unit IC 0, 01 to

50*1 *4 *6 Assign the smallest address to the main indoor unit in the

group, and assign sequential address numbers to the rest

of the indoor units in the same group.

In an R2 system with a sub BC controller, make the set-

tings for the indoor units in the following order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the

formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

M-NET

adapter

M-NET con-

trol interface

Free Plan

adapter

LOSSNAY, OA processing unit LC 0, 01 to

50*1 *4 *6 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these

units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

M-NET re-

mote con-

troller

Main remote

controller

RC 101 to

150

Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in

the same group.

101

Sub remote

controller

RC 151 to

200*3 Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in

the same group.

MA remote controller MA No address settings required. (The main/sub setting must be made if

2 remote controllers are connected to the system.)

Main

CITY MULTI heat source unit OC

0, 51 to

100*1 *2

Assign an address that equals the lowest address of the in-

door units in the same refrigerant circuit plus 50.

Assign sequential addresses to the heat source units in the

same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units in the same

refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and

OS. *5

Auxiliary

heat source

unit

BC controller

(main)

BC 0, 51 to

100*1 *2

Assign an address that equals the address of the heat

source unit in the same refrigerant system plus 1.

If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are

assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC con-

troller, use a different, unused address within the setting

range.

BC controller

(sub1, 2)

BS1

BS2

51 to

100 *2

Assign an address to both the sub BC controller 1 and 2

that equals the lowest address of the indoor units that

are connected to each of them plus 50.

If a sub BC controller is connected, the automatic startup

function is not available.

System

controller

Group remote con-

troller

201 to

250

Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest

group number of the group to be controlled and 200.

201

System remote con-

troller

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range

listed on the left to each unit.

ON/OFF remote con-

troller

Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest

group number of the group to be controlled and 200.

Schedule timer (com-

patible with M-NET)

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range

listed on the left to each unit.

202

Central controller

AG-150A, G(B)-50A

0, 201 to

250

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range

listed on the left to each unit. The address must be set to

"0" to control the K-control unit.

000

Expansion controller

PAC-YG50ECA

LM adapter SC 201 to

250

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range

listed on the left to each unit.

247

[ II Restrictions ]

- 21 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Power supply switch connector connection on the heat source unit

(Factory setting: The male power supply switch connector is connected to CN41.)

There are limitations on the total number of units that are connectable to each refrigerant system. Refer to the DATABOOK

for details.

*1 The need for a power supply unit for transmission lines depends on the system configuration.

*2 The replacement of the power jumper connector from CN41 to CN40 must be performed on only one heat source unit in

the system.

(3) Settings for the centralized control switch for the heat source unit (Factory setting: SW2-1 are set to OFF.)

(4) Selecting the position of temperature detection for the indoor unit (Factory setting: SW1-1 set to "OFF".)

To stop the fan during heating Thermo-OFF (SW1-7 and 1-8 on the indoor units to be set to ON), use the built-in thermistor

on the remote controller or an optional thermistor.

1) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 to ON.

Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor.

Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead.

When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.

(Note) Factory setting for SW1-1 on the indoor unit of the All-Fresh Models is ON.

2) When an optional temperature sensor is used, set SW1-1 to OFF, and set SW3-8 to ON.

When using an optional temperature sensor, install it where room temperature can be detected.

System configura-

tion

Connection to

the system con-

troller

Power supply unit

for transmission

lines

Group operation

of units in a sys-

tem with multiple

heat source

units

Power supply switch connector connection

System with one

heat source unit

_ _ _ Leave CN41 as it is

(Factory setting)

System with multi-

ple heat source

units

Not connected _ Not grouped

Grouped Disconnect the male connector from the fe-

male power supply switch connector (CN41)

and connect it to the female power supply

switch connector (CN40) on only one of the

heat source units.*2

*Connect the S (shielded) terminal on the

terminal block (TB7) on the heat source

unit whose CN41 was replaced with CN40

to the ground terminal ( ) on the electric

box.

With connection

to the indoor-

heat source

transmission

line

Not required Grouped/not

grouped

With connection

to the central-

ized control sys-

tem

Not required*1

(Powered from

the heat source

unit)

Grouped/not

grouped

Required *1 Grouped/not

grouped

Leave CN41 as it is

(Factory setting)

System configuration Centralized control switch settings *1

*1. Set SW2-1 on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit to the same setting.

Connection to the system controller Not connected Leave it to OFF. (Factory setting)

Connection to the system controller Connected*2

*2. When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

[ II Restrictions ]

- 22 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) Various start-stop controls (Indoor unit settings)

Each indoor unit (or group of indoor units) can be controlled individually by setting SW 1-9 and 1-10.

*1. Do not cut off power to the heat source unit. Cutting off the power supply to the heat source unit will cut off the power

supply to the crankcase heater and may cause the compressor to malfunction when the unit is put back into operation.

*2. Not applicable to units with a built-in drain pump or humidifier.

*3. Models with a built-in drain pump cannot be turned on/off by the plug individually. All the units in the same refrigerant cir-

cuits will be turned on or off by the plug.

*4. Requires that the dipswitch settings for all the units in the group be made.

*5. Set SW1-9 and SW1-10 to ON to control the external input from/output to the air conditioning units via AG-150A or G(B)-

50A using the PLC software for general equipment. With these settings made, the power start-stop function becomes dis-

abled. To use the auto recovery function after power failure while these settings are made, set SW1-5 to ON.

(6) Miscellaneous settings

Cooling-only setting for the indoor unit: Cooling only model (Factory setting: SW3-1 "OFF.")

When using indoor unit as a cooling-only unit, set SW3-1 to ON.

(7) Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the heat source unit (various connection options)

Function Operation of the indoor unit when the operation is resumed after the unit

was stopped

Setting (SW1)*4 *5

910

Power ON/OFF by the

plug*1,*2,*3 Indoor unit will go into operation regardless of its operation status before

power off (power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

OFF ON

Automatic restoration

after power failure

Indoor unit will go into operation if it was in operation when the power was

turned off (or cut off due to power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

ON OFF

Indoor unit will remain stopped regardless of its operation status before

power off (power failure).

OFF ON

Type Usage Function Terminal to be

used*1

*1. For detailed drawing, refer to "Example of wiring connection".

Option

Input Prohibiting cooling/heating operation (thermo OFF) by an ex-

ternal input to the heat source unit.

* Usable for demand control of each refrigerant system

DEMAND (level) CN3D*2

*2. For details, refer to the next section "Demand control".

Adapter

for exter-

nal input

(PAC-

SC36NA-

Performs a low level noise operation of the heat source unit by

an external input to the heat source unit.

* It can be used as the silent operation device for each refriger-

ant system.

Low-noise mode

(level)*3 *4

Cooling/heating operation can be changed by an external input

to the heat source unit (OC).

Auto-changeover CN3N

Receives interlock operation signal input from the water circuit

pump (field-supplied)

Pump interlock

operation signal

input

TB-8 (between

poles 3 and 4)

*Minimum guar-

anteed current at

no-voltage input

contact: 5 mA or

below

Out-

put

Outputs signals to perform interlocked operation of heat source

unit and water circuit pump

Signal output patterns

*When DIP SW2-7 is set to off (factory setting)

Signals are output while the compressor is in operation.

*When DIP SW2-7 is set to ON

Signals are output from the controller while receiving cool-

ing or heating signal.

Signals are output while the compressor is stopped during

Thermo-OFF.

Pump interlock

operation signal

TB-8 (between

poles 1 and 2)

*Contact rating:

200VAC 1A or

below

How to extract signals from the heat source unit

*It can be used as an operation status display device.

*It can be used for an interlock operation with external devic-

es.

Operation status

of the compressor

CN51 Adapter

for exter-

nal output

(PAC-

SC37SA-

Error status

[ II Restrictions ]

- 23 -

HWE09080 GB

*4. By setting Dip SW5-5, the Low-noise mode can be switched between the Capacity priority mode and the Low-noise pri-

ority mode.

When SW5-5 is set to ON: The low-noise mode always remains effective.

When SW5-5 is set to OFF: The low noise mode is cancelled when certain operation pressure criteria are met, and the

unit goes into normal operation (capacity priority mode).

*5. When multiple heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, settings on every heat source unit (signal input)

are required.

CAUTION

1) Wiring should be covered by insulation tube with supplementary insulation.

2) Use relays or switches with IEC or equivalent standard.

3) The electric strength between accessible parts and control circuit should have 2750V or more.

Example of wiring connection

*3. Low-noise mode is valid when Dip SW4-4 on the heat source unit is set to OFF. When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, 4 levels

of on-DEMAND are possible, using different configurations of low-noise mode input and DEMAND input settings.When

2 or more heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, 8 levels of on-DEMAND are possible. When 3 heat

source units exist in one refrigerant circuitsystem, 12 levels of on-DEMAND are possible.

Low-noise mod is effective. Capacity priority mode becomes effective.

Cooling Heating Cooling Heating

63HS1<32kg/cm263LS>4.6kg/cm263HS1>35kg/cm263LS<3.9kg/cm2

(1) CN51

CN51

ecruos rewop pmaL

Distant control

board Relay circuit Adapter 1

Heat source unit

control board

Preparations

in the field Maximum cable

length is 10m

L1 : Heat source unit error display lamp

L2 : Compressor operation lamp (compressor running state)

X, Y : Relay (coil =<0.9W : DC12V)

1. Optional part : PAC-SC37SA-E or field supply.

(2) CN3N

2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

Preparations

in the field

OFF

Cooling

Heating

Normal

OFF

Contact rating voltage >= DC15V

Contact rating current >= 0.1A

Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC

X : Cooling / Heating

Y : Validity / Invalidity of X

X,Y : Relay

CN3N

Relay circuit

Adapter

2Heat source unit

control board

Maximum cable

length is 10m

(3) CN3D

2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

X : Low-noise mode

Y : Compressor ON/OFF

X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V

Contact rating current >= 0.1A

Minimum appicable load =< 1mA at DC

CN3D

TB8 TB8

63PW

Preparations

in the field

Maximum cable

length is 10m

Adapter 2

Heat source unit

control board

Relay circuit

Heat source unit

Pump interlock circuit (if one is connected)

63PW: Pressure switch (Contact: Minimum applied load 5 mA)

X: Relay (Contact rating: 200VAC 1A)

52P: Pump contactor

When connecting the pump interlock circuit wires to terminals

3 and 4 of TB8, remove the short-circuit wire.

Heat source unit

Short-

circuit

wire

2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

CN3D

Preparations

in the field

Maximum cable

length is 10m

Adapter 2

Heat source unit

control board

X : Relay

fan frequency and maximum compressor frequency.

Contact rating voltage >= DC15V

Contact rating current >= 0.1A

Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC

Low-noise mode : The noise level is reduced by controlling the maximum

Relay circuit

(4)TB8

52P

[ II Restrictions ]

- 24 -

HWE09080 GB

(8) Demand control

1) General outline of control

Demand control is performed by using the external signal input to the 1-2 and 1-3 pins of CN3D on the heat source units (OC,

OS1, and OS2).

Between 2 and 12 steps of demand control is possible by setting DIP SW4-4 on the heat source units (OC, OS1, and OS2).

P200-P300YHM models (single-heat source-unit system): 2 and 4 steps shown in the rows (a) and (b) in the table above

only.

P400-P600YHM models (two-heat source-unit system OC+OS1): 2-8 steps shown in the rows (a), (b), (c), and (e) in the

table above only.

P650-P900YHM models (three-heat source-unit system OC+OS1+OS2): 2-12 steps shown in the rows (a)-(h) in the table

above.

*2. External signal is input to CN3D on the heat source unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON. When SW4-4 is set to OFF on all heat

source units, the signal is input to the CN3D on the OC.

Heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are selectable in a single refrigerant system.

*3. If wrong sequence of steps are taken, the units may go into the Thermo-OFF (compressor stop) mode.

Ex) When switching from 100% to 50%

(Incorrect) 100% to 0% to 50% : The units may go into the Thermo-OFF mode.

(Correct) 100% to 75% to 50%

*4. The percentage of the demand listed in the table above is an approximate value based on the compressor volume and

does not necessarily correspond with the actual capacity.

*5. Notes on using demand control in combination with the low-noise mode

To enable the low-noise mode, it is necessary to short-circuit 1-2 pin of CN3D on the heat source unit whose SW4-4 is set

to OFF.

When SW4-4 is set to ON on all heat source units, the following operations cannot be performed.

Performing 4-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a single-heat source-unit system.

Performing 8-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a two-heat source-unit system.

Performing 12-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a three-heat source-unit system.

2) Contact input and control content

2-step demand control

The same control as the Thermo-OFF is performed by closing 1-3 pin of CN3D.

4-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on an heat source unit)

Demand capacity is shown below.

Table.1

No Demand control switch DipSW4-4 Input to CN3D *2

OC OS1 OS2

(a) 2 steps(0-100%) OFF OFF OFF OC

(b) 4 steps(0-50-75-100%) ON OFF OFF OC

(d) OFF OFF ON OS2

(e) 8 steps(0-25-38-50-63-75-88-100%) ON ON OFF OC and OS1

(f) ON OFF ON OC and OS2

(g) OFF ON ON OS1 and OS2

(h) 12 steps(0-17-25-34-42-50-59-67-75-

84-92-100%)

ON ON ON OC, OS1, and OS2

CN3D

1-3P

Open x = 100%

Close x = 0%

CN3D 1-2P

1-3P Open Close

Open 100% 75%

Close 0% 50%

[ II Restrictions ]

- 25 -

HWE09080 GB

8-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on two heat source units)

Demand capacity is shown below.

*1. The heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as No. 1and No. 2 in the order of address from small to

large.

Ex) When heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as OS1 and OS2, OS1=No. 1 and OS2=No. 2.

12-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on three heat source units)

Demand capacity is shown below.

*1. The heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 in the order of address from

small to large.

Ex) When heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as OC, OS1, and OS2, OC=No. 1, OS1=No. 2,

and OS2=No. 3.

8-step demand No.2 CN3D

1-2P Open Short-circuit

No.1 CN3D 1-2P 1-3P Open Short-circuit Open Short-circuit

Open Open 100% 50% 88% 75%

Short-circuit 50% 0% 38% 25%

Short-circuit Open 88% 38% 75% 63%

Short-circuit 75% 25% 63% 50%

12-step

demand

No.2 CN3D 1-2P Open

1-3P Open Short-circuit

No.3 CN3D 1-2P Open Short-circuit Open Short-circuit

No.1

CN3D

1-2P 1-3P Open Short-

circuit

Open Short-

circuit

Open Short-

circuit

Open Short-

circuit

Open Open 100% 67% 92% 84% 67% 34% 59% 50%

Short-

circuit

67% 34% 59% 50% 34% 0% 25% 17%

Short-circuit Open 92% 59% 84% 75% 59% 25% 50% 42%

Short-

circuit

84% 50% 75% 67% 50% 17% 42% 34%

12-step

demand

No.2 CN3D 1-2P Short-circuit

1-3P Open Short-circuit

No.3 CN3D 1-2P Open Short-circuit Open Short-circuit

No.1

CN3D

1-2P 1-3P Open Short-

circuit

Open Short-

circuit

Open Short-

circuit

Open Short-

circuit

Open Open 92% 59% 84% 75% 84% 50% 75% 67%

Short-

circuit

59% 25% 50% 42% 50% 17% 42% 34%

Short-circuit Open 84% 50% 75% 67% 75% 42% 67% 59%

Short-

circuit

75% 42% 67% 59% 67% 34% 59% 50%

[ II Restrictions ]

- 26 -

HWE09080 GB

[4] Sample System Connection

Examples of typical system connection are shown on pages [5] to [7].

Refer to the Installation Manual that came with each device or controller for details.

(1) An example of a system to which an MA remote controller is connected

(2) An example of a system to which an ME remote controller is connected

(3) An example of a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are connected

System

configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor

and heat source units Notes

1System with one heat

source unit NO Automatic

address setup

2System with one heat

source unit NO Manual

address setup

Connection of

multiple LOSS-

NAY units

Grouping of units in a

system with multiple

heat source units

NO Manual

address setup

4System with one heat

source unit

With connection to transmission line

for centralized control

Manual

address setup

5System with one heat

source unit

With connection to indoor-heat

source transmission line

Manual

address setup

6System with one heat

source unit

With connection to transmission line

for centralized control

Manual

address setup

Connection of

multiple LOSS-

NAY units

System

configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor

and heat source units Notes

1System with one heat

source unit

With connection to transmission line

for centralized control

Manual

address setup

System

configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor

and heat source units Notes

1System with one heat

source unit

With connection to transmission

line for centralized control

Manual

address setup

[ II Restrictions ]

27- 27 -

HWE09080 GB

[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected

1. System with one heat source unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units) <PQHY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which

more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor

units of the 72 model or above is connected) are con-

nected.

4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop in-

put (CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of

indoor units. Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for

both indoor and heat source units".(page 29)

5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units

in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 2. An

example of a system with one heat source unit to which

2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected".(page 29)

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L1 +L2+L3+L4 200m[656ft]

L1 +L2+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Maximum overall line length

(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])

m1 200m [656ft]

m2+m3 200m [656ft]

m4+m5 200m [656ft]

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

S 1 2

TB5

1 2

00 00

TB5

1 2

A B

L11

L3 L4

L12 L13

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

TB3

00 00

TB7

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3 TB7

OS1 OS2

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Group Group

L2 L1

- 28 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the

heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), and termi-

nals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat

source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC).

(Non-polarized two-wire)

Only use shielded cables.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the

order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units

have the same capacity, in the order of address from

small to large).

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source

units (OC, OS1, OS2), and the S terminal on the terminal

block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield wire of

the shielded cable.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA

remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the

terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA). (Non-

polarized two-wire)

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system,

connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on

the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA

remote controllers.

Set one of the MA remote controllers to sub. (Refer to

MA remote controller function selection or the installation

manual for the MA remote controller for the setting meth-

od.)

Group operation of indoor units

To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisy-

chain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on

all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect

terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the in-

door unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA re-

mote controller. (Non-polarized two-wire)

When performing a group operation of indoor units that

have different functions, "Automatic indoor-heat source

address setup" is not available.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals

on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-po-

larized two-wire)

Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the

same system will automatically be made. (It is required

that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source

unit.)

Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for both indoor and

heat source units" in the following cases: performing an

interlock operation of part of the indoor units in the sys-

tem with a LOSSNAY unit, using LOSSNAY alone with-

out interlocking it with any units, performing an interlock

operation of more than 16 indoor units with a LOSSNAY

unit, or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to indoor

units in the same system.

5) Switch setting

No address settings required.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller Address setting

range

Setting

method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor unit Main unit IC No settings re-

quired.

- To perform a group opera-

tion of indoor units that

have different functions,

refer to [5] 2.(page 29)

Sub unit IC

2 LOSSNAY LC No settings re-

quired.

-00

3MA

remote con-

troller

Main

remote con-

troller

MA No settings re-

quired.

-Main

Sub

remote con-

troller

MA Sub

remote controller

Settings to

be made ac-

cording to

the remote

controller

function se-

lection

4 Heat source unit (Note) OC

OS1

OS2

No settings re-

quired.

-00

[ II Restrictions ]

29- 29 -

HWE09080 GB

2. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected

(manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units) <PQHY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which

more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor

units of the 72 model or above is connected) are con-

nected.

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 1.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

TB3

51 52

TB7

TB3 TB7

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

S 1 2

TB5

1 2

04 03

TB5

A B

Group Group

Group

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

L11

L3 L4

L12 L13

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

OC OS1 OS2

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

- 30 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 1.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 1.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 1.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 1.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals

on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-po-

larized two-wire)

Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSS-

NAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Re-

fer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote

Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote

controller for the setting method.)

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Address

setting

range

Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor unit Main

unit

IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad-

dress to the main unit in the

group.

To perform a group opera-

tion of indoor units that

have different functions,

designate the indoor unit

in the group with the great-

est number of functions as

the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers

starting with the address of

the main unit in the same

group +1. (Main unit ad-

dress +1, main unit ad-

dress +2, main unit

address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but

unique address to each of

these units after assigning

an address to all indoor

units.

None of these addresses

may overlap any of the in-

door unit addresses.

3MA

remote con-

troller

Main

remote

control-

ler

MA No

settings re-

quired.

-Main

Sub

remote

control-

ler

MA Sub

remote

controller

Settings to be made ac-

cording to the remote con-

troller function selection

4 Heat source unit OC

OS1

OS2

51 to 100 Assign sequential address

to the heat source units in

the same refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are

automatically designated

as OC, OS1, and

OS2.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to

50.

[ II Restrictions ]

31- 31 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units <PQHY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor

units that are connected to different heat source units

with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)

must be performed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for

transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only

one of the heat source units.

6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which

more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor

units of the 72 model or above is connected) are con-

nected.

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L11+L12 200m [656ft]

L21+L22 200m [656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

L31+L21 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft]

L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft]

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

S 1 2

TB5

1 2 1 2

04 02

TB5 TB15

A B

TB5

1 2

A B

Group

Group Group

Group

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

L12

L22

L11

L21

TB3

TB7

To be connected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

L31

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

- 32 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 1.

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 1.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the

heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and

on the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, replace the power jump-

er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on

only one of the heat source units.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the

order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units

have the same capacity, in the order of address from

small to large).

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield

wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal

( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is

mated with CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 1.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 2.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Same as [5] 2.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller Address setting

range Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad-

dress to the main unit in

the group.

To perform a group

operation of indoor

units that have differ-

ent functions, desig-

nate the indoor unit in

the group with the

greatest number of

functions as the main

unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential num-

bers starting with the ad-

dress of the main unit in

the same group +1. (Main

unit address +1, main unit

address +2, main unit ad-

dress +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but

unique address to each of

these units after assigning

an address to all indoor

units.

None of these ad-

dresses may overlap

any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3MA

re-

mote

con-

troller

Main

remote

controller

MA No

settings required.

-Main

Sub

remote

controller

MA Sub

remote controller

Settings to be made ac-

cording to the remote con-

troller function selection

4 Heat source unit OC

OS1

OS2

51 to 100 Assign sequential address

to the heat source units in

the same refrigerant cir-

cuit. The heat source

units are automatically

designated as OC, OS1,

and OS2. (Note)

To set the address to

100, set the rotary

switches to 50.

[ II Restrictions ]

33- 33 -

HWE09080 GB

4. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is pow-

ered from a heat source unit <PQHY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor

units that are connected to different heat source units

with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)

must be performed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the

earth terminal ( ) on the terminal block for transmission

line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source unit

whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40.

6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which

more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor

units of the 72 model or above is connected) are con-

nected.

7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, leave the power jumper

connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 3.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]

L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

S 1 2

TB5

1 2

05 04

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

1 2

A B

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

L12 L11

L22 L21

L31

A B S

L32

Note1

System controller

TB3

TB7

To be connected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

m2 m1

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Group Group Group

Group Group

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,

leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

Note2 LM adapters require the power supply

capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

- 34 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 1.

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 1.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller,

terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmis-

sion line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source

units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat

source units (OC, OS1, and OS2) in the same refrigerant

circuit.

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, replace the power jump-

er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on

only one of the heat source units.

If a system controller is connected, set the central control

switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source

units to "ON."

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the

order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units

have the same capacity, in the order of address from

small to large).

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield

wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal

( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is

mated with CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 1.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 1.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals

on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission

line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized 2-core ca-

ble)

Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit

using the system controller. (Refer to the operation man-

ual for the system controller for the setting method.) In-

terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the

ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone

is connected.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Address

setting

range

Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor unit Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad-

dress to the main unit in

the group.

To perform a group oper-

ation of indoor units that

have different functions,

designate the indoor unit

in the group with the

greatest number of func-

tions as the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential num-

bers starting with the ad-

dress of the main unit in

the same group +1. (Main

unit address +1, main unit

address +2, main unit ad-

dress +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but

unique address to each of

these units after assign-

ing an address to all in-

door units.

None of these addresses

may overlap any of the in-

door unit addresses.

3MA

remote con-

troller

Main

remote

control-

ler

MA No

settings re-

quired.

- Enter the same indoor

unit group settings on the

system controller as the

ones that were entered

on the MA remote con-

troller.

Main

Sub

remote

control-

ler

MA Sub

remote con-

troller

Settings to be made ac-

cording to the remote

controller function selec-

tion

4 Heat source unit OC

OS1

OS2

51 to 100 Assign sequential ad-

dress to the heat source

units in the same refriger-

ant circuit.

The heat source units are

automatically designated

as OC, OS1, and

OS2.(Note)

To set the address to

100, set the rotary switch-

es to 50.

[ II Restrictions ]

35- 35 -

HWE09080 GB

5. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line (ex-

cept LM adapter) <PQHY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor

units that are connected to different heat source units

with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)

must be performed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for

transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only

one of the heat source units.

6) A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to

the indoor-heat source transmission line, with the excep-

tion that only one G(B)-50A may be connected.

7) When the total number of indoor units exceeds 26, it may

not be possible to connect a system controller on the in-

door-heat source transmission line.

8) In a system to which more than 18 indoor units including

one or more indoor units of 72 model or above are con-

nected, there may be cases in which the system control-

ler cannot be connected to the indoor-heat source

transmission line.

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L11+L12 200m [656ft]

L21+L22 200m [656ft]

L25 200m [656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

L31+L21 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]

L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

L25+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

S 1 2

TB5

1 2

05 04

TB5

1 2

A B

TB5

1 2

A B

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2

L12 L11

L22 L21

TB3

TB7

m2 m1

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

L31

A B S

L25

Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the

indoor-heat source transmission line.

Note1

System controller

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

Group Group Group

Group Group

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be connected

- 36 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the

heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), terminals M1

and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat source

transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC), and the

S terminal on the system controller. (Non-polarized two-

wire)

Only use shielded cables.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the

order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units

have the same capacity, in the order of address from

small to large).

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source

units (OC, OS1, OS2), the S terminal on the terminal

block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal on

the system controller with the shield wire of the shielded

cable.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the

heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and

on the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit.

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, replace the power jump-

er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on

only one of the heat source units.

Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control

board of all heat source units to "ON."

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield

wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal

( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is

mated with CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 1.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 1.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

(TB5) on the indoor units (IC) to the appropriate termi-

nals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source trans-

mission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized

two-wire)

Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit

using the system controller. (Refer to the operation man-

ual for the system controller for the setting method.) In-

terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the

ON/OFF remote controller alone is connected.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller Address set-

ting range Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address

to the main unit in the group.

To perform a group opera-

tion of indoor units that have

different functions, desig-

nate the indoor unit in the

group with the greatest

number of functions as the

main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers

starting with the address of

the main unit in the same

group +1. (Main unit address

+1, main unit address +2,

main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but

unique address to each of

these units after assigning an

address to all indoor units.

None of these addresses

may overlap any of the in-

door unit addresses.

3MA

remote

control-

ler

Main

remote

controller

MA No

settings re-

quired.

- Enter the same indoor unit

group settings on the sys-

tem controller as the ones

that were entered on the MA

remote controller.

Main

Sub

remote

controller

MA Sub

remote con-

troller

Settings to be made accord-

ing to the remote controller

function selection

4 Heat source unit OC

OS1

OS2

51 to 100 Assign sequential address to

the heat source units in the

same refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are au-

tomatically designated as

OC, OS1, and OS2. (Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

[ II Restrictions ]

37- 37 -

HWE09080 GB

6. System with one heat source unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units) <PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as

shown in the table below, one or more transmission

boosters (sold separately) are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in

parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable

indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each

heat source unit.)

The table above shows the number of transmission

boosters that is required by the system with three BC

controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted

from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor

units can be connected.

4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop in-

put(CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of

indoor units. Refer to "[5] 7. Manual address setup for

both indoor and heat source units"

5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units

in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 7. An

example of a system with one heat source unit to which

2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected".

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L1 +L2+L3+L4+L5 200m[656ft]

L1 +L2+L3+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Maximum overall line length

(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])

m1 200m [656ft]

m2+m3 200m [656ft]

m4+m5 200m [656ft]

TB5

A1 B2

TB5

S12

TB5

0000

TB5

A1 B2

GroupGroup

A1 B2

L11

L4 L5

L12 L13

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

*1. When BS is connected to the system,

automatic address setup is not available.

TB7

M1 M2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3 TB02

M1 M2

TB02

M1 M2

L3L1 L2

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Number of transmission

booster (sold separately) re-

quired

1 unit 2 units

When the P72 and P96 models

are not included in the connect-

ed indoor units

27 - 50 units -

When the P72 or P96 model is

included in the connected in-

door units

21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

- 38 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block

for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the

heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for

indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main

BC controller (BC), and of the terminal block for indoor-

heat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit

(IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)

Only use shielded cables.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of

capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the

same capacity, in the order of address from small to

large).

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source

units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block

(TB02) on the BC controller (BC), and the S terminal of

the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the

shield of the shielded cable.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA

remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the

terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA).

(Non-polarized two-wire)

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system,

connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on

the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA

remote controllers.

Set one of the MA remote controllers as a sub controller.

(Refer to the Instruction Manual for the MA remote con-

troller for the setting method.)

Group operation of indoor units

To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisy-

chain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on

all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect

terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the in-

door unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA re-

motecontroller. (Non-polarized two-wire)

When performing a group operation of indoor units that

have different functions, "Automatic indoor-heat source

addresssetup" is not available.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal

block(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate ter-

minals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC).

(Non-polarized two-wire)

Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the

same system will automatically be made. (It is required

that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source

unit.)

When performing an interlocked operation of part of the

indoor units in the system with a LOSSNAY unit, using a

LOSSNAY unit alone without interlocking it with any

units, performing an interlock operation of more than 16

indoor units with a LOSSNAY unit, or connecting two or

more LOSSNAY units to the same refrigerant system,

the automatic address setup function is not available.

5) Switch setting

No address settings required.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the

same).

Proce-

dures Unit or controller Address set-

ting range Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor unit Main unit IC No settings

required.

- Port number setting is re-

quired

To perform a group opera-

tion of indoor units that fea-

ture different functions, the

automatic IC/OC address

setup function is not avail-

able.

Sub unit IC

2 LOSSNAY LC No settings

required.

-00

3MA

remote con-

troller

Main

remote con-

troller

MA No settings

required.

-Main

Sub

remote con-

troller

MA Sub

remote con-

troller

Settings to be

made with the

Sub/Main

switch

4 Heat source unit OC

No settings

required.

-00

5 Auxiliary

heat source

unit

controller

BC No settings

required.

-00

[ II Restrictions ]

39- 39 -

HWE09080 GB

7. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected

(manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units) <PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as

shown in the table below, one or more transmission

boosters (sold separately) are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in

parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable

indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each

heat source unit.)

The table above shows the number of transmission

boosters that is required by the system with three BC

controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted

from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor

units can be connected.

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 6.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

TB7

TB3 TB02

TB5

A1 B2

TB5

S12

TB5

0403

TB5

A1 B2

* If the BC address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to either the OC, OS, or BS, use a different, unused address.

OC, OS, and BS addresses (lowest indoor unit address in the group plus +50) have higher priority than the BS address.

TB5

S12

TB5

0807

A1 B2

M1M2M1M2

L11

L4 L5

L12 L13

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

M1M2 M1M2 M1M2

M1M2M1M2M1M2

TB3

M1 M2

TB02

L1 L2

GroupGroup

Group

Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Number of transmission

booster (sold separately)

required

1 unit 2 units

When the P72 and P96 models are not in-

cluded in the connected indoor units

27 - 50

units -

When the P72 or P96 model is included in

the connected indoor units

21 - 39

units

40 - 50

units

- 40 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block

for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the

heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for

indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main

and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of the terminal

block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on

each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)

Only use shielded cables.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of

capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the

same capacity, in the order of address from small to

large).

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source

units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block

(TB02) on BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal

block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the

shielded cable.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

No connection is required.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 6.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 6.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals

on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-po-

larized two-wire)

Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSS-

NAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Re-

fer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote

Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote

controller for the setting method.)

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the

same).

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Address

setting

range

Setting method Notes

Fac-

tory

set-

ting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main

unit in the group.

In a system with a sub BC controller,

make the settings for the indoor units in

the following order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main

BC controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in

the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)"

is true.

Port number setting is

required

To perform a group op-

eration of indoor units

that feature different

functions, designate

the indoor unit in the

group with the greatest

number of functions as

the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with

the address of the main unit in the same

group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit

address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to

each of these units after assigning an ad-

dress to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may

overlap any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3MA

remote

controller

Main

remote

controller

MA No set-

tings re-

quired.

-Main

Sub

remote

controller

MA Sub

remote

controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/

Main switch

4 Heat source unit OC

51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat

source units in the same refrigerant cir-

cuit.

The heat source units are automatically

designated as OC and OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

If the addresses that is as-

signed to the main BC con-

troller overlaps any of the

addresses that are assigned

to the heat source units or to

the sub BC controller, use a

different, unused address

within the setting range.

The use of a sub BC control-

ler requires the connection

of a main BC controller.

5 Auxiliary

heat

source

unit

BCcon-

troller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of

the smallest address of the indoor units

that are connected to the sub BC controller

and 50.

BC control-

ler (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

41- 41 -

HWE09080 GB

8. Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units <PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor

units that are connected to different heat source units

with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)

must be performed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for

transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only

one of the heat source units.

6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as

shown in the table below, one or more transmission

boosters (sold separately) are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in

parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable

indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each

heat source unit.)

The left table shows the number of transmission boost-

ers that is required by the system with three BC control-

lers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the

above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units

can be connected.

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L11+L12 200m [656ft]

L21+L22 200m [656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

L31+L21 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft]

L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft]

TB5

A1 B2

TB5

S12

TB5

12 12

0402

TB5 TB15

A1 B2

Group

TB5

A1 B2

GroupGroup

Group

To be left

unconnected

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

L12

L22

L11

L21

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2

M1 M2M1 M2

M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

L31

To be left

unconnected

TB02

To be left

unconnected

To be connected

Number of transmission boost-

er (sold separately) required

1 unit 2 units

When the P72 and P96 mod-

els are not included in the con-

nected indoor units

27 - 50 units -

When the P72 or P96 model is

included in the connected in-

door units

21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

- 42 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 7.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 7.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the

heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and

on the OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, replace the power jump-

er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on

only one of the heat source units.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of

capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the

same capacity, in the order of address from small to

large).

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on

the heat source units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the

shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and

the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat

source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with

CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 6.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 7.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Same as [5] 7.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the

same).

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Address

setting

range

Setting method Notes

Fac-

tory

set-

ting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main

unit in the group.

In a system with a sub BC controller,

make the settings for the indoor units in

the following order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main

BC controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in

the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)"

is true.

Port number setting is

required

To perform a group op-

eration of indoor units

that feature different

functions, designate

the indoor unit in the

group with the greatest

number of functions as

the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with

the address of the main unit in the same

group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit

address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to

each of these units after assigning an ad-

dress to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may

overlap any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3MA

remote

controller

Main

remote

controller

MA No set-

tings re-

quired.

-Main

Sub

remote

controller

MA Sub

remote

controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/

Main switch

4 Heat source unit OC

51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat

source units in the same refrigerant cir-

cuit.

The heat source units are automatically

designated as OC and OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

If the addresses that is as-

signed to the main BC con-

troller overlaps any of the

addresses that are assigned

to the heat source units or to

the sub BC controller, use a

different, unused address

within the setting range.

The use of a sub BC control-

ler requires the connection

of a main BC controller.

5 Auxiliary

heat

source

unit

BCcon-

troller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of

the smallest address of the indoor units

that are connected to the sub BC controller

and 50.

BC control-

ler (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

43- 43 -

HWE09080 GB

9. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is pow-

ered from a heat source unit <PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con-

nected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group

of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are

connected to different heat source units with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be per-

formed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the earth terminal (

) on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control

(TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mat-

ed with CN40.

6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the

table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)

are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.

(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are

listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)

The left table shows the number of transmission boosters

that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For

each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-men-

tioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected.

7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission

line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connec-

tor on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 8.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25 mm2

[AWG16] min.)

L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]

L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]

TB5

S12

TB5

0504

TB5

L31

System controller

ABS

Note1

L32

To be connected

m2 m1

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,

leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

Note2 LM adapters require the power supply

capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

M1 M2M1 M2M1 M2

M1 M2

M1 M2M1 M2

M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

Group

Group Group

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

TB02

L22

L21

L12

L11

Number of transmission booster

(sold separately) required

1 unit 2 units

When the P72 and P96 models are

not included in the connected in-

door units

27 - 50 units -

When the P72 or P96 model is in-

cluded in the connected indoor

units

21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

- 44 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 7.

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 7.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller, ter-

minals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line

for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC)

in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat source units

(OC and OS) in the same refrigerant circuit.

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission

line for centralized control, replace the power jumper con-

nector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one

of the heat source units.

If a system controller is connected, set the central control

switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source units

to "ON."

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are

automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the

order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units

have the same capacity, in the order of address from

small to large).

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on

the system controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the

shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and

the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat

source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with

CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 6.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 6.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block

(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals

on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission

line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)

Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit

using the system controller. (Refer to the operation man-

ual for the system controller for the setting method.) In-

terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the

ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone

is connected.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the

same).

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Ad-

dress

setting

range

Setting method Notes

Fac-

tory

set-

ting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to

Assign the smallest address to the main unit

in the group.

In a system with a sub BC controller, make

the settings for the indoor units in the fol-

lowing order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC

controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in the

way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is

required

To perform a group op-

eration of indoor units

that feature different

functions, designate

the indoor unit in the

group with the greatest

number of functions as

the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the

address of the main unit in the same group

+1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address

+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to

each of these units after assigning an address

to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may

overlap any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3MA

remote

controller

Main

remote con-

troller

MA No set-

tings re-

quired.

-Make the same indoor unit

group settings with the system

controller as the ones that

were made with the MA remote

controller.

Main

Sub

remote con-

troller

MA Sub

remote

controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/

Main switch

4 Heat source unit

(Note)

51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat

source units in the same refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are automatically

designated as OC and OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

If the addresses that is as-

signed to the main BC con-

troller overlaps any of the

addresses that are assigned

to the heat source units or to

the sub BC controller, use a

different, unused address

within the setting range.

The use of a sub BC control-

ler requires the connection

of a main BC controller.

5 Auxiliary

heat

source

unit

BCcon-

troller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the

smallest address of the indoor units that are

connected to the sub BC controller and 50.

BC control-

ler (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

45- 45 -

HWE09080 GB

10. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line (ex-

cept LM adapter) <PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con-

nected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group

of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are

connected to different heat source units with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be per-

formed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmis-

sion line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the heat source

units.

6) A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to the indoor-

heat source transmission line, with the exception that only one G(B)-

50A may be connected.

7) When the total number of indoor units exceeds 20 (12 if one or more

indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected), it may not be

possible to connect a system controller to the indoor-heat source

transmission line.

8) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the

table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)

are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.

(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are

listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)

The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is

required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC con-

troller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two ad-

ditional indoor units can be connected.

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L11+L12 200m [656ft]

L21+L22 200m [656ft]

L25 200m [656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

L31+L21 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]

L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

TB5

S12

TB5

0504

TB5

GroupGroupGroup

Group Group

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

To be connected

m2 m1

Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the

indoor-heat source transmission line.

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

L31

ABS

L25

M2M1 M2M1

M2M1 M2M1 M2M1 M2M1 M2M1

M2M1

M2M1M2M1

M2M1

To be left

unconnected

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

Move the male connector .

from CN41 to CN40.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

System controller

Note1

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

TB02

L22

L21

L12

L11

Number of transmission

booster (sold separately)

required

1 unit 2 units

When the P72 and P96 models are not in-

cluded in the connected indoor units

27 - 50

units -

When the P72 or P96 model is included in

the connected indoor units

21 - 39

units

40 - 50

units

- 46 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-

heat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC

and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission

line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), of the

terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on

each indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal of the system control-

ler.(Non-polarized two-wire)

Only use shielded cables.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatical-

ly designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to

small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of

address from small to large).

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC

and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and

BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit

(IC) with the shield of the shielded cable.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmis-

sion line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC)

in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS in the same re-

frigerant circuit.

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for

centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the con-

trol board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all

heat source units to "ON."

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat

source units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the shielded cable.

Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the ter-

minal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper con-

nector is mated with CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 6.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 6.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the in-

door units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for

indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC).

(Non-polarized two-wire)

Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the

system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system

controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote

controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone is con-

nected.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the

same).

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Ad-

dress

setting

range

Setting method Notes

Fac-

tory

set-

ting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to

Assign the smallest address to the main unit

in the group.

In a system with a sub BC controller, make

the settings for the indoor units in the fol-

lowing order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC

controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in the

way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is

required

To perform a group op-

eration of indoor units

that feature different

functions, designate

the indoor unit in the

group with the greatest

number of functions as

the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the

address of the main unit in the same group

+1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address

+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to

each of these units after assigning an address

to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may

overlap any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3MA

remote

controller

Main

remote con-

troller

MA No set-

tings re-

quired.

-Make the same indoor unit

group settings with the system

controller as the ones that

were made with the MA remote

controller.

Main

Sub

remote con-

troller

MA Sub

remote

controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/

Main switch

4 Heat source unit OC

51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat

source units in the same refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are automatically

designated as OC and OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

If the addresses that is as-

signed to the main BC con-

troller overlaps any of the

addresses that are assigned

to the heat source units or to

the sub BC controller, use a

different, unused address

within the setting range.

The use of a sub BC control-

ler requires the connection

of a main BC controller.

5 Auxiliary

heat

source

unit

BCcon-

troller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the

smallest address of the indoor units that are

connected to the sub BC controller and 50.

BC control-

ler (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

47- 47 -

HWE09080 GB

11. A system with multiple BC controller connections (with a system controller connected to the centralized control line)

<PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con-

nected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group

of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are

connected to different heat source units with each other.

4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be per-

formed only on one of the heat source units.

5) Short-circuit the S (shield) terminal of the terminal block for the cen-

tral control unit (TB7) and the ground terminal ( ) on the heat

source unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40.

6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the

table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)

are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.

(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are

listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)

The table above shows the number of transmission boost-

ers that is required by the system with three BC controllers.

For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-

mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be con-

nected.

7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission

line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connec-

tor on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L11+L12 200m [656ft]

L21+L22 200m [656ft]

2) Transmission line for centralized control

L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft]

3) MA remote controller wiring

Maximum overall line length

(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])

m1 200m [656ft]

m2+m3 200m [656ft]

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]

L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]

L11

L21

TB3

TB7

L31

ABS

L32

OS1

TB3

TB7

M1M2

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

SW2-1 OFF ON

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40

Group

Group Group Group

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be connected

M1M2

M1M2 M1M2

M1M2

M1M2 M1M2

M1M2

*1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

*2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

TB5

A1 B2

TB5

S12

TB5

0503

L12

L22

TB5

A1 B2

TB5

A1 B2

TB02

53 57

TB02

M1M2

TB02

1 1 2 1 222 12

1 1 2 1 1

TB5

323 1

Numbers in the square indicate port numbers.

Connection to BC controllers

56 59

Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

TB5

A1 B2

TB02

1 2

TB5

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

System

controller

Note1

M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2

M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2

M1M2

Number of transmission

booster (sold separately)

required

1 unit 2 units

When the P72 and P96 models are not in-

cluded in the connected indoor units

27 - 50

units -

When the P72 or P96 model is included in

the connected indoor units

21 - 39

units

40 - 50

units

- 48 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-

heat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC

and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission

line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of

the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on

each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)

Shielded cable connection

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are auto-

matically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of ca-

pacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same

capacity, in the order of address from small to large).

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC

and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and

BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit

(IC) with the shield of the shielded cable.

Only use shielded cables.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the terminal block for transmission

line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in dif-

ferent refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS (Note) in the same

refrigerant circuit.

If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for

centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the con-

trol board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all

heat source units to "ON."

Only use shielded cables.

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on the system

controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the shielded cable. Short-

circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal

block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector

is mated with CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system

Same as [5] 6.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 6.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the in-

door unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for

indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC).

(Non-polarized two-wire)

Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit us-

ing the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for

the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock set-

ting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF re-

mote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same).

Pro

ce-

du-

res

Unit or controller

Ad-

dress

setting

range

Setting method Notes

Fact

ory

set-

ting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the

group.

In a system with a sub BC controller, make the set-

tings for the indoor units in the following order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC control-

ler

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that

the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is re-

quired

To perform a group opera-

tion of indoor units that

feature different functions,

designate the indoor unit

in the group with the

greatest number of func-

tions as the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of

the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address

+1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these

units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may

overlap any of the indoor unit ad-

dresses.

3MA

remote

control-

ler

Main re-

mote

controller

MA No set-

tings re-

quired.

-Make the same indoor unit group

settings with the system controller

as the ones that were made with

the MA remote controller.

Mai

Sub re-

mote con-

troller

MA Sub re-

mote

controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/Main switch

4 Heat source unit OC

51 to 100 The sum of the smallest address of the indoor units in

the same system and 50.

Assign sequential address to the heat source units in

the same refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are automatically designated

as OC and OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100, set

the rotary switches to 50. 00

5 Auxilia-

ry heat

source

unit

controller

(Sub)

BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest

address of the indoor units that are connected to the

sub BC controller and 50.

To set the address to 100, set

the rotary switches to 50.

If the addresses that is assigned

to the main BC controller over-

laps any of the addresses that

are assigned to the heat source

units or to the sub BC control-

ler, use a different, unused ad-

dress within the setting range.

The use of a sub BC controller

requires the connection of a

main BC controller.

BC con-

troller

(Main)

BC 51 to

100

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

49- 49 -

HWE09080 GB

[6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected

1. A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line <PQHY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor

units that are connected to different heat source units

with each other.

4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board

from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on

the terminal block for centralized control on only one of

the heat source units.

6) A transmission booster must be connected to a system

in which the total number of connected indoor units ex-

ceeds 20.

7) A transmission booster is required in a system to which

more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units

of the 72 model or above are connected.

8) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, leave the power jumper

connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 3.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 4.

3) ME remote controller wiring

Maximum overall line length

(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])

m1 10m [32ft]

m2+m3 10m [32ft]

If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a

cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section

of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in

the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line dis-

tance described in 1).

When connected to the terminal block on the Simple re-

mote controller, use cables that meet the following cable

size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-14].

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 or larger)

Same as [5] 4.

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

TB5

S 1 2

TB5

1 2

05 04

TB5

1 2

TB5

1 2

A B

101

A B

102

A B

103

Group Group

Group Group Group

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

L12 L11

L22 L21

L31

A B S

L32

Note1

System controller

Interlock operation with

the ventilation unit

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

To be connected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

104

A B

154

A B

106

A B

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,

leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

Note2 LM adapters require the power supply

capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

- 50 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 1.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 1.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 4.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 4.

3) ME remote controller wiring

ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the in-

door-heat source transmission line.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Refer to the section on Switch Setting.

Performing a group operation (including the group

operation of units in different refrigerant circuits).

Refer to the section on Switch Setting.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Same as [5] 4.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller Address setting

range Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad-

dress to the main unit in

the group.

To perform a group

operation of indoor

units that have differ-

ent functions, desig-

nate the indoor unit in

the group with the

greatest number of

functions as the main

unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential num-

bers starting with the ad-

dress of the main unit in

the same group +1.

(Main unit address +1,

main unit address +2,

main unit address +3,

etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but

unique address to each

of these units after as-

signing an address to all

indoor units.

None of these ad-

dresses may overlap

any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3ME re-

mote

controller

Main

remote

controller

RC 101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit

address in the group

It is not necessary to

set the 100s digit.

To set the address

to 200, set the rota-

ry switches to 00.

101

Sub

remote

controller

RC 151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit

address in the group

4 Heat source unit OC

OS1

OS2

51 to 100 Assign sequential ad-

dress to the heat source

units in the same refrig-

erant circuit. The heat

source units are auto-

matically designated as

OC, OS1, and OS2.

(Note)

To set the address to

100, set the rotary

switches to 50.

[ II Restrictions ]

51- 51 -

HWE09080 GB

2. A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line <PQRY>

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both

be connected to the same group of indoor units.

2) No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected to

a group of indoor units.

3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units

that are connected to different heat source units with each

other.

4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board

from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the

terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat

source units.

6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown

in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold

separately) are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in par-

allel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor

units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source

unit.)

The left table shows the number of transmission boosters

that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For

each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-men-

tioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected.

7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission

line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connec-

tor on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 8.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 9.

3) ME remote controller wiring

Maximum overall line length

(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])

m1 10m [32ft]

m2+m3 10m [32ft]

If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a

cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section

of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in

the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line dis-

tance described in (1).

When connected to the terminal block on the Simple re-

mote controller, use cables that meet the following cable

size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-16].

4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25 mm2 [AWG16] or large)

Same as [5] 9.

TB5

S12

TB5

0504

TB5

A1 B2

101

A1 B2

102

A1 B2

103

Group

Group Group

To be connected

M1M2 M1M2M1M2

M1M2 M1M2 M1M2 M1M2

L31

ABS

L32

TB3

TB7

M1 M2

TB3

TB7

M1M2

M1M2 M1M2

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

To be left

unconnected

Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

*1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

*2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

System controller

Note1

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

M1M2

M1M2 M1M2

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

104

A1 B2

154

A1 B2

106

A1 B2

TB02

L12

L11

L22

L21

M1M2

Number of transmission booster

(sold separately) required

1 unit 2 units 3 units

When the P72 and P96 models

are not included in the connected

indoor units

15 - 34

units

35 - 50

units -

When the P72 or P96 model is in-

cluded in the connected indoor

units

11 - 26

units

27 - 42

units

43 - 50

units

- 52 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 8.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 6.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 9.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 9.

3) ME remote controller wiring

ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the in-

door-heat source transmission line.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Refer to the section on Switch Setting.

Performing a group operation (including the group

operation of units in different refrigerant circuits).

Refer to the section on Switch Setting.

4) LOSSNAY connection

Same as [5] 9.

5) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the

same).

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Ad-

dress

setting

range

Setting method Notes

Fac-

tory

set-

ting

1 Indoor

unit

Main unit IC 01 to

Assign the smallest address to the main unit

in the group.

In a system with a sub BC controller, make

the settings for the indoor units in the fol-

lowing order.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC

controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC

controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor units in the

way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is

required

To perform a group op-

eration of indoor units

that have different func-

tions, set the indoor unit

in the group with the

greatest number of

functions as the main

unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the

address of the main unit in the same group

+1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address

+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2 LOSSNAY LC 01 to

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to

each of these units after assigning an address

to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may

overlap any of the indoor unit

addresses.

3ME

remote

controller

Main

remote con-

troller

RC 101 to

150

Add 100 to the main unit address in

the group

It is not necessary to set the

100s digit.

To set the address to 200,

set the rotary switches to 00.

101

Sub

remote con-

troller

RC 151 to

200

Add 150 to the main unit address in

the group

4 Heat source unit OC

51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat

source units in the same refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are automatically

designated as OC and OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

If the addresses that is as-

signed to the main BC con-

troller overlaps any of the

addresses that are assigned

to the heat source units or to

the sub BC controller, use a

different, unused address

within the setting range.

The use of a sub BC control-

ler requires the connection

of a main BC controller.

5 Auxiliary

heat

source

unit

BCcon-

troller (Sub) BS 51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the

smallest address of the indoor units that are

connected to the sub BC controller and 50.

BC control-

ler (Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

53- 53 -

HWE09080 GB

[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected

1. PQHY

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) Be sure to connect a system controller.

2) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot

both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

3) Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote

controller addresses that are smaller than those of the in-

door units that are connected to the ME remote control-

ler.

4) No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

5) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected

to a group of indoor units.

6) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor

units that are connected to different heat source units

with each other.

7) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board

from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

8) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on

the terminal block for centralized control on only one of

the heat source units.

9) A transmission booster must be connected to a system

in which the total number of connected indoor units ex-

ceeds 20.

10) A transmission booster is required in a system to which

more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units

of the 72 model or above are connected.

11) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, leave the power jumper

connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 3.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 4.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

4) ME remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

5) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25mm2 or larger)

Same as [5] 4.

TB5 TB

1 2

TB5 TB

1 2

TB5 TB

1 2

106

TB5 TB

1 2

A B

TB5

1 2

TB5 TB

1 2

04 03

104

A B

L11 L12

L21 L22

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

TB3

TB7

OS1

TB3

TB7

OS2

TB3

TB7

M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

L31

A B S

L32

M1 M2

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

OC OS1 OS2

51 52 53

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Group Group

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

Note1

System controller

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,

leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

Note2 LM adapters require the power supply

capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

To be connected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

M1 M2

- 54 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 1.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 1.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 4.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 4.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 1.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [5] 1.

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 1.

4) ME remote controller wiring

Same as [6]

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Same as [6]

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [6]

5) LOSSNAY connection

Same as [5] 4.

6) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

Proce-

dures Unit or controller

Address

setting

range

Setting method Notes Factory

setting

1Opera-

tion

with the

MA re-

mote

control-

ler

In-

door

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest address

to the main unit in the group.

Assign an address smaller

than that of the indoor unit that

is connected to the ME re-

mote controller.

Enter the same indoor unit

group settings on the system

controller as the ones that

were entered on the MA re-

mote controller.

To perform a group operation

of indoor units that have differ-

ent functions, designate the

indoor unit in the group with

the greatest number of func-

tions as the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential num-

bers starting with the ad-

dress of the main unit in

the same group +1. (Main

unit address +1, main unit

address +2, main unit ad-

dress +3, etc.)

re-

mote

con-

troller

Main re-

mote con-

troller

MA No

settings

required.

-Main

Sub

remote

controller

MA Sub

remote

controller

Settings to be made ac-

cording to the remote

controller function selec-

tion

2Opera-

tion

with the

ME re-

mote

control-

ler

In-

door

unit

Main unit IC 01 to 50 Assign the smallest ad-

dress to the main unit in

the group.

Enter the indoor unit group set-

tings on the system controller

(MELANS).

Assign an address larger than

those of the indoor units that

are connected to the MA re-

mote controller.

To perform a group operation

of indoor units that have differ-

ent functions, designate the

indoor unit in the group with

the greatest number of func-

tions as the main unit.

Sub unit Assign sequential num-

bers starting with the ad-

dress of the main unit in

the same group +1. (Main

unit address +1, main unit

address +2, main unit ad-

dress +3, etc.)

ME re-

mote

con-

troller

Main re-

mote con-

troller

RC 101 to

150

Add 100 to the main unit

address in the group.

It is not necessary to set

the 100s digit.

To set the address to 200,

set the rotary switches to

00.

101

Sub

remote

controller

RC 151 to

200

Add 150 to the main unit

address in the group.

3 LOSSNAY LC 01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but

unique address to each of

these units after assign-

ing an address to all in-

door units.

None of these addresses

may overlap any of the in-

door unit addresses.

4 Heat source unit OC

OS1

OS2

51 to 100 Assign sequential ad-

dress to the heat source

units in the same refriger-

antcircuit. The heat

source units are automat-

ically designated as OC,

OS1, and OS2.(Note)

To set the address to 100,

set the rotary switches to 50.

[ II Restrictions ]

55- 55 -

HWE09080 GB

2. PQRY

(1) Sample control wiring

(2) Cautions

1) Be sure to connect a system controller.

2) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con-

nected to the same group of indoor units.

3) Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller ad-

dresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are con-

nected to the ME remote controller.

4) No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group

of indoor units.

5) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group

of indoor units.

6) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are

connected to different heat source units with each other.

7) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41

to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

8) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal

block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units.

9) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the

table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)

are required.

To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.

(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are

listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)

The left table shows the number of transmission boost-

ers that is required by the system with three BC control-

lers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the

above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units

can be connected.

10) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis-

sion line for centralized control, leave the power jumper

connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(3) Maximum allowable length

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 8.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 9.

3) MA remote controller wiring

Same as [5] 6.

4) ME remote controller wiring

Same as [6] 2.

5) Maximum line distance via heat source unit

(1.25 mm2 or larger)

Same as [5] 4.

TB5

106

TB5

A1 B2

TB5

S12

TB5

0403

104

A1 B2

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

TB3

TB7

L31

ABS

L32

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is.

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be left

unconnected

To be connected

System controller

Note1

*1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).

*2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

M1M2

M1M2 M1 M2 M1 M2

M1M2M1 M2M1M2

M1 M2M1 M2M1 M2

M1 M2M1 M2

TB02

L22

L21

L12

L11

SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male

connector on

CN41 as it is. SW2-1 OFF ON

Move the male connector

from CN41 to CN40.

Group Group

GroupGroup

M1M2

Number of transmission booster

(sold separately) required

1 unit 2 units 3 units

When the P72 and P96 models

are not included in the connected

indoor units

15 - 34

units

35 - 50

units -

When the P72 or P96 model is in-

cluded in the connected indoor

units

11 - 26

units

27 - 42

units

43 - 50

units

- 56 -

[ II Restrictions ]

GBHWE09080

(4) Wiring method

1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Same as [5] 8.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 6.

2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 9.

Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 9.

3) MA remote controller wiring

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [5] 6.

4) ME remote controller wiring

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys-

tem

Group operation of indoor units

Same as [6] 1.

5) LOSSNAY connection

Same as [5] 9.

6) Switch setting

Address setting is required as follows.

[ II Restrictions ]

57- 57 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) Address setting method

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.

They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same).

Pro-

ce-

dure

Unit or controller

Ad-

dress

set-

ting

range

Setting method Notes

Facto-

ry set-

ting

1 Opera-

tion with

the

MA re-

mote

controller

In-

door

unit

Main

unit

IC 01 to

Assign the smallest address to

the main unit in the group.

In a system with a sub BC con-

troller, make the settings for the

indoor units in the following or-

der.

(i) Indoor unit to be connected to

the main BC controller

(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to

sub BC controller 1

(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to

sub BC controller 2

Make the settings for the indoor

units in the way that the formula "(i)

< (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Assign an address smaller than that of

the indoor unit that is connected to the

ME remote controller.

Enter the same indoor unit group set-

tings on the system controller as the

ones that were entered on the MA re-

mote controller.

To perform a group operation of indoor

units that have different functions, des-

ignate the indoor unit in the group with

the greatest number of

Port number setting is required

Sub

unit

IC 01 to

Assign sequential numbers start-

ing with the address of the main

unit in the same group +1. (Main

unit address +1, main unit address

+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

re-

mote

con-

troller

Main re-

mote

control-

ler

MA No

set-

tings re-

quired.

-Main

Sub

remote

control-

ler

MA Sub

remote

control-

ler

Settings to be made according

to the remote controller func-

tion selection

2 Opera-

tion with

the

ME re-

mote

controller

In-

door

unit

Main

unit

IC 01 to

Assign the smallest address

to the main unit in the group.

Assign an address higher than those of

the indoor units that are connected to

the MA remote controller.

Make the initial settings for the indoor

unit group settings via the system con-

troller.

To perform a group operation of indoor

units that have different functions, des-

ignate the indoor unit in the group with

the greatest number of functions as the

main unit.

Port number setting is required.

Addresses that are assigned to the in-

door units that are connected to the sub

BC controller should be higher than the

addresses that are assigned to the in-

door units that are connected to the

main BC controller.

Sub

unit

IC 01 to

Assign sequential numbers

starting with the address of the

main unit in the same group

+1. (Main unit address +1,

main unit address +2, main

unit address +3, etc.)

re-

mote

con-

troller

Main re-

mote

control-

ler

RC 101 to

150

Add 100 to the main unit ad-

dress in the group.

It is not necessary to set the 100s

digit.

To set the address to 200, set it to

00.

101

Sub

remote

control-

ler

RC 151 to

200

Add 150 to the main unit ad-

dress in the group.

3 LOSSNAY LC 01 to

Assign an arbitrary but unique

address to each of these units

after assigning an address to

all indoor units.

None of these addresses may over-

lap any of the indoor unit addresses.

4 Heat source unit OC

51 to

100

Assign sequential address to the

heat source units in the same

refrigerant circuit.

The heat source units are auto-

matically designated as OC and

OS.(Note)

To set the address to 100, set it to 50.

If the addresses that is assigned to the

main BC controller overlaps any of the

addresses that are assigned to the heat

source units or to the sub BC controller,

use a different, unused address within

the setting range.

The use of a sub BC controller requires

the connection of a main BC controller.

5 Auxiliary

heat

source

unit

BCcontroller (Sub) BS 51 to

100

Assign an address that equals the

sum of the smallest address of the

indoor units that are connected to

the sub BC controller and 50.

BC controller

(Main) BC OC (or OS if it exists) +1

[ II Restrictions ]

- 58 -

HWE09080 GB

[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length

(1) End branching <PQHY>

P72 - P120 models

Unit: m [ft]

Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of

pipes

Length Total pipe length A+B+C+D

+a+b+c+d+e+f

300 [984] or less

Total pipe length (L) from the heat source unit to

the farthest indoor unit

A+B+C+c or

A+D+f

165 [541] or less

(Equivalent length 190

[623] or less)

Total pipe length from the first branch to the far-

thest indoor unit ( )

B+C+c or

D+f

40 [131] or less

Height

difference

Between indoor and

heat source units

Heat source unit above

indoor unit

H 50 [164] or less

Heat source unit below

indoor unit

H' 40 [131] or less

Between indoor units h 15 [49] or less

a c

C d

Branch joint

Indoor Indoor Indoor

cap

Branch header

(Heat source unit above indoor unit)

(Heat source unit below indoor unit)

Heat source unit

First branch

(Branch joint)

[ II Restrictions ]

- 59 -

HWE09080 GB

P144 - P360 models

Unit: m [ft]

Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of

pipes

Length Between heat source units A+B+C+D 10 [32] or less

Total pipe length A+B+C+D+E+F+G+I+J

+K+M+a+b+c+d+e+f+g

300 [984] or less

Total pipe length (L) from the heat source unit to

the farthest indoor unit

A(B)+C+E+J+K+M+i 165 [541] or less

(Equivalent length 190

[623] or less)

Total pipe length from the first branch to the far-

thest indoor unit ( )

G+I+J+i 40 [131] or less

Height

difference

Between indoor and heat source units H 50 [164] or less

(40 [131] or below if

heat source unit is be-

low indoor unit)

Between indoor units h1 15 [49] or less

Between heat source units h2 0.1[0.3] or less

Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor

E F G I

J K M

B D A

First branch

(Note)

To downstream units

Note : "Total sum of downstream unit model numbers"

in the table is the sum of the model numbers

of the units after point E in the figure.

Note1 Install the pipe that connects the branch pipe and the heat source units

in the way that it has a downward inclination toward the branch pipe.

Provide a trap on the pipe (gas pipe only) within 2 m from the

joint pipe if the total length of the pipe that connects the joint

pipe and the heat source unit exceeds 2 m.

Downward inclination To indoor unit

To indoor unit

Joint pipe

Trap

(gas pipe

only)

To indoor unit

Upward inclination

First liquid refrigerant distributor

First gas refrigerant distributor

Second gas refrigerant distributor

Second liquid refrigerant distributor

2m [6ft]

2m [6ft] Max.

[ II Restrictions ]

- 60 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Refrigerant pipe size <PQHY>

(1) Diameter of the refrigerant pipe between the heat source unit and the first branch (heat source unit pipe size)

(2) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first branch and the indoor unit (indoor unit pipe size)

(3) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the branches for connection to indoor units

(4) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor and the second distributor

Heat source unit set

name

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

P72 model ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P96 model ø9.52 [3/8"]*1

*1. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 90 m [295 ft].

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P120 model ø9.52 [3/8"]*2

*2. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 40 m [131 ft].

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P144 model ø12.7 [1/2"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P168 - 240 model ø15.88 [5/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P264 - 312models ø19.05 [3/4"] ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

P336- 360 models ø19.05 [3/4"] ø41.28 [1-5/8"]

Indoor unit model Pipe diameter (mm) [inch]

06 - 15 models Liquid pipe ø6.35 [1/4"]

Gas pipe ø12.7 [1/2"]

18 - 54 models Liquid pipe ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe ø15.88 [5/8"]

72 model Liquid pipe ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe ø19.05 [3/4"]

96 model Liquid pipe ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe ø22.2 [7/8"]

Total capacity of the

downstream units

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

- 54 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P72 - P108 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

P109 - P144 ø12.7 [1/2"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P145 - P240 ø15.88 [5/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P241 - P308 ø19.05 [3/4"] ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

P309 - ø19.05 [3/4"] ø41.28 [1-5/8"]

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

ø19.05 [3/4"] ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

[ II Restrictions ]

- 61 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor or the second distributor and heat source units

Heat source unit

model

Composing unit models Liquid pipe (mm) [inch] Gas pipe (mm) [inch]

P144 P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P72

P168 P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

P72

P192 P96

P96

P216 P120 ø12.7 [1/2"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

P96

P240 P120

P120

P264 P96 ø12.7 [1/2"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

P96

P72

P288 P96

P96

P312 P120

P96

P336 P120

P120

P96

P360 P120

P120

[ II Restrictions ]

- 62 -

HWE09080 GB

(1) System that requires 16 BC controller ports or fewer <System with only the main BC controller or standard BC con-

troller> <PQRY>

Unit: m [ft]

Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes

Length Total pipe length A+B+a+b+c+d Refer to the restrictions on the total piping

length in the graph on the next page.

Total pipe length from the heat source

unit to the farthest indoor unit

A+B+d 165 [541] or less

(Equivalent length 190 [623] or less)

Between heat source unit and BC con-

troller

A 110 [360] or less

Between BC controller and indoor unit B+d 40 [131] or less*1

*1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the

restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model).

Height

difference Between indoor

and heat source

units

Heat source unit

above indoor unit

H 50 [164] or less

Heat source unit

below indoor unit

H' 40 [131] or less

Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15[49](10[32]) or less*2

*2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

Between indoor units h2 15[49](10[32]) or less *2

HH'

Heat source unit

BC controller

Reducer (P06 - P18 models)

(Supplied with the BC Controller)

Junction pipe

(CMY-R160-J)

*Use a main BC controller when connecting the heat source units of

P144 model or above.

Branch joint

(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Indoor Indoor Indoor

Indoor

(P06 - P54 models) (P72 or P96 model) Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

[ II Restrictions ]

- 63 -

HWE09080 GB

1) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two

ports before connecting them.

2) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port.

3) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating).

0 5 10 15

Pipe length between main BC

controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units

Restrictions on pipe length [PQRY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A/YHMU-A]

1000

900

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

100 110

Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft])

Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft])

[32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360]

[3280]

[2952]

[2624]

[2296]

[1968]

[1640]

[1312]

[984]

[656]

[32]

[16] [32] [49]

[64]

[98]

[131]

[164]

[196]

[229]

[ II Restrictions ]

- 64 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers <Heat source unit P120 model

or below>

Unit: m [ft]

Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes

Length Total pipe length A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e+f Refer to the restrictions on the total pip-

ing length in the graphon the next page.

Total pipe length from the heat

source unit to the farthest in-

door unit

A+C+E+f 165 [541] or less

(Equivalent length 190 [623] or less)

Between heat source unit and

BC controller

A 110 [360] or less

Between BC controller and in-

door unit

B+d or C+D+e

or C+E+f

40 [131] or less*1

*1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the

restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model).

Height

differ-

ence Between indoor

and heat source

units

Heat source

unit above

indoor unit

H 50 [164] or less

Heat source

unit below

indoor unit

H' 40 [131] or less

Between indoor unit and BC

controller

h1 15 [49](10[32]) or less*2

*2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

Between indoor units h2 15 [49](10[32]) or less *2

Between the BC controller

(main or sub) and the sub BC

controller

h3 15 [49] or less

Branch joint

(CMY-Y202-G2)

(CMY-Y102L-G2)

(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Branch joint

(

CMY-Y102S-G2)

HH'

h1 h1

cdf

Aeh1

Heat source unit

BC controller (main)

BC controller (sub)

Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor

Indoor

Reducer (P06 - P18 models)

(Supplied with the BC Controller)

(P06 - P54 models) (P72 or P96 model) Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

Junction pipe

(CMY-R160-J)

[ II Restrictions ]

- 65 -

HWE09080 GB

1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes

will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers.

2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above.

3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel.

4) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two

ports before connecting them.

5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port.

6) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating).

7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or

below (when two GB type controllers are connected P126 or below for both combined).

The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below.

If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with

two sub controllers is P168 or below.

0 5 10 15

1000

900

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

100 110

Pipe length between main BC

controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units

Restrictions on pipe length [PQRY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A/YHMU-A]

Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft])

Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft])

[32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360]

[3280]

[2952]

[2624]

[2296]

[1968]

[1640]

[1312]

[984]

[656]

[32]

[16] [32] [49]

[64]

[98]

[131]

[164]

[196]

[229]

[ II Restrictions ]

- 66 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers <Heat source unit P144 model

or above>

Unit: m [ft]

Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes

Length Total pipe length F+G+A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e

Refer to the restrictions on the total pip-

ing length in the graph on the next page.

Total pipe length from the heat

source unit to the farthest in-

door unit

F(G)+A+C+E+f 165 [541] or less

(Equivalent length 190 [623] or less)

Between heat source unit and

BC controller

F(G)+A 110 [360] or less

Between BC controller and in-

door unit

B+d or C+D+e

or C+E+f

40 [131] or less*1

*1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe

the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model).

Between heat source units F+G 5 [16] or less

Height

differ-

ence Between indoor

and heat source

units

Heat source

unit above

indoor unit

H 50 [164] or less

Heat source

unit below

indoor unit

H' 40 [131] or less

Between indoor unit and BC

controller

h1 15 [49](10[32]) or less*2

*2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

Between indoor units h2 15 [49](10[32]) or less *2

Between the BC controller

(main or sub) and the sub BC

controller

h3 15 [49] or less

Between heat source units h4 0.1 [0.3] or less

Branch joint : CMY-Q100VBK

On the low-pressure side, the twinning kit connects to the pipes on site inside the heat source unit.

When different capacity units are combined, connect the kit to the larger capacity heat source unit.

Heat source unit

HH'

BC controller (main)

Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor

Indoor

BC controller (sub)

Branch joint

(CMY-Y202-G2)

(CMY-Y102L-G2)

(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Branch joint

(

CMY-Y102S-G2)

(P06 - P54 models) (P72 or P96 model) Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

Reducer (P06 - P18 models)

(Supplied with the BC Controller)

Junction pipe

(CMY-R160-J)

[ II Restrictions ]

- 67 -

HWE09080 GB

1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes

will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers.

2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above.

3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel.

4) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two

ports before connecting them.

5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port.

6) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating).

7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or

below (when two GB type controllers are connected, P126 or below for both combined).

The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below.

If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with

two sub controllers is P168 or below.

0 5 10 15

[PQRY-P144, P168, P192, P216, P240THMU-A/YHMU-A]

The height difference and the pipe length between

BC controller and indoor units

Restrictions on pipe length

Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft])

Pipe length between main BC

controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

[32]

[16] [32] [49]

[64]

[98]

[131]

[164]

[196]

[229]

110

1000

900

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

100

Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft])

[32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360]

[3280]

[2952]

[2624]

[2296]

[1968]

[1640]

[1312]

[984]

[656]

[ II Restrictions ]

- 68 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Refrigerant pipe size <PQRY>

(1) Between heat source unit and the first twinning pipe (Part A)

(2) Between BC controller and indoor unit (Sections a, b, c, d, e, and f )

(3) Between the main and sub BC controllers (Section C)

Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub

BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are

connected to the sub controller.

Unit : mm [inch]

Heat source unit

Refrigerant pipe size Connection to heat source unit and BC control-

ler

Low-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe Low-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe

P72 ø19.05 [3/4"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

P96 ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P120

P144

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

ø22.2[7/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]P168

P192

P216 ø28.58 [1-1/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P240

Unit : mm [inch]

Indoor unit

Refrigerant pipe size Indoor unit connection

(Flare connection for all models)

Liquid pipe Gas pipe Liquid pipe Gas pipe

P06, P08, P12, P15, P18 ø6.35 [1/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø6.35 [1/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"]

P24, P27, P30 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

P36, P48, P54

P72 ø12.7 [1/2"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P96 ø22.2[7/8"] ø22.2[7/8"]

Unit : mm [inch]

Indoor unit Refrigerant pipe size (Brazed connection on all models )

Liquid pipe High-pressure gas pipe Low-pressure gas pipe

- P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P108 ø19.05 [3/4"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

P109 - P126 ø12.7 [1/2"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]P127 - P144 ø22.2 [7/8"]

P145 - P168 ø15.88 [5/8"]

[ II Restrictions ]

- 69 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Connecting the BC controller <PQRY>

(1) Size of the pipe that fits the standard BC controller ports

P72 - P120 models

* BC controllers can only be connected to P72 - P120 models of heat source units.

Unit : mm [inch]

Operation Pipe sections

High-pressure side (liquid) Low-pressure side (gas)

Heat source unit

side

PQRY-P72THMU-A/YHMU-A ø15.88 [5/8"]

(Brazed connection)

ø19.05 [3/4"]

(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P96THMU-A/YHMU-A

PQRY-P120THMU-A/YHMU-A

ø19.05 [3/4"]

(Brazed connection)

ø22.2 [7/8"]

(Brazed connection)

Indoor unit side ø9.52 [3/8"]

(Flare connection)

ø15.88 [5/8"]

(Flare connection)

IndoorIndoorIndoor

Indoor

IndoorIndoor

BC controller

Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

(All units connected to the same port

must be in the same operating mode.)

Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)

(Optional accessory)

Junction pipe kit

(Model name:

CMY-R160-J)

(Optional accessory)

P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model

The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units.

To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below.

Reducer

(Standard

supplied parts)

To heat

source unit

Connection: Brazed connection

[ II Restrictions ]

- 70 -

HWE09080 GB

1) To connect P06 - P18 models of indoor units use

the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller.

2) To connect P36 - P96 models of indoor units (or when the

total capacity of indoor units exceeds P31), use a junction

pipe kit and merge the two nozzles.

3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe)

Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below)

Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units

Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory).

Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper size pipes

based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference.

Unit : mm [inch]

Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe

P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

Liquid pipe side: 6.35[1/4"]ID

Gas pipe side: 12.7[1/2"]ID

Liquid pipe side:3/8F

(Flare connection)

Gas pipe side:5/8F

(Flare connection)

Note) Use the flare nut that is supplied with the BC controller.

70 [2-25/32"]

Liquid pipe side: 9.52[3/8”]ID

Gas pipe side: 19.05[3/4”]ID(*1)

234 [9-7/32"]

Supplied with a thermal insulation cover

Liquid pipe side:3/8F

(Flare connection)

Gas pipe side:5/8F

(Flare connection)

[ II Restrictions ]

- 71 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Size of the pipe that fits the main BC controller ports

P72 - P240 models

The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor

units, follow the procedure below.

1) To connect P06-P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller.

2) To connect the units between the P36 and P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P31

or above), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles.

3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe)

Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below)

Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units

Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory).

Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total

capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference.

Unit : mm [inch]

Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe

P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

Unit : mm [inch]

Model Pipe sections

High pressure side (Liquid) Low-pressure side (Gas)

Heat source unit

side

PQRY-P72THMU-A/YHMU-A ø15.88 [5/8"]

(Brazed connection)

ø19.05 [3/4"]

(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P96THMU-A/YHMU-A ø19.05 [3/4"]

(Brazed connection)

ø22.2 [7/8"]

(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P120THMU-A/YHMU-A

PQRY-P144TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

ø22.2 [7/8"]

(Brazed connection) ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P168TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

PQRY-P192TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

PQRY-P216TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P240TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

Indoor unit side ø9.52 [3/8"]

(Flare connection)

ø15.88 [5/8"]

(Flare connection)

A B

Indoor Indoor Indoor

P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model

Junction pipe kit

(Model name:

CMY-R160-J)

(Optional accessory)

BC controller (main)

To heat

source unit Connection: Brazed connection

Reducer

(Standard supplied parts)

Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

(All units connected to the same port

must be in the same operating mode.)

Indoor Indoor Indoor

Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)

(Optional accessory)

[ II Restrictions ]

- 72 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Size of the pipe that fits the sub BC controller ports

The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor

units, follow the procedure below.

1) To connect P06-P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller.

2) To connect the units between the P36 and P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P31

or above), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles.

3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe)

Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below)

Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units

Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory).

Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total

capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference.

Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub

BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are

connected to the sub controller.

Unit : mm [inch]

Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe

P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P96 ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

Unit : mm [inch]

Operation Pipe sections

High-pressure side

(liquid)

Low-pressure side

(gas) Liquid pipe side

Total capacity of the in-

door units that are con-

nected to the BC

controller

On the BC controller

side P72 model or below ø15.88 [5/8"]

(Brazed connection)

ø19.05 [3/4"]

(Brazed connection) ø9.52 [3/8"]

(Brazed connection)

P73 - P108 ø19.05 [3/4"]

(Brazed connection)

ø22.2 [7/8"]

(Brazed connection)

P109 - P126

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

(Brazed connection)

ø12.7 [1/2"]

(Brazed connection)

P127 - P144 ø22.2 [7/8"]

(Brazed connection)

P145 - P168 ø15.88 [5/8"]

(Brazed connection)

A B

Indoor Indoor Indoor

P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model

Junction pipe kit

(Model name:

CMY-R160-J)

(Optional accessory)

BC controller (sub)

To Main BC controller

Connection: Brazed connection

Reducer

(Standard supplied parts)

Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

(All units connected to the same port

must be in the same operating mode.)

Indoor Indoor Indoor

Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)

(Optional accessory)

- 73 -

HWE09080 GB

III

Heat source Unit Components

[1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit.................................................... 75

[2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit ................................................................................ 78

[3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 81

[4] BC Controller Components .............................................................................................. 88

[5] Control Box of the BC Controller...................................................................................... 91

[6] BC Controller Circuit Board.............................................................................................. 92

- 74 -

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 75 -

HWE09080 GB

III Heat source Unit Components

[1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit

1. Front view of a heat source unit

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

Control box

Top panel

Front panel

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 76 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Refrigerant circuit

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

High-pressure

switch(63H1)

High-pressure

sensor(63HS1)

LEVINV

Check valve(CV5a)

4-way valve(21S4a)

Accumulator

(ACC)

Check valve(CV2a)

Compressor(COMP)

Oil separator(O/S)

Check joint (high pressure)(CJ1)

Check joint (low pressure)(CJ2)

Refrigerant service valve

(low pressure)(BV1)

Refrigerant service valve

(high pressure)(BV2)

Solenoid valve block

(SV4a, SV4b, SV4d)

Water heat exchanger

Check valve(CV11)

Check valve(CV6a)

Check valve(CV4a)

Solenoid valve(SV7b)

Transformer Box

(YHMU only)

Check valve(CV3a)

Component cooler

heat exchanger

Solenoid valve(SV1a)

Check valve(CV8)

Solenoid valve(SV7a)

Solenoid valve(SV9)

Low-pressure sensor

(63LS)

Check valve(CV7a)

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 77 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

High-pressure

switch(63H1)

High-pressure

sensor(63HS1)

LEVINV

Double pipe(SCC)

4-way valve(21S4a)

Check valve

(CV1a)

Accumulator(ACC)

LEV2a

LEV2b

LEV1

Compressor(COMP)

Oil separator(O/S)

Check joint (high pressure)(CJ1)

Check joint (low pressure)(CJ2)

Refrigerant service valve

(low pressure)(BV1)

Refrigerant service valve

(high pressure)(BV2)

Solenoid valve block

(SV4a, SV4b, SV4d)

Water heat exchanger

Check valve(CV6a)

Check valve(CV4a)

Solenoid valve(SV7b)

Component cooler

heat exchanger

Solenoid valve(SV1)

Check valve(CV8)

Solenoid valve(SV7a)

Solenoid valve(SV9)

Low-pressure sensor

(63LS)

Check valve(CV7a)

Transformer Box

(YHMU only)

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 78 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof

and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components.

2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter-

minals to remove them.

DC reactor

(DCL)

Electromagnetic relay

(72C)

Relay board Control board

Inrush current resistor

Note2

Noise filter

Power supply terminal block

(TB1)

Ground terminal

Smoothing capacitor

(C1)

INV board M-NET board

Terminal block for

transmission line

(TB3,TB7)

Pump interlock terminal block

(TB8)

Note1

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 79 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof

and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components.

2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter-

minals to remove them.

Control box houses high-voltage parts.

When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of

the internal components.

Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,

and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.

(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.)

Control boardRelay board

M-NET board

Terminal block for

transmission line

(TB3, TB7)

INV board

Pump interlock terminal block

(TB8)

Note1

Fuse

(F4) Fuse

(F5)

Ground

terminal

Power supply terminal block

L1,L2,L3

(TB1)

Noise filter

DC reactor

(DCL)

Electromagnetic relay

(72C)

Capacitor

(C100)

Inrush current resistor

(R1,R5) Note2

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 80 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Transformer Box

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

Transformer

(T03)

Transformer

(T02)

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 81 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board

1. Heat source unit control board

CN332

Output 18VDC

GND

LED2

Lit during normal

CPU operation

Serial communication signal input

GND

INV board

Output 17VDC

CN801

Pressure switch

connection

CN4

GND

Serial communication signal output

LEV

driving output

LED1

Service LED

SWU1,2

Address switch

SW1-5

Dip

switch

Sensor

input

CNVCC2

Output 12VDC

Output 5VDC

GND

CNIT

Output 12VDC

GND

Output 5VDC

Power supply detection input

Power supply ON/OFF signal output

CNS2

Transmission line input/output

for centralized control system (30VDC)

CN41

Power supply for

centralized control OFF

CN40

Power supply for

centralized control ON

CN102

Indoor-heat source transmission line input/output (30VDC)

Power supply input for centralized control system (30VDC)

External signal input (contact input)

F01

Fuse

250V AC/3.15A

CNAC

Actuator

driving output

Output 12VDC

Compressor

ON/OFF output

Error output

CN51

CNAC2

CNDC

Bus voltage input

CN2

CN72

72C driving output

(YHMU)

CN505

72C driving output

(THMU)

LED3

Lit when powered

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 82 -

HWE09080 GB

2. M-NET board

Power supply output for centralized

control system (30VDC)

Indoor-heat source transmission line

input/output (30VDC)

CN102 CNS2

Transmission line

input/output for

centralized control

system (30VDC)

CNIT

Input 12VDC

GND

Input 5VDC

Power supply

detection output

Power supply

ON/OFF signal input

LED1

Power supply for

indoor

transmission line

TP1,2

Check pins for

indoor-heat source

transmission line

TB7

Terminal block for

transmission line for

centralized control

TB3

Indoor-heat source transmission block

Ground terminal for

transmission line

Grounding

CN04

Bus voltage input

(YHMU only)

Bus voltage output

(THMU only)

CN03(THMU only)

Bus voltage input

(THMU only)

F01

250V

3.15A Grounding

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 83 -

HWE09080 GB

3. INV board

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter-

minals to remove them.

IGBT

(Rear)

SC-P1

Rectifier diode output (P)

CN6

Open: No-load operation setting

Short-circuited: Normal setting

CN5V

GND

Output 5VDC

LED1

Lit: Inverter in normal operation

Blink: Inverter error

CN4

GND(Control board)

Serial communication signal output

CNDC

Bus voltage output

CN2

erial communication signal output

GND

Input 17VDC

SC-V

Inverter output(V)

SC-W

Inverter output(W)

CT22

Current sensor

(W)

SC-U

Inverter output(U)

CT12

Current sensor

(U)

SC-R

Input(L1)

SC-S

Input(L2)

SC-T

Input(L3)

CT3

Current sensor(

L3)

TB-N(Note)

Bus voltage output

(N)

TB-P(Note)

Bus voltage output(P

)

SC-P2

Bus voltage Input(

RSH1,2

Overcurrent detection

resistor

C30,31,32

Smoothing capacitor

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 84 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

1) Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that

the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.

(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.)

SC-L1

Input(L1)

SC-L2

Input(L2)

SC-L3

Input(L3)

IGBT

(Rear)

Bus voltage check

terminal (P)

Note

Bus voltage check

terminal (N)

Note 1

SC-P2

Bus voltage Input(P)

SC-P1

Rectifier diode output (P)

LED1

Lit: Inverter in normal operation

Blink: Inverter error

CN6

Open: No-load operation setting

Short-circuited: Normal setting CN5V

GND

5VDC output

RSH1

Overcurrent detection

resistor

CN4

GND(Control board)

Serial communication

signal output

CN2

erial communication

signal output

GND

17VDC input

SC-V

Inverter output(V)

CNTYP Inverter

board type

SC-W

Inverter output(W)

SC-U

Inverter output(U)

CT22

Current sensor(W)

CT12

Current sensor(U)

C30 C37

Smoothing capacitor

CN1

Bus voltage output

CT3

Current sensor(L3)

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 85 -

HWE09080 GB

4. Relay board

CNOUT2

12 VDC input

Relay driving signal input (X21)

Relay driving signal input (X22)

Relay driving signal input (X23)

Relay driving signal input (X24)

Relay driving signal input (X25)

CNAC4

L1 input

CN83

Pump interlock signal output

Pump interlock signal input

CNPW

Pump interlock signal output

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 86 -

HWE09080 GB

5. Noise Filter

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

Grounding

TB21

Input/output（L1）CN02

Output

TB22

Input/output（L2）

TB23

Input/output（L3）

CN01

Input

Fuse

250VAC 6.3A

Fuse

250VAC 6.3A

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 87 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

CN4

Output

(Rectified L2-L3 current)

CN5

Output

(Rectified L2-L3 current)

TB21

Input/output(L1)

TB22

Input/output(L2)

TB23

Input/output(L3)

CN1B

Input

CN1A

Input

Grounding

F1,F2,F3,F4

Fuse

250VAC 6.3A

CN6

Input

L2

Grounding

CN2

Surge absorber circuit

Short circuit

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 88 -

HWE09080 GB

[4] BC Controller Components

1. CMB-P NU-G, GA

(1) Front

(2) Rear view <G type>

Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side)

Gas pipe (Indoor unit side)

TH12

TH15

TH16

TH11

SVM1

LEV1

LEV3

PS1

PS3

Tube in tube heat exchanger

Gas/Liquid separator

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 89 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Rear view <GA type>

TH12 TH15

TH16

TH11

SVM2

SVM1

LEV1

LEV3

LEV2 PS1

PS3

Tube in tube heat exchanger

Gas/Liquid separator

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 90 -

HWE09080 GB

2. CMB-P NU-GB, HB

(1) Front

(2) Rear view

Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side)

Gas pipe (Indoor unit side)

TH15

TH12

LEV3

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 91 -

HWE09080 GB

[5] Control Box of the BC Controller

1. CMB-P1016NU-G, GA

Relay board

Transformer

Terminal block for

transmission line

BC controller board

Terminal block for

power supply

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 92 -

HWE09080 GB

[6] BC Controller Circuit Board

1. BC controller circuit board (BC board)

SW1SW2

SW5 SW6

SW4

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

- 93 -

HWE09080 GB

2. RELAY BOARD (RELAY 4 board)

3. RELAY BOARD (RELAY 10 board)

- 94 -

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

GBHWE09080

- 95 -

HWE09080 GB

Remote Controller

[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers ................................... 97

[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller ............................. 98

[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller ........................................................... 102

[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller ................................. 103

- 96 -

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 97 -

HWE09080 GB

IV Remote Controller

[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers

There are two types of remote controllers: ME remote controller, which is connected on the indoor-heat source transmis-

sion line, and MA remote controller, which is connected to each indoor unit.

1. Comparison of functions and specifications between MA and ME remote controllers

2. Remote controller selection criteria

MA remote controller and ME remote controller have different functions and characteristics. Choose the one that better suits

the requirements of a given system. Use the following criteria as a reference.

Functions/specifications MA remote controller*1*2

*1. MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and wire-

less remote controller.

*2. Either the MA remote controller or the ME remote controller can be connected when a group operation of units in a sys-

tem with multiple heat source units is conducted or when a system controller is connected.

ME remote controller*2*3

*3. ME remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller.

Remote controller address settings Not required Required

Indoor-heat source unit address

settings

Not required (required only by a system

with one heat source unit)*4

*4. Depending on the system configuration, some systems with one heat source unit may require address settings.

Required

Wiring method Non-polarized 2-core cable

To perform a group operation, daisy-

chain the indoor units using non-polar-

ized 2-core cables.

Non-polarized 2-core cable

Remote controller connection Connectable to any indoor unit in the

group

Connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat

source transmission line

Interlock with the ventilation unit Each indoor unit can individually be in-

terlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up

via remote controller in the group.)

Each indoor unit can individually be inter-

locked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via

remote controller.)

Changes to be made upon group-

ing change

MA remote controller wiring between in-

door units requires rewiring.

Either the indoor unit address and remote

controller address must both be changed,

or the registration information must be

changed via MELANS.

MA remote controller*1*2 ME remote controller*1*2

There is little likelihood of system expansion and group-

ing changes.

Grouping (floor plan) has been set at the time of instal-

lation.

There is a likelihood of centralized installation of remote

controllers, system expansion, and grouping changes.

Grouping (floor plan) has not been set at the time of in-

stallation.

To connect the remote controller directly to the OA pro-

cessing unit.

*1. ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.

*2. A system controller must be connected to a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are con-

nected.

MA remote controller

Heat source unit

Indoor unit

controller

M-NET transmission line

(indoor-heat source transmission line)

groupgroup

ME remote controller

Heat source unit

Indoor unit

controller

M-NET transmission line

(indoor-heat source transmission line)

groupgroup

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 98 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller

1. Group settings/interlock settings

[Normal display]

(B) Interlock Settings (A) Group Settings

Indoor unit address display window Indoor unit

address

display window

Interlocked unit

address

display window

Make the following settings to perform a group operation of units that are connected to different heat source units or to manually set up the

indoor-heat source unit address.

(A) Group settings...........Registration of the indoor units to be controlled with the remote controller,

and search and deletion of registered information.

(B) Interlock settings........Registration of LOSSNAY units to be interlocked with the indoor units,

and search and deletion of registered information

[Operation Procedures]

(1) Address settings

Bring up either the blinking display of HO by turning on the unit or the

normal display by pressing the ON/OFF button.

The display window must look like one of the two figures below to proceed to the

next step.

Bring up the Group Setting window.

-Press and hold buttons [FILTER] and [ ]

simultaneously for 2 seconds to bring up the display as

shown below.

Select the unit address.

- Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing

button [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back

through the addresses.

display.

- Press button [TEST] to register the indoor unit address

whose address appears on the display.

- If registration is successfully completed, unit type will appear

on the display as shown in the figure below.

- If the selected address does not have a corresponding indoor

unit, an error message will appear on the display. Check the

address, and try again.

Unit type (Indoor unit in this case)

blinks to indicate a registration error.

(Indicates that selected address does not have a

corresponding unit.)

To register the addresses for multiple indoor units, repeat

steps and above.

3 4

To search for an address,

go to section (2) Address Search.

To next page.

To search for an address,

go to section (2) Address Search.

Bring up the Interlock Setting window.

-Press button [ ] to bring up the following display.

Press again to go back to the Group Setting window as shown

under step .

Both the indoor unit address and

interlocked unit address will be

displayed together.

Bring up the address of the indoor unit and the address of the

LOSSNAY to be interlocked on the display.

- Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing

button [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through

the addresses.

- Select the address of the LOSSNAY unit to be interlocked by

pressing button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back

through the interlocked unit addresses.

Make the settings to interlock LOSSNAY units with indoor

units.

- Press button [TEST] while both the indoor unit address and

the address of the LOSSNAY units to be interlocked

are displayed to enter the interlock setting.

- Interlock setting can also be made by bringing up the

LOSSNAY address in the indoor unit address display

window and the indoor unit address in the interlocked unit

address display window.

(Displayed alternately)

If registration is successfully

completed, the two displays as

shown on the left will appear

alternately.

If the registration fails,

will blink on the display.

(Indicates that the selected

address does not have a

corresponding unit.)

NOTE : Interlock all the indoor units in the group with the

LOSSNAY units; otherwise, the LOSSNAY units will

not operate.

[Blinking display of HO ]

PAR-F27MEA

ON/OFF

CENTRALLY CONTROLLED

DAILY

AUTO OFF

REMAINDER

CLOCK

ON OFF

˚ C

CHECK MODE

FILTER

TEST RUN

LIMIT TEMP.

˚ C

1Hr.

NOT AVAILABLE

STAND BY

DEFROST

FILTER

CHECK TEST

TEMP.

TIMER SET

CLOCK → ON → OFF

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 99 -

HWE09080 GB

When all the group settings and interlock settings are made, take the

following step to go back to the normal display.

Press and hold buttons [FILTER] and [ ]

simultaneously for 2 seconds to go back to the

window as shown in step .

(2) Address search

To search for the address of indoor units that have been entered into

the remote controller, follow steps and .

(A) To search group settings

Unit type

(Indoor unit in this case)

- When only one unit address is registered, the same address

will remain on the display regardless of how many times the

button is pressed.

- When the address of multiple units are registered

(i.e. 011, 012, 013 ), they will be displayed one at a time in

an ascending order with each pressing of button [ ] .

To delete an address, go to

section (3) Address Deletion.

To go back to the normal display,

follow step .

(Displayed alternately)

To delete an address,

go to section (3) Address Deletion .

Bring up the address of another registered unit on the

display.

- After completing step , a subsequent pressing of button

[ ] will bring up the address of another registered

unit.

(The display method is the same as the one in step .)

Address of an interlocked

LOSSNAY unit

Address of another

interlocked unit

Bring up on the display the address of the LOSSNAY unit

that was interlocked with the indoor unit in step .

- With each pressing of button [ ], the address of the

LOSSNAY and indoor unit that is interlocked with it will be

displayed alternately.

LOSSNAY can be searched in the same manner by bringing up

the LOSSNAY address in the Interlocked unit address display window.

(B) Interlock setting search

After performing step , proceed as follows:

Bring up the address of the indoor unit to be searched on

the display.

- Select the address of the indoor unit to be searched by pressing

button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back

through the interlocked addresses.

Repeat steps and in the previous page to interlock

all the indoor units in a group with the LOSSNAY unit.

To go back to the normal display,

follow step .

To search for an address,

go to section (2) Address Search.

(3) Address deletion

The addresses of the indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller can be deleted by deleting the group settings.

The interlock settings between units can be deleted by deleting the interlock settings.

Follow the steps in section (2) Address Search to find the address to be deleted and perform deletion with the address being displayed in the

display window. To delete an address, the address must first be bought up on the display.

Delete the registered indoor unit address or the interlock setting between units.

- Press button ? [CLOCK ON OFF] twice while either the indoor unit address or the address of the interlocked unit is displayed on the

display to delete the interlock setting.

(Displayed alternately)

Bring up the Group Setting window.

- Each pressing of button [ ] will bring up the address of a

registered indoor unit and its unit type on the display.

1 2

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 100 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Remote controller function selection via the ME remote controller

(A) To delete group settings (B) To delete interlock settings

will be displayed in the room temperature display window.

- If a transmission error occurs, the selected setting will not be

deleted, and the display will appear as shown below.

In this case, repeat the steps above.

(Displayed alternately)

will be displayed in the room temperature display window.

(4) Making (A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group from any arbitrary remote controller

(A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group can be made from any arbitrary remote controller.

Refer to (B) Interlock Settings under section 1 Group Settings/Interlock Settings for operation procedures.

Set the address as shown below.

(A) To make group settings

Interlocked unit address display window...Remote controller address

Indoor unit address display window...........The address of the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller

(B) To make interlock settings

Interlocked unit address display window...LOSSNAY address

Indoor unit address display window..........The address of the indoor unit to be interlocked with the LOSSNAY

If deletion is successfully

completed, will appear in

the unit type display window.

If the deletion fails, will

appear in the unit type display

window. In this case, repeat the

steps above.

- -

To go back to the normal display, follow step .

In the remote controller function selection mode, the settings for four types of functions can be made or changed as necessary.

4) Narrowed preset temperature range mode

The default temperature ranges are 19 C to 30 C in the cooling/dry mode and 17 C to 28 C in the heating mode and 19 C to 28 C in the auto mode.

By changing these ranges (raising the lower limit for the cooling/dry mode and lowering the upper limit for the heating mode), energy can be saved.

When making the temperature range setting on the simultaneous cooling/heating type units that supports the automatic operation mode to save on

energy consumption, enable the Skip-Auto-Mode setting to make the automatic operation mode unselectable. If the automatic operation mode is

selected, the energy-saving function may not work properly.

When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for the Skip-Auto-Mode, restricted preset

temperature range mode (AUTO), and operation mode display selection mode are invalid. If an attempt is made to change the preset temperature range,

“LIMIT TEMP.” appears on the display.

NOTE

[Normal display]

PAR-F27MEA

ON/OFF

FILTER

CHECK TEST

TEMP.

TIMER SET

CLOCKONOFF

: Press and hold the [CHECK] and

[ ] buttons simultaneously

for two seconds.

: [SET TEMP.

( ) ]

button

: [SET TEMP.

( ) ]

button

3) Room temperature display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature)

Although the suction temperature is normally displayed on the remote controller, the setting can be changed so that it will not appear on the

remote controller.

2) Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of COOL/HEAT during automatic operation mode)

When the automatic operation mode is selected, the indoor unit will automatically perform a cooling or heating operation based on the room

temperature. In this case, or will appear on the remote controller display.

This setting can be changed so that only will appear on the display.

1) Skip-Auto-Mode setting

The automatic operation mode that is supported by some simultaneous cooling/heating type units can be made unselectable via the ME remote

controller.

[Function selection mode sequence on the remote controller]

Normal display

1 1

Skip-Auto-Mode setting

*1 *1

Temperature range setting mode (AUTO)

Room temperature display selection mode *1 : Skip-Auto-Mode is enabled

*2 : Skip-Auto-Mode is disabled

Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of the automatic mode)

Restricted preset temperature range mode (Heating)

Restricted preset temperature range mode (Cooling)

Remote controller function selection mode

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 101 -

HWE09080 GB

[Lower limit temperature]: Appears in the preset temperature display window [Upper limit temperature: Appears in the time display window

[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C

30 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)

[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 30 C 19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 17 C

28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)

[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C 17 C

(Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C

28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)

[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C 19 C

(Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

will light up in the display window, and the temperature range for the cooling/dry mode will appear on the display.

[Operation Procedures]

1. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display will appear as shown in the previous page (Normal

display).

2. Press buttons [CHECK] and [ ] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go into the “Skip-Auto-Mode setting.”

under the remote controller function selection mode. Press button [SET TEMP. ( )] or [SET TEMP. ( )] to go into the other four modes

under the remote controller function selection mode.

2 3

Skip-Auto-Mode setting (Making the automatic operation mode unselectable)

“ ” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] button switches

between “ON” and “OFF.”

This setting is valid only when the controller is connected to the simultaneous cooling/heating type air conditioning units that

support the automatic operation mode.

When set to “ON,” the automatic operation mode is available for selection in the function selection mode.

When set to “OFF,” the automatic operation mode is not available for selection in the function selection mode, and an automatic operation

cannot be performed.

(The automatic operation mode is skipped in the function selection mode sequence.)

[The left figure shows the display that appears when the current temperature range setting is between 19 C and 30 C in the Cool/Dry mode,

and the lower limit temperature is selected to be set.]

2) Temperature range setting for heating

Switch between the Lower and Upper limit temperature setting by pressing the [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button. The selected temperature setting blinks.

“ ” and the settable temperature range for heating appear on the display.

As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range.

Room temperature display selection mode (Switching between the display or non-display of room temperature on the controller)

When set to “ON,” room temperature always appears on the display during operation.

When set to “OFF,” room temperature does not appear on the display during operation.

5 4

“ ” and the temperature range for the automatic operation mode appear on the display.

As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range.

5 4

3) Temperature range setting for the automatic mode

˚ C

“ 88 C ” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] button

switches between “ON” and “OFF.”

Operation mode display selection mode (Changing the type of display that appears during the automatic mode operation)

will blink, and either “ON”or “OFF” will light up. Press button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] in this state to

switch between “ON” and “OFF.”

When it is set to ON, will appear on the display during automatic operation mode.

When it is set to OFF, only will appear on the display during automatic operation mode.

When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid.

[TIMER SET ( ) (( ))] button

Restricted preset temperature range mode (The range of preset temperature can be changed.)

1) Temperature range setting for the cooling/dry mode

Press button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the lower limit temperature to the desired temperature.

When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid.

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 102 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller

1. LOSSNAY interlock setting (Make this setting only when making an interlock settings between the LOSSNAY units

and the Freeplan model of units.)

[Operation Procedures]

- Without interlocked LOSSNAY settings

Search result

- The indoor unit address and the interlocked LOSSNAY address will appear alternately.

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop.

The display window on the remote controller must look like the figure below to proceed to step .

Make this setting only when necessary.

Perform this operation to enter the interlock setting between the LOSSNAY and the indoor units to which the remote controller is connected, or to

search and delete registered information.

In the following example, the address of the indoor unit is 05 and the address of the LOSSNAY unit is 30.

< 1. Registration Procedures >

Indoor unit address LOSSNAY address

Press the [TEST] button to register the address of the selected indoor unit and the interlocked LOSSNAY unit.

- Registration completed

The registered indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.

- Registration error

If the registration fails, the indoor unit address and the LOSSNAY address will be displayed alternately.

Registration cannot be completed: The selected unit address does not have a corresponding indoor unit or a LOSSNAY unit.

Registration cannot be completed: Another LOSSNAY has already been interlocked with the selected indoor unit.

Press and hold the [FILTER] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for two seconds to perform a search for the LOSSNAY that is interlocked with the

indoor unit to which the remote controller is connected.

If no settings are necessary, exit the window by pressing and holding the [FILTER] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds.

Go to step 1. Registration Procedures to make the interlock settings with LOSSNAY units, or go to step 2. Search Procedures to search for a

particular LOSSNAY unit.

Go to step 3. Deletion Procedures to delete any LOSSNAY settings.

To interlock an indoor unit with a LOSSNAY unit, press the [ TEMP. ( ) or ( )] button on the remote controller that is connected to the indoor

unit, and select its address (01 to 50).

Press the [ CLOCK ( ) or ( )] button to select the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked (01 to 50).

[ IV Remote Controller ]

- 103 -

HWE09080 GB

[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller

1. Selecting the position of temperature detection (Factory setting: SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit is

set to OFF.)

To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit to ON.

Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor

on the indoor unit instead.

When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.

- Search completed (No interlocked settings with a LOSSNAY exist.)

- The selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit.

< 2. Search Procedures >

< 3. Deletion Procedures >

Press the [ MENU] button to search for the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.

- Search completed (With a LOSSNAY connection)

The indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.

Take the following steps to delete the interlock setting between a LOSSNAY unit and the interlocked indoor unit from the remote controller

that is connected to the indoor unit.

Find the address of the LOSSNAY to be deleted (See section 2. Search Procedures. ), and bring up the result of the search for both the

indoor unit and LOSSNAY on the display.

Press the [ ON/OFF] button twice to delete the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.

- Registration completed

The indoor unit address and , and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and will appear alternately.

-Deletion error

If the deletion fails

To search for the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with a particular indoor unit, enter the address of the indoor unit into the remote controller that is

connected to it.

- 104 -

[ IV Remote Controller ]

GBHWE09080

- 105 -

HWE09080 GB

Electrical Wiring Diagram

[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit......................................................... 107

[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller .............................................................. 111

[3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster.......................................................120

- 106 -

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 107 -

HWE09080 GB

V Electrical Wiring Diagram

[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

black

red

RELAY Board

CNAC4

3157

CN83

1346

CNOUT2

yellow

25421

CNPW

blue

Explanation

Symbol

MF1 Fan motor(Radiator panel)

SV1a

t° THINV

CNTYP1

black

SV4a,b,d

TH8

HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant

flow in HIC circuit

Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit under the O/S

Water outlet temperature

LEVINV Heat exchanger for inverter

SV7a,b Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit

THINV Outlet temp.detect of heat

exchanger for inverter

LEV2a,b Pressure control,Refrigerant flow

rate control

TH3

TH2 Subcool bypass outlet temperature

Pipe temperature

TH6 Subcooled liquid refrigerant

temperature

63HS1

SV9

21S4a 4-way valve

Explanation

Symbol

63H1

63LS

Pressure

sensor

Pressure

switch High pressure protection for the

heat source unit

High pressure

Low pressure

72C Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)

Current sensor(AC)

Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)CH11

CN506

CT12,22,3

Solenoid

valve

Linear

expansion

valve

t° TH8

CN992

yellow

LEVINV

CNLVE

LEV1

DCL DC reactor

TB1

TB3

TB7

Terminal

block

Central control transmission

cable

Indoor/Heat source transmission

cable

Power supply

TB8

TH4

TH5

TH7

THHS

Function setting connector

IGBT temperature

Water inlet temperature

ACC inlet pipe temperature

Discharge pipe temperature

Operation ON signal,

Pump Interlock

Thermistor

Z24,25

ZNR01

CNOUT1

yellow

X05

X06

SV7a

SV7b

MF1 ~

CN510

yellow

CN509

blue

X12

SV4a

X07

CN507

red

white

X09

CN508

black

SV9

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring

not supplied with the unit.

*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.

*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.

*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units

in the same refrigerant system together.

*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.

Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.

Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

*6.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for

Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.

*7.Control box houses high-voltage parts.

Before inspecting the inside of

the control box,turn off the power,

keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,

and confirm that the voltage at both ends

of the main capacitor (C1) has dropped to

DC20V or less.

SV1a

72C

CN504

green

CH11

1X03

CN503

blue

CN505

1X02

X72

CN502

CN02

Motor

(Compressor)

TB21

AC250V

6.3A T

31 21 CNT01

CNDC

pink

CPU power

supply circuit

F01

AC250V

3.15A T

CN03

black 1313

M-NET power

supply

circuit

blue

orange

red

yellow

M-NET Board

TH2

TH4

t°

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission

cable

Central control

transmission

cable

63HS1

red

CNAC

63LS

TP2

CN2

Control Board

LEV1

LEV2a

TH5

LEV2b

TP1

TH6

TH7

TH3

TB3

M1 M2 M1 M2 S

TB7

123

t°

4512

1234

t°

LED1

Unit address

setting

t°

LED1:Power supply to

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission line

CN102 CNS2

yellow

SWU2

10's digit

SWU1

1's digit

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

SV4b

X14

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

X04

X08

SV4d

TB8 1

Pump Interlock

Operation

ON signal

LED3:Lit when powered

CN01 5

black

CNIT

red

blue

CN63PW

OFF

2323123

blue

CN3N

yellow

CN3K

F01

AC250V

3.15A T

4521

OFF

4112 431

CNLVC

red

CNLVA

2131

CN801

yellow

CNT02 CN4

CN41CN102CN3D

red

CNIT

yellow

CNS2

CN202

red

CN201

CN215

black

CN211

Z24

Z25

CNLVB

red

CNTYP5

green

CNTYP4

green

CN990

CN40

LED2:CPU in operation

CN212

CN213

red

TB1 L3L2

whitered

Noise Filter

AC250V

6.3A T

CX6

CY3

black

SC-V 7

black

INV Board

RSH2

ZNR1

C32

red black

CN6

SC-U

CN2

SC-T

CX5

CN4

red

white

72C

R30

TB23

TB22

CT22

DSA1

black

CX2

CY1

CX1

CX3

SC-P2

CY2

CX4

black

white

red

CT12

black

SC-W

SC-S

red

CT3

SC-R

red

DCL

C31

RSH1

UC30

IGBT

CNDC

pink

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)

/Error(Blink)

THHS

TB-P

3334

1314

white

21S4a

+++

TB-N

SC-P1

63H1

Power supply

60Hz

208/230V

CN04

red

ONOFF

SW5

12V

CN51

Function setting

LED1

Display

setting

Compressor ON/OFF output

Error detection output

CNAC2

black

Ground

Power

failure

detection

circuit

TB7 Power

selecting

connector

t°

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 108 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

()

red

black

Explanation

Symbol

MF1 Fan motor(Radiator panel)

SV1a

SV4a,b,d

TH8

Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit under the O/S

Water outlet temperature

LEVINV Heat exchanger for inverter

SV7a,b Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit

THINV Outlet temp.detect of heat

exchanger for inverter

63HS1

SV9

21S4a 4-way valve

CN215

black

1THINVt°

Explanation

Symbol

63H1

63LS

Pressure

sensor

Pressure

switch High pressure protection for the

heat source unit

High pressure

Low pressure

72C Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)

Current sensor(AC)

Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)

CNOUT1

yellow

CH11

CT12,22,3

Solenoid

valve

Linear

expansion

valve

DCL DC reactor

TB1

TB3

t° TH8

CN992

yellow

LEVINV

CNLVE 4

TB7

X05

CN506

Terminal

block

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring

not supplied with the unit.

*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control

box boundaries.

*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.

*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units

in the same refrigerant system together.

*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.

Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.

Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

*6.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for

Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.

*7.Control box houses high-voltage parts.

Before inspecting the inside of

the control box,turn off the power,

keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,

and confirm that the voltage at both ends

of the main capacitor (C1) has dropped to

DC20V or less.

SV1a

72C

CN504

green

CH11

Central control transmission

cable

X03

Indoor/Heat source transmission

cable

Power supply

TB8

TH4

TH5

TH7

THHS

Function setting connector

CN503

blue

1X72

CN505

1X02

CN502

CN02

Motor

(Compressor)

TB21

AC250V

6.3A T

IGBT temperature

Water inlet temperature

ACC inlet pipe temperature

Discharge pipe temperature

Operation ON signal,

Pump Interlock

Thermistor

Z24,25

31 21 CNT01

CNDC

pink

CN83

753

CPU power

supply circuit

F01

AC250V

3.15A T

CN03

black 13

M-NET power

supply

circuit

M-NET Board

TH4t°

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission

cable

Central control

transmission

cable

63HS1

CNAC

red

63LS

TP2

CN2

Control Board

Pump Interlock

Operation

ON signal

TH5

TP1

TH7

TB3

M1 M2 M1 M2 S

TB7

123

t°

4512

1234

t°

RELAY Board

LED1

Unit address setting

LED1:Power supply to

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission line

CN102 CNS2

yellow

SWU2

10's digit

SWU1

1's digit

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

ON OFFON OFFON OFFON

X04

CNOUT2

yellow

CNPW

blue

TB8

LED3:Lit when powered

CN01

black

CNIT

red

SV7a

CNAC4

blue

CN63PW

blue

orange

red

yellow

OFF

2323123

blue

CN3N

yellow

CN3K

F01

AC250V

3.15A T

4521

OFF

4112 431

X08

2131

CN801

yellow CNT02

CN4

X09

CN508

black

SV7b

CN41CN102CN3D

red

CNIT

yellow

CNS2

CN202

red

CN201

CN211

1Z24

Z25

X06

SV9

CNTYP5

green

CNTYP4

green

CN990

CN40

LED2:CPU in operation TB7 Power

selecting

connector

CN213

red

TB1 L3

whitered

Noise Filter

AC250V

6.3A T

CX6

CY3

black

SC-V 7

t°

black

INV Board

RSH2

ZNR1

C32

red black

CN6

SC-U

CN2

SC-T

CX5

CN4

red

white

72C

R30

TB23

TB22

CT22

DSA1

black

CX2

CY1

CX1

CX3

SC-P2

CY2

CX4

black

white

red

CT12

black

SC-W

SC-S

red

CT3

SC-R

red

DCL

C31

RSH1

UC30

IGBT

CNDC

pink

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)

/Error(Blink)

THHS

TB-P

3334

1314

white

21S4a

+++

TB-N

SC-P1

63H1

Power supply

60Hz

208/230V

CN04

red

ONOFF

SW5

12V

CN51

Function setting

LED1

Display

setting

Compressor ON/OFF output

Error detection output

Ground

CN510

yellow

X14

X12

MF1

SV4b X07

CN507

red

white

SV4d

SV4a

ZNR01

CNAC2

black

CN509

blue

Power

failure

detection

circuit

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 109 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

 

㧗





Z24,25

Thermistor

Operation ON signal,

Pump Interlock

Discharge pipe temperature

ACC inlet pipe temperature

Water inlet temperature

IGBT temperature

Function setting connector

THHS

TH7

TH5

TH4

TB8

Power supply

Indoor/Heat source transmission

cable

Central control transmission

cable

Terminal

block

TB7

TB3

TB1

Subcooled liquid refrigerant

temperature

TH6

Pipe temperature

Subcool bypass outlet temperature

TH2

TH3

Outlet temp.detect of heat

exchanger for inverter

THINV

Water outlet temperatureTH8

Explanation

Symbol

L1 L2

Power Source

ޓ3~

ޓ60Hz

ޓ460V

Transformer box

purple 1

CN06

T02

(Transformer)

CNTR2

CN07

T03

(Transformer)

CNTR3

460V

purple

X09

CN508

black

Unit address

setting

CN504

green

CT12

C31

C33

CN5

red

D1 R5

SV9

CNTR1

L1 L2 L2

45678

white

TH2

t°

white

red

black

white

red

AC 600V

3A F

AC 600V

3A F

red

CNIT

yellow

CNS2

t°

CN51

12V

Function

setting

SW1

CN212

CNTYP4

green

AC250V

6.3A T

Compressor ON/OFF output

Error detection output

CN201

Z25

TH3

Z3Z2

ONOFF

SW2

SWU2

LED1

C35

C37

R31

R33

R30

SW3

Control Board

TH7

CN40

63HS1

CN41

TH6

t°

t° TH4

SW5

LED3:Lit when powered

R32

DSA

C10

R34 R35

LEV1

LEV2a

C36

C34

SC-V

CT22

SC-U

CN4

blue

red

LEV2b

t°

black

yellow

CN3K

TB21

CN1A

CN2

blue

CN3N

TB1

CN1B

TB7 Power

selecting

connector

CN102

TP1

DCL

black

72C

white

red

321

OFF

M-NET power

supply circuit

123

M-NET Board

CNAC2

black

CN502

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission

cable

INV Board red

CNT01

TB23

L2L1

1's

digit

THHS

CNIT

red

CN990

WTB3

10's

digit

OFF

LED2:CPU in operation

CNS2

yellow

TB7

CNDC

pink

red

t°

C100

LED1:Power supply to

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission line

ZNR01

black

Central control

transmission

cable

SC-L1

OFF

FT-N

Motor

(Compressor)

CN04

red

CN2

CN4

X05

SC-P2

CN211

CN202

red

TH5

CN1

TP2

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)

/ Error(Blink)

CN503

blue

X04

SC-W

C32

SC-L3

CH11

CN506

CN72

red

P63H1

CN801

yellow

F1,F2,F3

AC250V

6.3A T

OFF

SW4

CNT02

CN3D

432

CPU power

supply circuit

CNAC

red

F01

AC250V

3.15A T

CN507

red

ONOFF

SWU1

white

CN213

red

SC-L2

Z24

32121

CN83

CNTYP5

green

21S4a

X02

X03

CN4

CN6

IGBT

SC-P1

FT-P

black

C30

red

Diode

Bridge

CT3

72C

C1 CN2

black

TB22

RSH1

CN102

C17

63LS

ZNR1

Noise

Filter X08

CN6

yellow

red

SV4a

X07

CNLVA

CNLVB

red

CNLVC

red

white black

SV1a

Ground

L1 L2 L3

CN215

black

MF1 Fan motor(Radiator panel)

SV1a

SV4a,b,d

HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant

flow in HIC circuit

Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit under the O/S

LEVINV Heat exchanger for inverter

SV7a,b Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit

LEV2a,b Pressure control,Refrigerant flow

rate control

63HS1

SV9

21S4a 4-way valve

Explanation

Symbol

63H1

63LS

Pressure

sensor

Pressure

switch High pressure protection for the

heat source unit

High pressure

Low pressure

72C Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)

Current sensor(AC)

Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)CH11

CT12,22,3

Solenoid

valve

Linear

expansion

valve

LEV1

DCL DC reactor

Power

failure

detection

circuit

orange

Pump Interlock

Operation

ON signal

TB8 1

blue

yellow

red

CNAC4

CNPW

blue

25613

CNOUT1

yellow

CNOUT2

yellow

X12

X06

㨪

X14

CN510

yellow

blue

CN63PW

421

MF1

SV7a

CN509

blue

THINV

t°

CNTYP1

black 1

SV7b

t° TH8

LEVINV

SV4d

SV4b

CN992

yellow

CNLVE

RELAY Board

CNTYP

black

CNTYP2

black

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit.

*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.

*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.

*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units in the

same refrigerant system together.

*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.

Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.

Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

*6.Control box houses high-voltage parts.

Before inspecting the inside of the control box,turn off the power,

keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage

between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.

*7.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for

Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.

LED1

Display

setting

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 110 -

HWE09080 GB

(4) PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

()

-++

Solenoid

valve

Symbol Explanation

TH8 Water outlet temperature

THINV Outlet temp.detect of heat

exchanger for inverter

TB1

TB3

TB7

Terminal

block

Central control transmission

cable

Indoor/Heat source transmission

cable

Power supply

TB8

TH4

TH5

TH7

THHS

Function setting connector

IGBT temperature

Water inlet temperature

ACC inlet pipe temperature

Discharge pipe temperature

Operation ON signal,

Pump Interlock

Thermistor

Z24,25

Explanation

Symbol

MF1 Fan motor(Radiator panel)

SV1a

SV4a,b,d Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit under the O/S

LEVINV Heat exchanger for inverter

SV7a,b Heat exchanger capacity control

For opening/closing the bypass

circuit

63HS1

SV9

21S4a 4-way valve

Explanation

Symbol

63H1

63LS

Pressure

sensor

Pressure

switch High pressure protection for the

heat source unit

High pressure

Low pressure

72C Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)

Current sensor(AC)

Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)CH11

CT12,22,3

Solenoid

valve

Linear

expansion

valve

DCL DC reactor

CNTYP

black

12 4

blue

CN63PW

t°THINV

LEVINV

CNLVE

purple

CN215

black

X12

CN509

blue

CN510

yellow

CNOUT1

yellow

Operation

ON signal

Pump Interlock

TB8 234

red

orange

yellow

blue

X09

Ground

CN508

black

SV7a

Unit address

setting

CN504

green

CT12

C31

C33

CN5

red

D1 R5

Power Source

60Hz

460V

SV7b

SV4b

white

Transformer box

X14

CN07

CN06

CNTR1

T02

(Transformer)

CNTR2

712

white

red

black

white

red

AC 600V

3A F

AC 600V

3A F

red

CNIT

yellow

CNS2

t°

LED1

Display

setting

CN51

12V

Function

setting

SW1

CN992

yellow

CNTYP4

green

AC250V

6.3A T

Compressor ON/OFF output

Error detection output

CN201

Z25

TH8

ONOFF

SW2

SWU2

LED1

C35

C37

R31

R33

R30

SW3

Control Board

TH7

CN40

63HS1

CN41

tTH4

SW5

LED3:Lit when powered

R32

DSA

C10

R34 R35

C36

C34

SC-V

CT22

SC-U

CN6

yellow

CN4

blue

red

black

yellow

CN3K

TB21

CN1A

CN2

blue

CN3N

TB1

CN1B

TB7 Power

selecting

connector

CN102

TP1

DCL

black

72C

white

red

321

OFF

M-NET power

supply circuit

123

M-NET Board

Power failure

detection circuit

CNAC2

black

CN502

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission

cable

INV Board red

CNT01

TB23

L2L1

1's

digit

THHS

CNIT

red

CN990

TB3

10's

digit

OFF

LED2:CPU in operation

CNS2

yellow

TB7

CNDC

pink

red

C100

LED1:Power supply to

Indoor/Outdoor

transmission line

X06

ZNR01

black

Central control

transmission

cable

SC-L1

OFF

FT-N

CNAC4

Motor

(Compressor)

CN04

red

CN2

CN4

X05

SV4d

SC-P2

CN211

CN202

red

TH5

CN1

TP2

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)

/ Error(Blink)

CN503

blue

X04

SC-W

C32

SC-L3

CH11

CN506

CN72

red

P63H1

CN801

yellow

F1,F2,F3

AC250V

6.3A T

OFF

SW4

black

1CNT02

CN3D

432

CPU power

supply circuit

CNAC

red

F01

AC250V

3.15A T

CN507

red

ONOFF

SWU1

white

CN213

red

SC-L2

Z24

3 21

CNOUT2

yellow

2131

white

red

CNPW

blue

CNTYP5

green

21S4a

X02

X03

CN4

CN6

IGBT

SC-P1

FT-P

black

C30

red

Diode

Bridge

CT3

72C

C1 CN2

black

TB22

RSH1

CN102

C17

RELAY Board

63LS

ZNR1

Noise

Filter

L3L2L1

X08

SV4a

SV9

X07

CN83

460V

CNTR3

T03

(Transformer)

L2L2

purple

460V

SV1a

CNTYP2

black

MF1

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit.

*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.

*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting

input/output signal connectors.

*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units

in the same refrigerant system together.

*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.

Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after

insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

*6.Control box houses high-voltage parts.

Before inspecting the inside of the control box,

turn off the power,keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,

and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N

on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.

*7.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for

Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 111 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller

(1) CMB-P104NU-G model

(Red)

CNTR

ZNR02

ZNR01

X21

CN36(Green)

SVM1

CN29(Green)

X33

X8 1

SV4A

SV4C

SV4B

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

X32

X31

X30

X2 1

SV1B

SV1A

SV1C

SV2A

SV2C

SV3C

SV2B

SV3B

SV3A

S(SHIELD)

LEV3

TB01

LEV1

123456

PS3

PS1

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

CN07

CN11

CN10

CN13

CN03

12321

CNP3

CNP1

CN02

CONT.B

123456

CN05

CN12

CN26

TB02

SVM1 Solenoid valve

Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

F01

Terminal

T1~4

Terminal block

(for Transmission)

TB02

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

Solenoid valve

SV1~4A,B,C

Expansion valve

Thermistor sensor

Transformer

Name

Symbol

TH11,12,15,16

LEV1,3

PS1,3 Pressure sensor

CONT.B

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission Line

~208V-230V 60Hz

POWER SUPPLY

BREAKER(15A)

FUSE(15A)

PULL BOX

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

SW4

OFF

SW5

OFF

DSA

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Black)

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

10 1

SW1SW2

Circuit

board

(Symbol explanation)

BC controller

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 112 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) CMB-P105,106NU-G models

CN36(Green)

ZNR02

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

ZNR01

CN05

CN07

S(SHIELD)

TB02

X21

SVM1

CN26

CNTR

CN12

153

CONT.B

CN02

CNP1

CNP3

12321

CN03

CN13

CN10

CN11

TH11

TH12

TH15

TH16

PS1

PS3

TB01

LEV3 LEV1

SV3A

SV3B

SV2B

SV3C

SV2C

SV2A

SV1C

SV1A

SV1B

X30

X31

X32

SV5A

SV5C

SV4B

SV5B

SV4C

SV4A

SV6C

SV6A

SV6B

X33

X10

X34

X12

X11

X35

CN30(Black)

CN31(Yellow)

Solenoid valve

SVM1

CONT.B

Pressure sensor

TH11,12,15,16

LEV1,3

PS1,3

Symbol Name

Transformer

Thermistor sensor

Expansion valve

SV1~6A,B,C Solenoid valve

TB01 Terminal block

(for power source)

TB02 Terminal block

(for Transmission)

T1~6 Terminal

F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

PULL BOX

FUSE(15A)

BREAKER(15A)

POWER SUPPLY

~208V-230V 60Hz

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission line

OFF

SW5

OFF

SW4

(Yellow)

(Red)

DSA

(Red)

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Black)

SW2 SW1

110

CMB-P106NU-G ONLY

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

BC controller

(Symbol explanation)

Circuit

board

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 113 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) CMB-P108,1010NU-G models

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

Pressure sensor

TH11,12,15,16

LEV1,3

PS1,3

SV1~10A,B,C

Symbol Name

Transformer

Thermistor sensor

Expansion valve

Solenoid valve

TB01 Terminal block

(for power source)

TB02 Terminal block

(for Transmission)

CONT.B

T1~10 Terminal

Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

F01

Solenoid valve

SVM1

CN51

CN53

654321123456

654321

(Red)

ZNR01 ZNR02

TB01

CN31(Yellow)

CN30(Black)

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

CN05

CN07

CN13

CNP1

TB02

S(SHIELD)

X21

CN36(Green)

CN12

3331571357135713 75

X20

X19

X39

X38

X17

X18

X16

X15

X37

X36

X13

X14

CN34(Black)

CN33(Red)

CN32

CN35(Blue)

16 131415 9

101112 5

78 4

12 11 10

15 14 13

SV10C

SV9C

SV8C

SV7C

SV10A

SV9A

SV8A

SV7A

SV10B

SV9B

SV8B

SV7B

4321432143214321

X30

X2 1

SV1B

SV1A

SV1C

X35

X11

X12

X34

X10

X33

X32

X31

SV2C

SV2A

SV2B

SV3C

SV3A

SV3B

SV4C

SV4A

SV4B

SV5B

SV5A

SV5C

33 4

SV6C

SV6A

SV6B

7654321

CN39

CN52

CONT.B

LEV3 LEV1

CNP3

12321

CN03 CN02

CN10

CN11

TH11

TH12

TH15

TH16

PS1

PS3

CN50

76543211234567

135

CN38 CN26

CNTR

SVM1

REL.B

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

PULL BOX

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

POWER SUPPLY

~208V-230V 60Hz

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission line

T10

T9 T8 T7

OFF

SW5

SW4

OFF

(Symbol explanation)

Circuit

board BC controller

REL.B Relay

CMB-P1010NU-G ONLY

(Yellow)

DSA

(Red)

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Black)

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

CMB-P1010NU-G ONLY

10 1

SW1SW2

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 114 -

HWE09080 GB

(4) CMB-P1013,1016NU-G models

ZNR01 ZNR02

TB01

TB02

S(SHIELD)

CN32

CN33(Red)

CN34(Black)

CN35(Blue)

CN36(Green)

CN31(Yellow)

CN30(Black)

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

(Red)

(Blue) (Yellow)

CN07 CN05

CN13

LEV1LEV3

X21

CNVCC1

CNVCC2

312

CONT.B

CN39

135

CN12

CNOUT3

CNOUT1

CNOUT2

CNOUT4

CNP1

CNP3

12321

CN03 CN02

CN10

CN11

TH11

TH12

TH15

TH16

CN38 CN26

CNTR

PS1

PS3

CN44(Yellow)

CN45(Green)

CN41(Green)

CN43(Red)

(Yellow)

SV1B

SV1A

SV1C

SV2C

SV2A

SV2B

SV3C

SV3A

SV3B

SV4C

SV4A

SV4B

SV5B

SV5A

SV5C

SV6B

SV6A

SV6C

X35

X11

X12

X34

X10

X33

X32

X31

X30

11 1

SV7A

SV7B

SV7C

SV8B

SV8A

SV8C

SV9B

SV9A

SV9C

SV10B

SV10A

SV10C

131415 9

101112 5

78 4

12 11 10

15 14 13

753133

X14

X13

X36

X37

X15

X16

X38

X39

X17

X19

X18

X20

753175317531

CN40

SVM1

REL.B

SV11B

SV11A

SV11C

SV12C

SV12A

SV12B

SV13C

SV13A

SV13B

SV14C

SV14A

SV14B

SV15B

SV15A

SV15C

SV16B

SV16A

SV16C

X51

X55

X56

X52

X53

X57

X54

X45

X42

X43

X40

X44

X48

X47

X46

X50

X49

CN42

X41

Solenoid valve

SVM1

CONT.B

Terminal block

(for Transmission)

TB02

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

Solenoid valve

Expansion valve

Thermistor sensor

Transformer

Name

Symbol

SV1~16A,B,C

TH11,12,15,16

LEV1,3

PS1,3 Pressure sensor

Terminal

T1~16

F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

INDOOR UNIT

PULL BOX

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

POWER SUPPLY

~208V-230V

60Hz

TO NEXT

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission line

T10

T9 T8 T7

T11

T15

T14

T13

T12

T16

SW4

OFF

SW5

OFF

DSA

(Blue)

(Yellow) (Red)

(Red)

(Black)

10 1

SW1SW2

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

CMB-P1016NU-G ONLY

Relay

REL.B

BC controller

Circuit

board

(Symbol explanation)

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 115 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) CMB-P108,1010NU-GA models

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

T1~10 Terminal

Solenoid valve

SVM1,2

CONT.B

Terminal block

(for Transmission)

TB02

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

Solenoid valve

Expansion valve

Thermistor sensor

Transformer

Name

Symbol

SV1~10A,B,C

TH11,12,15,16

LEV1~3

PS1,3 Pressure sensor

654321

CN53

654321123456

CN51

(Yellow)

CN03

TB01

CN36(Green)

CN30(Black)

CN31(Yellow)

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

(Red)

CNTR

ZNR01 ZNR02

TB02

S(SHIELD)

CN06 CN05

CN07

CN13

CNP1

LEV2

123456

CN26

CN38

CN12

76543211234567

CN50

PS3

PS1

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

CN11

CN10

CN02

12321

CNP3

LEV1LEV3

123456

CONT.B

SV6B

SV6A

SV6C

SV5C

SV5A

SV5B

SV4B

SV4A

SV4C

SV3B

SV3A

SV3C

SV2B

SV2A

SV2C

X31

X32

X33

X10

X34

X12

X11

X35

SV1C

SV1A

SV1B

X30

X60

X21

CN46(Yellow)

CN33(Red)

CN34(Black)

CN35(Blue)

CN39

REL.B

CN52

1234567

SV7B

SV8B

SV9B

SV10B

SV7A

SV8A

SV9A

SV10A

SV7C

SV8C

SV9C

SV10C

131415 101112 978 654

87 65

12 11 10 9

15 14 13

CN32

X14

X13

X36

X37

X15

X16

X18

X17

X38

X39

X19

X20

571751753175133 3

SVM1

SVM2

60Hz

~208V-230V

POWER SUPPLY

BREAKER(15A)

PULL BOX

FUSE(15A)

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission line

T8T9

T10

OFF

SW4

SW5

OFF

Relay

REL.B

BC controller

Circuit

board

(Symbol explanation)

CMB-P1010NU-GA ONLY

DSA

(Blue) (Red)

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Black)

SW2 SW1

110

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 116 -

HWE09080 GB

(6) CMB-P1013,1016NU-GA models

CNTR

(Red)

CN41(Green)

CN40

(Yellow)

CN34(Black)

CN33(Red)

CN35(Blue)

ZNR01 ZNR02

CN06

LEV2

CN07

CN13

CNP1

(Blue)

CNVCC1

(Yellow)

CN03

TB02

S(SHIELD)

LEV3

213

CNVCC2

312

CONT.B

CN39

CNOUT3

CNOUT1

CNP3

12321

CN02

CN10

CN11

TH11

TH12

TH15

TH16

CN38 CN26

PS1

PS3

X45

X42

X43

X40

X44

X47

X46

CN42

X41

SV1B

SV1A

SV1C

SV2C

SV2A

SV2B

SV3C

SV3A

SV3B

SV4C

SV4A

SV4B

SV5B

SV5A

SV5C

SV6B

SV6A

SV6C

CN31(Yellow)

CN30(Black)

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

X35

X11

X12

X34

X10

X33

X32

X31

X30

11 1

SV7A

SV7B

SV7C

SV8B

SV8A

SV8C

SV9B

SV9A

SV9C

SV10B

SV10A

SV10C

131415 9

101112 5

78 4

12 11 10

15 14 13

CN32

753133

X14

X13

X36

X37

X15

X16

X38

X39

X17

X19

X18

X20

753175317531

CN36(Green)

X21

CN45(Green)

CN44(Yellow)

CN43(Red)

REL.B

SV11B

SV11A

SV11C

SV12C

SV12A

SV12B

SV13C

SV13A

SV13B

SV14C

SV14A

SV14B

SV15B

SV15A

SV15C

SV16B

SV16A

SV16C

X51

X55

X56

X52

X53

X57

X54

X48

X50

X49

SVM2

SVM1

CN05

LEV1

TB01

135

CN12

CNOUT2

CNOUT4

CN46(Yellow)

X60

CONT.B

Terminal block

(for Transmission)

TB02

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

Solenoid valve

Expansion valve

Thermistor sensor

Transformer

Name

Symbol

SV1~16A,B,C

TH11,12,15,16

LEV1~3

PS1,3 Pressure sensor

SVM1,2

T1~16 Terminal

Solenoid valve

F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal

block.Never connect power line

to it.

2.The initial set values of switch

on CONT.B are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission line

T10

T9 T8 T7

T11

T15

T14

T13

T12

T16

PULL BOX

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

INDOOR UNIT

TO NEXT

POWER SUPPLY

~208V-230V

60Hz

SW4

OFF

SW5

OFF

(Blue)

DSA

(Blue)

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Black)

10 1

SW1SW2

CMB-P1016NU-GA ONLY

(Red)

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

Relay

REL.B

BC controller

Circuit

board

(Symbol explanation)

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 117 -

HWE09080 GB

(7) CMB-P104NU-GB model

ZNR02

ZNR01

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

CNTR

(Red)

CN07

TB01

CN13

CN03

S(SHIELD)

TB02

X33

X8 1

SV4A

SV4C

SV4B

X32

X31

X30

X2 1

SV1B

SV1A

SV1C

SV2A

SV2C

SV3C

SV2B

SV3B

SV3A

LEV3

123456

TH15

TH12

CN11

CN10

12321

CN02

CONT.B

CN12

CN26

Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

F01

Terminal

T1~4

Terminal block

(for Transmission)

TB02

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

Solenoid valve

SV1~4A,B,C

Expansion valve

Thermistor sensor

Transformer

Name

Symbol

TH12,15

LEV3

CONT.B

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

FUSE(15A)

BREAKER(15A)

POWER SUPPLY

~208V-230V

60Hz

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

PULL BOX

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission Line

SW4

OFF

SW5

OFF

DSA

(Yellow)

(Red)

(Yellow)

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

10 1

SW1SW2

Circuit

board

(Symbol explanation)

BC controller

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 118 -

HWE09080 GB

(8) CMB-P108NU-GB model

CN31(Yellow)

CN33(Red)

CN34(Black)

CN35(Blue)

CN30(Black)

CN29(Green)

CN28(Blue)

CN27(Red)

TB01

ZNR02

ZNR01

CN07

CN13

(Red)

S(SHIELD)

TB02

CN12

31571357135713 75

X20

X19

X39

X38

X17

X18

X16

X15

X37

X36

X13

X14

CN32

16 131415 9

101112 5

78 4

12 11 10

15 14 13

SV8C

SV7C

SV8A

SV7A

SV8B

SV7B

43214321

X30

X2 1

SV1B

SV1A

SV1C

X35

X11

X12

X34

X10

X33

X32

X31

SV2C

SV2A

SV2B

SV3C

SV3A

SV3B

SV4C

SV4A

SV4B

SV5B

SV5A

SV5C

33 4

SV6C

SV6A

SV6B

7654321

CN39

CN52

CONT.B

LEV3

12321

CN03 CN02

CN10

CN11

TH12

TH15

CN50

7654321

135

CN38 CN26

CNTR

REL.B

F01 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

Terminal

T1~8

CONT.B

Terminal block

(for Transmission)

TB02

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

Solenoid valve

Expansion valve

Thermistor sensor

Transformer

Name

Symbol

SV1~8A,B,C

TH12,15

LEV3

Note:1.TB02 is transmission

terminal block.

Never connect power

line to it.

2.The initial set values

of switch on CONT.B

are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

60Hz

~208V-230V

POWER SUPPLY

BREAKER(15A)

FUSE(15A)

PULL BOX

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)

Transmission line

T8 T7

OFF

SW5

SW4

OFF

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

DSA

(Yellow)

(Red)

Relay

REL.B

BC controller

Circuit

board

(Symbol explanation)

10 1

SW1SW2

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 119 -

HWE09080 GB

(9) CMB-P1016NU-HB model

Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal

block.Never connect power line

to it.

2.The initial set values of swith

on CONT.B are as follows.

SW1:0

SW2:0

TB01

SV16B

SV16A

SV16C

SV15B

SV15A

SV15C

SV14B

SV14A

SV14C

SV13B

SV13A

SV13C

SV12B

SV12A

SV12C

SV11B

SV11A

SV11C

SV7B

SV7A

SV7C

SV8B

SV8A

SV8C

SV9B

SV9A

SV9C

SV10B

SV10A

SV10C

SV6B

SV6A

SV6C

SV5B

SV5A

SV5C

SV4B

SV4A

SV4C

SV3B

SV3A

SV3C

SV2B

SV2A

SV2C

SV1C

SV1A

SV1B

REL.B

CONT.B

X57

X55

X56

CN45(Green)

X54

X52

X53

CN44(Yellow)

X51

X49

X50

CN43(Red)

X48

X46

X47

CN42

X45

X43

X44

CN41(Green)

X42

X40

X41

CN40

(Yellow)

(Blue)

312

CNVCC2

X14

X13

X36

7531

CN32

CN39

1357

X37

X15

X16

CN33(Red)

1357

X38

X17

X18

CN34(Black)

1357

X39

X19

X20

CN35(Blue)

131415 9

101112 6

12 11 10

15 14 13

4321

CNOUT2

CNOUT4

TO NEXT

INDOOR UNIT

PULL BOX

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

POWER SUPPLY

~208V-230V

S(SHIELD)

TB02 Indoor/outdoor

Transmission line

CN07

(Yellow)

TH15

CN11

TH12

2(Red)

CN13

CN10

SW6

SW5

SW4

OFF

SW1SW2

10 1

CNOUT1

CNOUT3

F01

250VAC

6.3A F

ZNR01 ZNR02

CN12

135

X35

X11

X12

CN31(Yellow)

X09

X34 7

X10

CN30(Black)

X33

X07

X08

CN29(Green)

X32

X05

X06

CN28(Blue)

X04

X03

X31 7

CN27(Red)

X30

X01

X02

CN26

CNTR(Red)

CN38

11132 32 2

CN02

CN03

(Yellow)

CNVCC1

(Blue)

Terminal

T1~T16

Solenoid valve

SV1~16A,B,C

TB02 Terminal block

(for Transmission)

Terminal block

(for power source)

TB01

CONT.B

REL.B

TH12,15

LEV3

Symbol

Name

Transformer

Thermister sensor

Expansion valve

Circuit

board

Relay

BC controller

(

Symbol explanation

)

T11

T12

T13

T14

T15

T16

T10

T9 T8 T7

Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

F01

t°

DSA

LD1:CPU in

operation

LEV3

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

- 120 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster

100V/200VAC

Terminal block for power supply

(TB1)

LRed Red Red

White

Green

250V 5A

Grounding

Red

White

White White

White

White BlueRedRed

DSA

White

Blue

Red

Varistor

Noise filter

Stabilized power supply

CN2 CN1

Black

Green/Yellow

Choke coil

CN3

1212

CN4

CN2

CN1

Electronic control board

Black

White

Red

Black

Terminal block 2 for

transmission line (TB3)

Expanded (indoor unit) side

Terminal block 1 for

transmission line (TB2)

Expanded (heat source unit) side

- 121 -

HWE09080 GB

Refrigerant Circuit

[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram ........................................................................................... 123

[2] Principal Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 126

- 122 -

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 123 -

HWE09080 GB

VI Refrigerant Ci rcuit

[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram

1. Heat source unit

(1) PQHY-P72, P96, P120 models

(2) PQRY-P72, P96, P120 models

63HS1

O/S

TH4 TH5

TH3

CJ2

SV1a

CP1

CJ1

21S4a

ST3

Acc

ST17

63H1

Comp

CV8

CV1

CV6a

TH8

TH7

SV7bSV7a

CV4a

CV3a

CV7a

BV2

SV4a SV4b

SV4d

Solenoid valve block

THINV

Component

cooler heat

exchanger

LEVINV

ST13

Water circuit

SV9

63LS

ST2

LEV1

HIC

TH2

TH6

LEV2a

LEV2b

BV1

ST1

63HS1

O/S

TH4 TH5

CJ2

SV1a

CP1

CJ1

21S4a

ST3

Acc

ST17

63H1

Comp

ST1

63LS

CV8

CV6a

TH8

TH7

SV7bSV7a

SV9

CV4a

CV2aCV3a

CV7a

CV5a

BV1

BV2

SV4a SV4b

SV4d

Solenoid valve block

THINV

Component cooler

heat exchanger

LEVINV

ST13

Water circuit

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 124 -

HWE09080 GB

2. BC controller

(1) CMB-P104 - P1010NU-G

(2) CMB-P108, P1013, P1016NU-GA (main)

TH15

TH12

LEV3

LEV1 TH16

PS3PS1

TH11

SVM1

Gas/Liquid

separator

Check valve block

Solenoid valve block

TH15

TH12

LEV3 SVM2

LEV1

LEV2

TH16

PS3PS1

TH11

SVM1

Gas/Liquid

separator

Check valve block

Solenoid valve block

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 125 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) CMB-P104, P108NU-GB (sub)

(4) CMB-P1016NU-HB (sub)

TH15

TH12

HIC-C

LEV3

Check valve block

Solenoid valve block

TH15

TH12

HIC-C

LEV3

Check valve block

Solenoid valve block

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 126 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Principal Parts and Functions

1. Heat source unit

Part

name

Symbols

(functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method

Com-

pressor

MC1

(Comp1)

Adjusts the amount of circulating

refrigerant by adjusting the operat-

ing frequency based on the oper-

ating pressure data

Low-pressure shell scroll

compressor

Wirewound resistance

20°C[68°F] :

0.268ohm(THMU)

0.981ohm(YHMU)

High

pres-

sure

sensor

63HS1 1) Detects high pressure

2) Regulates frequency and pro-

vides high-pressure protec-

tion

Low

pres-

sure

sensor

63LS 1) Detects low pressure

2) Provides low-pressure pro-

tection

Pres-

sure

switch

63H1 1) Detects high pressure

2) Provides high-pressure pro-

tection

4.15MPa[601psi] OFF setting

Thermis-

tor

TH4

(Discharge)

1) Detects discharge air temper-

ature

2) Provides high-pressure pro-

tection

Degrees Celsius Resistance

check

0°C[32°F] :698kohm

10°C[50°F] :413kohm

20°C[68°F] :250kohm

30°C[86°F] :160kohm

40°C[104°F] :104kohm

50°C[122°F] : 70kohm

60°C[140°F] : 48kohm

70°C[158°F] : 34kohm

80°C[176°F] : 24kohm

90°C[194°F] :17.5kohm

100°C[212°F] :13.0kohm

110°C[230°F] : 9.8kohm

Pressure

0~4.15 MPa [601psi]

Vout 0.5~3.5V

0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]

Pressure [MPa]

=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69

Pressure [psi]

=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145

GND (Black)

Vout (White)

Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

Con-

nector

63HS1

123

Pressure

0~1.7 MPa [247psi]

Vout 0.5~3.5V

0.173V/0.098 MPa [14psi]

Pressure [MPa]

=0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283

Pressure [psi]

=(0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283) x 145

GND (Black)

Vout (White)

Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

Con-

nector

63LS

123

R = 7.465k

120

R = 4057

R =

7.465

25/120

4057

273 t

393

exp

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 127 -

HWE09080 GB

Thermis-

tor

TH2 PQHY

only

LEV1 is controlled based on the

TH2, TH3, and TH6 values

Degrees Celsius

0°C[32°F]: 15kohm

10°C[50°F]: 9.7kohm

20°C[68°F]: 6.4kohm

25°C[77°F]: 5.3kohm

30°C[86°F]: 4.3kohm

40°C[104°F]: 3.1kohm

Resistance

check

TH3

(Pipe

temperature)

PQHY

only

Controls defrosting during heating

operation

1) Frequency control

2) LEV1 is controlled according

to the amount of subcool at

the heat exchanger outlet,

which is calculated based on

the HPS data and TH3 value.

TH7

(Water inlet

temperature)

1) Detects water inlet tempera-

ture

2) Protects water heat exchang-

er from high and low temper-

atures

3) Controls water heat exchang-

TH8

(Water outlet

temperature)

1) Detects water inlet tempera-

ture

2) Protects water heat exchang-

er from freezing up

TH5 Water heat exchanger is con-

trolled based on the 63LS and

TH5 values.

TH6 PQHY

only

LEV1 is controlled based on the

TH2, TH3, and TH6 values

THINV Determines the LEV that controls

refrigerant flow on the component

cooler

THHS

Inverter

heat sink tem-

perature

Controls inverter cooling fan

based on THHS temperature

Degrees Celsius

0°C[32°F]: 161kohm

10°C[50°F]: 97kohm

20°C[68°F]: 60kohm

25°C[77°F]: 48kohm

30°C[86°F]: 39kohm

40°C[104°F]: 25kohm

THBOX

Control box in-

ternal tempera-

ture detection

Sole-

noid

valve

SV1a

Discharge-suc-

tion

bypass

1) High/low pressure bypass at

start-up and stopping, and

capacity control during low-

load operation

2) High-pressure-rise preven-

tion

AC208 - 230V

Open while being powered/

closed while not being pow-

ered

Continuity

check with a

tester

SV4a - SV4d

Heat

exchanger

capacity control

Controls heat source unit heat ex-

changer capacity

SV7a,7b

Heat

exchanger

capacity control

Controls heat source unit heat ex-

changer capacity

AC208 - 230V

Closed while being powered/

open while not being powered

SV9 High-pressure-rise prevention AC208 - 230V

Open while being powered/

closed while not being pow-

ered

Part

name

Symbols

(functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method

R = 15k

R = 3460

R = 15

0/80

3460

273 t

273

exp

R = 17k

R = 4016

R = 17

25/120

4016

273 t

323

exp

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 128 -

HWE09080 GB

Heater CH11 Heats the refrigerant in the com-

pressor

Cord heater

1035 ohm 51W

Resistance

check

4-way

valve

21S4a Changeover between heating and

cooling

AC208-230V

Dead: cooling cycle

Live: heating cycle

Continuity

check with a

tester

Elec-

tronic

expan-

sion

valve

LEV1

(for SC control)

PQHY

only

Regulates the amount of bypass

flow from the heat source unit liq-

uid pipe during cooling

12 VDC

Stepping motor driven valve

opening

0-480 pulses (direct driven)

Same as with

the indoor

LEV.

The resistance

values differs

from that of the

LEVs on in-

door unit.

(Refer to the

section on

Troubleshoot-

ing the

LEV(page 310

))

LEV2a

LEV2b

(Refrigerant

flow control

PQHY

only

Controls the refrigerant flow dur-

ing heating

12 VDC

Stepping motor driven valve

opening

1400 pulses

Same as with

the indoor

LEV.

Part

name

Symbols

(functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 129 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Indoor Unit

Part

Name

Symbol

(functions) Notes Usage Specification Check method

Linear

expan-

sion valve

LEV 1) Adjusts superheat at the

indoor heat exchanger

outlet during cooling

2) Adjusts subcool at the

heat exchanger outlet of

the indoor unit during

cooling

DC12V

Opening of stepping motor

driving valve 0-(1400) puls-

Refer to the section

"Continuity Test with a

Tester".

Continuity between

white, red, and or-

ange.

Continuity between

yellow, brown, and

blue.

Thermis-

tor

TH1

(Suction air

temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

0°C [32°F]:15kohm

10°C [50°F] :9.7kohm

20°C [68°F]:6.4kohm

25°C [77°F] :5.3kohm

30°C [86°F] :4.3kohm

40°C [104°F] :3.1kohm

Resistance check

TH2

(Pipe temper-

ature)

1) Indoor unit control (Frost

prevention, Hot adjust)

2) LEV control during heat-

ing operation (subcool

detection).

TH3

(Gas pipe

temperature)

LEV control during cooling op-

eration (superheat detection)

TH4

Outdoor air

temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

Temperature

sensor (In-

door air tem-

perature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

Yellow

White

Red

Orange

Brown Blue

273+t

=15k

0/80

=3460

Rt =

15exp{3460( - )}

273

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 130 -

HWE09080 GB

3. BC controller

(1) G type

Part name Symbols

(functions)

Part

code Usage Specifications Check method

Pressure

sensor

PS1

(High pres-

sure side)

1) Detects high pressure

2) LEV control

PS3

(Intermedi-

ate pres-

sure)

1) Detects intermediate

pressure

2) LEV control

Thermistor TH11

(Liquid inlet

tempera-

ture)

LEV control

(Liquid level control)

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm

10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm

20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm

25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm

30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm

40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

TH12

(Bypass

outlet tem-

perature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH15

(Bypass in-

let tempera-

ture)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH16

(Liquid re-

frigerant

tempera-

ture)

LEV control (Subcool)

Solenoid

valve

SVM1 Opens during cooling and de-

frost modes

AC208-230V

Open while being powered/

closed while not being pow-

ered

Continuity

check with a

tester

SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in heating operation

SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

LEV LEV1 1) Liquid level control

2) Pressure differential con-

trol

DC12V

Opening of a valve driven by a

stepping motor

0-2000 pulses

Same as

indoor LEV

LEV3

Pressure

0~4.15 MPa [601psi]

Vout 0.5~3.5V

0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]

Pressure [MPa]

=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69

Pressure [psi]

=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145

GND (Black)

Vout (White)

Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

Con-

nector

PS1

123

R = 15k

R = 3460

R = 15

0/80

3460

273 t

273

exp

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 131 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) GA type

Part name Symbols

(functions)

Part

code Usage Specifications Check method

Pressure

sensor

PS1

(High pres-

sure side)

1) Detects high pressure

2) LEV control

PS3

(Intermedi-

ate pres-

sure)

1) Detects intermediate

pressure

2) LEV control

Thermistor TH11

(Liquid inlet

tempera-

ture)

LEV control

(Liquid level control)

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm

10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm

20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm

25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm

30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm

40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

TH12

(Bypass

outlet tem-

perature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH15

(Bypass in-

let tempera-

ture)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH16

(Liquid re-

frigerant

tempera-

ture)

LEV control (Subcool)

Solenoid

valve

SVM1 Opens during cooling and de-

frost modes

AC208-230V

Open while being powered/

closed while not being pow-

ered

Continuity

check with a

tester

SVM2 Pressure differential control

SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in heating operation

SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

LEV LEV1

LEV2

1) Liquid level control

2) Pressure differential con-

trol

DC12V

Opening of a valve driven by a

stepping motor

0-2000 pulses

Same as

indoor LEV

LEV3 Subcool control

Pressure

0~4.15 MPa [601psi]

Vout 0.5~3.5V

0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]

Pressure [MPa]

=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69

Pressure [psi]

=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145

GND (Black)

Vout (White)

Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

Con-

nector

PS1

123

R = 15k

R = 3460

R = 15

0/80

3460

273 t

273

exp

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 132 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) GB type

Part name Symbols

(functions)

Part

code Usage Specifications Check method

Thermistor TH12

(Bypass

outlet tem-

perature)

LEV control (Superheat)

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm

10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm

20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm

25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm

30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm

40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

TH15

(Bypass in-

let tempera-

ture)

LEV control (Superheat)

Solenoid

valve

SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

AC208-230V

Open while being powered/

closed while not being pow-

ered

Continuity

check with a

tester

SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in heating operation

SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

LEV LEV3 Pressure differential control DC12V

Opening of a valve driven by a

stepping motor

0-2000 pulses

Same as

indoor LEV

R = 15k

R = 3460

R = 15

0/80

3460

273 t

273

exp

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

- 133 -

HWE09080 GB

(4) HB type

Part name Symbols

(functions)

Part

code Usage Specifications Check method

Thermistor TH12

(Bypass

outlet tem-

perature)

LEV control (Superheat)

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm

10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm

20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm

25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm

30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm

40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

TH15

(Bypass in-

let tempera-

ture)

LEV control (Superheat)

Solenoid

valve

SV A Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

AC208-230V

Open while being powered/

closed while not being pow-

ered

Continuity

check with a

tester

SV B Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in heating operation

SV C Provides refrigerant to indoor

unit in cooling operation

LEV LEV3 Pressure differential control DC12V

Opening of a valve driven by a

stepping motor

0-2000 pulses

Same as

indoor LEV

R = 15k

R = 3460

R = 15

0/80

3460

273 t

273

exp

- 134 -

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

GBHWE09080

- 135 -

HWE09080 GB

VII

Control

[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches ....................................................... 137

[2] Controlling the Heat source Unit.................................................................................... 143

[3] Controlling BC Controller ............................................................................................... 160

[4] Operation Flow Chart.....................................................................................................161

- 136 -

[ VII Control ]

- 137 -

HWE09080 GB

VII Control

[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches

1. Heat source unit

(1) Control board

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.

2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.

B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.

C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.

3) Refer to "VII [2] Controlling the Heat source Unit" for details.(page 143)

Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

Units that re-

quire switch

setting

Note.2

OFF ON OFF ON OC OS

SWU 1-2 Unit address setting Set to 00 or 51-100 with the dial switch Before power on C C

SW1 1-10 For self-diagnosis/

operation monitoring

Refer to the LED monitor display on the

heat source unit board. Anytime after power on CC

SW2

1Centralized control

switch

Without connection

to the centralized

controller

With connection to

the centralized con-

troller

Before power on

2Deletion of connec-

tion information Normal control Deletion Before power on A-

3Deletion of error his-

tory SW

(OC) Storage of IC/

OC error history

(OC) Deletion of IC/

OC error history Anytime after power on

(When switched from OFF

to ON)

(OS) Storage of OS

error history

(OS) Deletion of

OS error history

4 Pump down mode Normal control Pump down mode

After being energized and

while the compressor is

stopped

A-

5- - - - --

6- - - - --

7Power on signal out-

put switch During Thermo-ON During Thermo-

OFF Anytime after power on A-

8- - - - --

9- - - - --

10 - - - - - -

[ VII Control ]

- 138 -

HWE09080 GB

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.

2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.

B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.

C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.

3) The noise level is reduced by controlling the compressor frequency.

A setting of CN3D is required.(page 24)

4) If the inlet water temperature (TH7) drops below 5ºC [41ºF] while the compressor is stopped, or the outlet water temperature

(TH8) drops below 3ºC [37ºF], Cooling-only operation will be performed to prevent freeze-ups.

This operation will terminate when one of the following conditions is met: 1) Both the TH7 and TH8 readings (water tempera-

ture) exceed 10ºC [50ºF], 2) Two hours have passed since the beginning of the Cooling-only operation, or 3) Signal to resume

normal operation is received.

Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

Units that re-

quire switch

setting

Note.2

OFF ON OFF ON OC OS

SW3

1Test run mode: en-

abled/disabled SW3-2 disabled SW3-2 enabled Anytime after power on A-

2Test run mode: ON/

OFF Stops all ICs Sends a test-run

signal to all IC

After power on and when

SW3-1 is on.

A-

3CN51-3,5 signal out-

put switch

Heat source unit er-

ror output

Water heat ex-

changer coupling

prevention output

Anytime after power on

4Water heat exchang-

er freeze prevention Ineffective Effective

Note 4 Anytime after power on A-

5- - - - --

6- - - - --

7- - - - --

8- - - - --

9- - - - --

10 - - - - - -

SW4

1- - - - --

2- - - - --

3Refrigerant amount

adjustment

Normal operation

mode

Refrigerant amount

adjust mode

Anytime after being ener-

gized (except during ini-

tial startup mode.

Automatically cancelled

90 minutes after com-

pressor startup)

A-

Low-noise mode/

step demand switch-

ing

Low-noise mode

(Note 3) Step demand mode Before being energized

5- - - - --

Cumulative com-

pressor operation

time data deletion

Cumulative com-

pressor operation

time data is re-

tained.

Cumulative com-

pressor operation

time data is delet-

ed.

Anytime after power on

(when the unit is turned

on)

7- - - - --

8- - - - --

9- - - - --

10 - - - - - -

[ VII Control ]

- 139 -

HWE09080 GB

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.

2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.

B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.

C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.

3) When set to the capacity priority mode and if the following conditions are met, the quiet mode will terminate, and the unit will

go back into the normal operation mode.

Cooling-only/Cooling-main: High pressure is high.

Heating-only/Heating-main: Low pressure is low.

(2) INV board

Functions are switched with the following connector.

CN6 short-circuit connector is mated with the mating connector.

Leave the short-circuit connector on the mating connector during normal operation to enable error detection and protect the

equipment from damage.

Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

Units that re-

quire switch

setting

Note.2

OFF ON OFF ON OC OS

SW5

1- - - - --

2- - - - --

3- - - - --

4- - - - --

5Low-noise mode

selection

Capacity priority

mode(Note 3) Low-noise mode Before being energized A-

6- - - - --

7- - - - --

8- - - - --

9- - - - --

10 Backup heating Ineffective Effective Any time after power on A -

Connector Function

Function according to connec-

tor Setting timing

Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled

CN6 short-

circuit con-

nector

Enabling/disabling the following error

detection functions;

ACCT sensor failure

(5301 Detail No. 115)

ACCT sensor circuit failure

(5301 Detail No.117)

IPM open/ACCT erroneous wiring

(5301 Detail No. 119)

Detection of ACCT erroneous wiring

(5301 Detail No.120)

Error detec-

tion enabled

Error detec-

tion disable

(No load op-

eration is pos-

sible.)

Anytime after power on

[ VII Control ]

- 140 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Function of the switch (Indoor unit)

(1) Dipswitches

1) SW1,3

SW3-1

OFF

OFF OFF

OFF

Very Low

Low

Preset speed

Stop

Switch setting

SW1-7 SW1-8 Heating Cooling

Cooling-only/heat pump

Heat pump

Cooling-only

Heat pump

Fan speed during Thermo-OFF

Note 2. If both SW1-7 and SW1-8 are set to ON, the fan remains stopped during heating Thermo-OFF.

To prevent incorrect temperature detection due to a build-up of warm air around the indoor unit, use the built-in temperature sensor on the remote controller (SW1-1)

instead of the one on the indoor unit inlet thermistor.

Note 3. By setting SW3-1, SW1-7, and SW1-8 to a certain configuration, the fan can be set to remain stopped during cooling Thermo-OFF. See the table below for details.

Switch Function Function according to switch setting

OFF ON

Switch setting timing

OFF ON Notes

SW1

SW3

Room temperature

detection position

Clogged filter detection

Filter check reminder time setting

Outside air intake

Remote display option

Humidifier control

Self-recovery after power failure

Fan speed setting for

Heating Thermo-OFF

Power source start-stop

Unit model selection

Louver

Vane

Vane swing function

Vane angle limit setting

for cooling operation

Initial vane position

Heating 4 C[7.2 F] up

Automatic LEV value

conversion function

Indoor unit inlet

100h

Disabled

Fan output

2500h

Enabled

Thermo-ON signal

Built-in sensor on

the remote controller

Available

During heating operation

According to the

SW1-7 setting

Heat pump

Always on while in the heating mode

Fan speed setting for

Heating Thermo-OFF

Very Low Low

Preset speed

Cooling only

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled Enabled

Enabled

Not available Available

Not available

Available

Not available

Available

Not available Available

---

Downblow B,C Horizontal

While the unit is stopped

(Remote controller OFF)

Always set to OFF on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units

Set to ON (built-in sensor on the remote controller)

on All Fresh (PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) model units

Applicable to All Fresh model units

(PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) only

Applicable to All Fresh model units

(PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) only

Always set to OFF on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units

PLFY-P-NLMU-E model only

Set to OFF on floor-standing

(PFFY) type units

Note 1. Settings in the shaded areas are factory settings.(Refer to the table below for the factory setting of the switches whose factory settings are not indicated by the shaded cells.)

Always set to Downblow B or C on

PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units

Disabled

SHm setting 2

The setting depends on the

model and type.

The setting depends on the

model and type.

SCm setting 10 15

Disabled

Forced heating operation

at OA temp of 5 C or below

[ VII Control ]

- 141 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Address switch

Actual indoor unit address setting varies in different systems. Refer to the installation manual for the heat source unit for details

on how to make the address setting.

Each address is set with a combination of the settings for the 10's digit and 1's digit.

(Example)

When setting the address to "3", set the 1's digit to 3, and the 10's digit to 0.

When setting the address to "25", set the 1's digit to 5, and the 10's digit to 2.

3. Function of the switch <Remote controller>

(1) MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA)

The SW is located at the bottom of the remote controller under the cover. Operate the switches to perform the remote con-

troller main/sub setting or other function settings. Normally, do not change the settings of switches other than the SW1 (main/

sub switching switch). (All the switches are set to "ON" at factory setting.)

The MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA) does not have the switches listed above. Refer to the installation manual for the func-

tion setting.

Remote controllerSwitching switch

234

Switch

Function

Remote controller

main/sub setting

At power on of the

remote controller

Normal

startup

Timer mode

startup

3Cooling/heating display

set by automatic setting Displayed Not displayed

4Suction temperature display

(discharge temperature display) Displayed Not displayed

Operation by switch settings

Switch setting timing

ON OFF

Main Sub

Before power on

When two remote controllers are connected

to one group, set either of the remote

controllers to "Sub".

When the program timer (only few stock

products are available) is connected, set to

"Timer mode startup" to resume the operation

with timer mode after power is restored.

When the automatic mode is set and the

"Cooling"/"Heating" display is not necessary,

set to "Not displayed".

When the suction temperature (discharge

temperature) display is not necessary,

set to "Not displayed".

[ VII Control ]

- 142 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) ME remote controller (PAR-F27MEA)

Set the address of the remote controller with the rotary switch.

To set addresses, use a precision slotted screw driver [2.0 mm [0.08 in] (w)], and do not apply than 19.6N.

The use of any other tool or applying too much load may damage the switch.

4. Switch functions <BC controller> (Control board)

Model setting

10's digit 1's digit

(left) (right)

Remote controller unit

Rotary switch

Example: In case of address 108

Address setting range Setting method

Main remote controller 101-150 Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the

same group.

Sub remote controller 151-200 Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the

same group.

Setting of rotary switch Address No.

01-99*1 101-199 with the 100's digit automatically being set to 1*2

00 200

*1. At factory shipment, the rotary switch is set to 01.

*2. The address range that can be set with the ME remote controller is between 101 and 200. When the dials are set to

a number between 01 and 99, the 100's digit is automatically set to [1]. When the dials are set to 00, the 100's digit is

automatically set to [2].

Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

OFF ON

SW4

1 Model setting R410A - Always leave this switch to OFF.

2 - 5 - - - -

6 No. of ports *1

*1. When a junction pipe kit was used to merge two ports to connect the indoor units with a total capacity of between P31

and P54, turn DIP SW4-6 to ON. When connecting a main and a sub BC controller, change the SW setting on only the

main BC controller. (It is not necessary to change the SW setting on the sub BC controller. )

1 2 Before being energized

7, 8 - - - -

SW5

1 - 6 - - - -

7 Model setting Refer to the table below. Before being energized

8 Model setting Refer to the table below. Before being energized

Switch SW5-8

OFF ON

SW5-7 OFF G type

ON GAtype GB (HB) type

[ VII Control ]

- 143 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Controlling the Heat source Unit

-1- Outline of Control Method

The heat source units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the

same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).

The setting of heat source unit can be verified by using the self-diagnosis switch (SW1).

The OC determines the operation mode and the control mode, and it also communicates with the indoor units.

The OS exercises autonomous distributed control (over defrost, error detection, and actuator control etc.) according to the

operation/control mode signals that are sent from the OC.

-2- Startup sequence rotation

At the initial startup, heat source units start up in the order of "OC and OS."

Startup sequence rotation is performed while all the indoor units are stopped. (Even after two hours of operation, startup se-

quence rotation is not performed while the compressor is in operation.)

In a system with multiple heat source units (OC and OS), when the integrated operation time of the unit in operation (either

OC or OS) reaches one hour during a cooling operation at low outside temperature, that unit will stop and the other unit will

go into operation.

Refer to [-13-Control at Initial Start-up] for the initial startup.

Performing startup sequence rotation does not change the basic operation of OC and OS. Only startup sequence is changed.

Startup sequence of the heat source units can be checked with the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the OC.

-3- Initial Control

When the power is turned on, the initial processing of the microcomputer is given top priority.

During the initial processing, control processing of the operation signal is suspended. (The control processing is resumed after

the initial processing is completed. Initial processing involves data processing in the microcomputer and initial setting of each

of the LEV opening. This process will take up to 5 minutes.)

During the initial processing, the LED monitor on the heat source unit's control board displays S/W version -> refrigerant type

-> heat pump -> cooling only and capacity -> and communication address in turn every second.

-4- Control at Start-up

The upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the operation is 50 Hz.

When the power is turned on, normal operation will start after the initial start-up mode (to be described later) has been com-

pleted (with a restriction on the frequency).

Display

SW1

1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10

The unit is designated as the OC: “oc” appears on the display.

The unit is designated as OS: “oS” appears on the display

Display SW1

OC→OS: “oc” and the “OC” address appear alternately on the display.

OS→OC: “oS” and the “OS” address appear alternately on the display.

1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10

[ VII Control ]

- 144 -

HWE09080 GB

-5- Bypass Control

Bypass solenoid valves (SV1a), which bypass the high- and low- pressure sides, perform the following functions.

(1) Bypass solenoid valve (SV1a) (ON = Open)

(2) Bypass solenoid valve (SV9) (ON = Close)

Operation SV1a

ON OFF

When the compressor on each heat source

unit starts up

ON for 4 minutes.

After the restoration of thermo or 3 minutes

after restart

ON for 4 minutes.

During cooling or heating operation with the

compressor stopped

Always ON.

Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less

After the operation has stopped ON for 3 minutes.

Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less

During defrost operation ON

While the compressor is operating at the

minimum frequency and when the low pres-

sure (63LS) drops (3 or more minutes after

compressor startup)

When low pressure (63LS) drops

below 0.23MPa[33psi].

When low pressure (63LS) ex-

ceeds 0.38MPa[55psi].

When high pressure (63HS1) rises When 63HS1 exceeds

3.62MPa[525psi]

When 63HS1 is or below

3.43MPa[497psi] and 30 seconds

have passed

Operation SV9

OFF ON

When high pressure (63HS1) rises during

the heating operation

When 63HS1 exceeds 3.50MPa

[507psi]

When the pressure is

2.70MPa[391psi]or below

Others Always ON

[ VII Control ]

- 145 -

HWE09080 GB

-6- Compressor Frequency Control

Depending on the capacity required, the frequency of the compressor is controlled to keep constant evaporation temperature

(0°C [32°F] = 0.71 MPa [103 psi]) during cooling operation, and condensing temperature (49°C [120°F] = 2.88 MPa [418 psi])

during heating operation.

The table below summarizes the operating frequency ranges of the inverter compressor during normal operation.

The OS in the multiple-heat source-unit system operates at the actual compressor frequency value that is calculated by the

OS based on the preliminary compressor frequency value that the OC determines.

The maximum frequency during heating operation is affected by the water temperature to a certain extent.

(1) Pressure limit

The upper limit of high pressure (63HS1) is preset, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every 15

seconds.

The actuation pressure is when the high-pressure reading on 63HS1 is 3.58MPa[519psi].

(2) Discharge temperature limit

Discharge temperature (TH4) of the compressor in operation is monitored, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency

is decreased every minute.

Operating temperature is 115°C [239°F].

(3) Periodic frequency control

Frequency control other than the ones performed at start-up, upon status change, and for protection is called periodic frequen-

cy control (convergent control) and is performed in the following manner.

Periodic control cycle

Periodic control is performed after the following time has passed

30 seconds after compressor start-up

30 seconds after frequency control based on discharge temperature or pressure limit

The amount of frequency change

The amount of frequency change is controlled to approximate the target value based on the evaporation temperature (Te) and

condensing temperature (Tc).

Model Frequency/cooling (Hz) Frequency/heating (Hz)

Max Min Max Min

P72 model 66 35 66 15

P96 model 90 35 80 15

P120 model 114 35 104 15

[ VII Control ]

- 146 -

HWE09080 GB

-7- Refrigerant Recovery Control <PQHY>

Recovery of refrigerant is performed during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the unit while

it is stopped (unit in fan mode), or inside the indoor unit that is in cooling mode or in heating mode with thermo off. It is also

performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat source heat

exchanger.

(1) During heating operation

Starting refrigerant recovery mode

The refrigerant recovery mode in heating starts when all of the following three conditions are met:

15 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery.

TH4 > 115°C [239°F]

Frequencies below 50 Hz

Refrigerant recovery

1) Refrigerant is recovered with the LEV on the applicable indoor unit (unit under stopping mode, fan mode, cooling, heating with

thermo off) being opened for 30 seconds.

2) Periodic capacity control of the heat source units and periodic LEV control of the indoor units will be suspended during refrig-

erant recovery operation; they will be performed after the recovery has been completed.

(2) During cooling operation

Starting refrigerant recovery mode

The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all the following conditions are met:

30 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery.

When the unit keeps running for 3 minutes in a row or more with high discharge temperature

TH4 > 105°C [221°F] or 63HS1 > 3.43 MPa [497 psi] (35 kg/cm2G) and SC0 > 10°C [18°F]

Refrigerant recovery

The opening of LEV1 is increased and periodic control begins again.

-8- Refrigerant Recovery Control <PQRY>

Refrigerant recovery is performed for each BC port during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating in-

side the units that are stopped (in the fan mode), in the cooling mode, or in the heating Thermo-OFF mode.

It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat

source heat exchanger.

Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main

mode)

The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all of the following conditions are met:

1) When 5 minutes have passed in the Heating-only or Heating-main mode or 30 seconds have passed in the Cooling-only or

Cooling-main mode since the completion of the previous refrigerant recovery cycle AND the when following conditions are

met.

TH4 > 105°C [221°F]

2) When the port is not in the 4-minute restart delay mode

Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main

mode)

1) When the port is in the cooling Thermo-OFF, fan, or stop mode

SV C at the port turns on for 30 seconds. ( indicates port No.)

2) The opening of LEV1 and LEV3 is increased.

-9- Capacity Control of Heat Exchanger<PQHY>

(1) Control method

Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a con-

stant condensing temperature of (water temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation tem-

perature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 <Pa [103psi]) during heating operation.

The OS in the multiple-heat source-unit system operates at the actual heat source unit fan control value that is calculated by

the OS based on the preliminary heat source unit fan control value that the OC determines.

Opening of LEV during refrigerant recovery

Opening of indoor unit LEV: 400 pulses

Initial opening of LEV

Start Finish

30 seconds

[ VII Control ]

- 147 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heat source unit heat exchanger capacity control patterns

Model Operation mode Operation

pattern

Solenoid valve

SV4a SV4b SV4d SV7a SV7b

P72-P120 models Cooling 1 ON OFF OFF ON ON

2ONOFFOFFOFFON

3 ONOFFOFFONOFF

4 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

5ONONOFFONON

6ONONOFFOFFON

7 ON ON OFF ON OFF

8 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

Heating 1 ON OFF ON ON ON

2 ON OFF ON OFF ON

3 ON OFF ON ON OFF

4 ON OFF ON OFF OFF

5 ONONONONON

6ONONONOFFON

7ONONONONOFF

8ONONONOFFOFF

9ONOFFOFFONON

10 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

11 ON OFF OFF ON OFF

12 ON ON OFF ON ON

13 ON ON OFF OFF ON

14 ON ON OFF ON OFF

15 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

[ VII Control ]

- 148 -

HWE09080 GB

-10- Capacity Control of Heat Exchanger<PQRY>

(1) Control method

Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a con-

stant condensing temperature of (water temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation tem-

perature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 <Pa [103psi]) during heating operation.

The OS in the multiple-heat source-unit system operates at the actual heat source unit fan control value that is calculated by

the OS based on the preliminary heat source unit fan control value that the OC determines.

(2) Heat source unit heat exchanger capacity control patterns

Model Operation

mode

Operation

pattern

Solenoid valve

SV4a SV4b SV4d SV7a SV7b

P72 - P120 models Cooling-main 1 ON OFF ON ON ON

2 ON OFF ON OFF ON

3 ON OFF ON ON OFF

4 ON OFF ON OFF OFF

5 ONONONONON

6ONONONOFFON

7 ONONONONOFF

8ONONONOFFOFF

Cooling-only

Cooling-main

9ONOFFOFFONON

10 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

11 ON OFF OFF ON OFF

12 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

13 ON ON OFF ON ON

14 ON ON OFF OFF ON

15 ON ON OFF ON OFF

16 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

Heating-only

Heating-main

1 ON OFF ON ON ON

2 ON OFF ON OFF ON

3 ON OFF ON ON OFF

4 ON OFF ON OFF OFF

5 ONONONONON

6ONONONOFFON

7 ONONONONOFF

8ONONONOFFOFF

9ONOFFOFFONON

10 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

11 ON OFF OFF ON OFF

12 ON ON OFF ON ON

13 ON ON OFF OFF ON

14 ON ON OFF ON OFF

15 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

[ VII Control ]

- 149 -

HWE09080 GB

-11- Subcool Coil Control (Linear Expansion Valve <LEV1>) <PQHY only>

The OC, OS1, and OS2 controls the subcool coil individually.

The LEV is controlled every 30 seconds to maintain constant the subcool at the heat source unit heat exchanger outlet that

is calculated from the values of high pressure (63HS1) and liquid piping temperature (TH3), or the superheat that is calculated

from the values of low pressure (63LS) and the bypass outlet temperature (TH2) of the subcool coil.

LEV opening is controlled based on the values of the inlet (TH6) and the outlet (TH3) temperatures of the subcool coil, high

pressure (63HS1), and discharge temperature (TH4). In a single-heat source-unit system, the LEV is closed (0) in the heating

mode, while the compressor is stopped, and during cooling Thermo-OFF. In a multiple-heat source-unit system, the LEV clos-

es (0) during heating operation, while the compressor is stopped, or during cooling Thermo-OFF. The LEV opens to a speci-

fied position when 15 minutes have passed after Thermo-OFF. (65 pulses)

LEV1 outputs 0 pulse during the defrost cycle, and 300 pulses if either of the following formulas are satisfied: 63LS<2kgf/cm2

or TH4100ºC [212ºF].

-12- Refrigerant flow control (Linear expansion valve <LEV2a, LEV2b>)<PQHY only>

Refrigerant flow is controlled by each unit in the combined models during heating. Refrigerant flow control is performed by the

OC, OS1, and OS2 individually. The valve opens to a specified angle during cooling (Opening: 1400 pulses)

Valve opening is controlled based on the values of high pressure (63HS1), discharge temperature (TH4), low pressure(

63LS), and piping temperature (TH5).

The valve moves to the predetermined position while the unit is stopped.

-13- Control at Initial Start-up

When started up for the first time before 12 hours have elapsed after power on, the unit goes into the initial startup mode.

At the completion of the initial operation mode on the OC, OS1, and OS2, they will go into the normal control mode.

1. Flowchart of initial operation

(1) P72, P96, P120 models

50 F 60Hz

or F < 50Hz

Initial startup mode starts.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Initial startup mode complete

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

[ VII Control ]

- 150 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) P144, P168, P192, P216, P240 models

*1 Qj:Total capacity (model name) code

Yes

50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS)

or F < 50Hz (both OC and OS)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OC remains in operation, and the

compressor on the OS starts up.

50 F 60Hz (OC)

or F < 50Hz (OC)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OC starts up.

Both the OC and OS stop.

The startup sequence of the OC and OS is rotated.

50 F 60Hz (OS)

or F < 50Hz (OS)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OS starts up.

The air conditioning load is too small

for both the OC and the OS to

simultaneously stay in operation.

The air conditioning load is

high enough for both OC and OS to

simultaneously stay in operation.

Initial startup mode complete

The compressor on the OC starts up.

The total operating load of the indoor unit

after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above.

(

Qj 50)

Initial startup mode starts.

F 60Hz

[ VII Control ]

- 151 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) P264, P288, P312, P336, P360 models <PQHY only>

*1 Qj:Total capacity (model name) code

Initial startup mode starts.

The compressor on the OC starts up.

F 60Hz

The total operating load of the indoor unit

after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above.

(

Qj 50)

The total operating load of the indoor unit after

5 minutes of operation is between P96 and P400.

(50 <

Qj< 200)

50 F 60Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2)

or F < 50Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OS remains in operation, and the

compressors on the OS1 and OS2 start up.

50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS1)

or F < 50Hz (both OC and OS1)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OC remains in operation,

and the compressor on the OS1 starts up.

50 F 60Hz (OC)

or F < 50Hz (OC)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OC starts up.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The startup sequence of the OC,

OS1, and OS2 is rotated.

(The startup sequence of the OC,

OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The startup sequence of the OC, OS1,

and OS2 is rotated.

(The startup sequence of the OC,

OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The startup sequence of the OC,

OS1, and OS2 is rotated.

(The startup sequence of the OC,

OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

50 F 60Hz (OS1)

or F < 50Hz (OS1)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OS1 starts up.

50 F 60Hz (OS2)

or F < 50Hz (OS2)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OS2 starts up.

*2 *3

Yes

Initial startup mode complete

50 F 60Hz (both OS1 and OS2)

Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OS1 remains in operation,

and the compressor on the OS2 starts up.

or F < 50Hz (both OS1 and OS2)

The air conditioning load is

too small for the OC, OS1,

and OS2 to simultaneously

stay in operation.

The air conditioning load is

too small for both OC and

OS1, or OS1 and OS2 to

simultaneously stay in

operation.

The air conditioning load is

high enough for OC, OS1

and OS2 to simultaneously

stay in operation.

The air conditioning load is

high enough for both OC

and OS1, or OS1 and OS2

to simultaneously stay in

operation.

[ VII Control ]

- 152 -

HWE09080 GB

-14- Emergency Operation Mode

1. Problems with the heat source unit

Emergency operation mode is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when

one of the heat source units in the P144 through P240 models is in trouble or when one or two of the heat source units in the

P264 through P360 models are in trouble.

This mode can be started by performing an error reset via the remote controller.

(1) Starting the emergency operation

1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code will be displayed on the display on the remote controller.

2) The error is reset using the remote controller.

3) If an error code appears that permits an emergency operation in step 1) above, (See the table below.), the retry operation

starts.

4) If the same error is detected during the retry operation (step 3 above), an emergency operation can be started by resetting

the error via the remote controller.

Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS)

Emergency operation pattern (2 heat source units)

Emergency operation pattern (3 heat source units)

Trouble source Error codes that permit an

emergency operation Error code description

Serial communication error

Bus voltage drop

Heatsink overheat protection

Overload protection

Overcurrent relay trip

Heatsink temperature sensor failure (THHS)

Current sensor/circuit failure

Subcool heat exchanger bypass outlet temperature sensor failure

Pipe temperature sensor failure

Discharge temperature sensor failure

Accumulator inlet temperature sensor failure

Subcool heat exchanger liquid outlet sensor failure

Outside air temperature sensor failure

Open phase

Power supply sync signal abnormality

0403

4220, 4225

4230

4240

4250, 4255

5110

5301

5102

5103

5104

5105

5106

5107

4102

4115

Compressor

Inverter

Thermistor

Power

TH2

TH3

TH4

TH5

TH6

TH7

Water outlet temperature sensor fault5108

TH8

OC failure

pattern

Trouble

Normal

Permitted Permitted

60%

Cooling

Heating

Normal

Trouble

OS failure

pattern

Emergency

operation

Maximum total capacity

of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure

pattern

Trouble Trouble Trouble

Normal

Normal NormalNormal

Normal Normal

60% 40%

Cooling

Heating

Normal Normal Normal

Trouble

Trouble Trouble Trouble

Trouble Trouble

OS1 failure

pattern

OS2 failure

pattern

OC, OS1 failure

pattern

OC, OS2 failure

pattern

OS1, OS2 failure

pattern

OS1

OS2

Emergency

operation

Maximum total capacity

of indoor units (Note 1)

(Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity,

some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF.

Permitted

[ VII Control ]

- 153 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Ending the emergency operation

1) End conditions

When one of the following conditions is met, emergency operation stops, and the unit makes an error stop.

When the integrated operation time of compressor in cooling mode has reached four hours.

When the integrated operation time of compressor in heating mode has reached two hours.

When an error is detected that does not permit the unit to perform an emergency operation.

2) Control at or after the completion of emergency operation

At or after the completion of emergency operation, the compressor stops, and the error code reappears on the remote con-

troller.

If another error reset is performed at the completion of an emergency mode, the unit repeats the procedures in section (1)

above.

To stop the emergency mode and perform a current-carrying operation after correcting the error, perform a power reset.

2. Communication circuit failure or when some of the heat source units are turned off

This is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when communication circuit

failure occurs or when some of the heat source units are turned off.

(1) Starting the emergency operation (When the OC is in trouble)

1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code appear on the display on the remote controller.

2) Reset the error via the remote controller to start an emergency operation.

Precautions before servicing the unit

When the OC is in trouble, the OS temporarily takes over the OC's function and performs an emergency operation. When this

happens, the indoor unit connection information are changed.

In a system that has a billing function, a message indicating that the billing system information has an error may appear on

the TG-2000A. Even if this message appears, do not change (or set) the refrigerant system information on the TG-2000A.

After the completion of an emergency operation, the correct connection information will be restored.

(2) Starting the emergency operation (When the OS is in trouble)

1) A communication error occurs. -> An emergency operation starts in approximately six minutes.

Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS)

Trouble source

Circuit board failure or the power

to the heat source units is off

6607

6608

No acknowledgement error

No response error

Error codes that permit an

emergency operation Error code description

[ VII Control ]

- 154 -

HWE09080 GB

Emergency operation pattern (2 heat source units)

Emergency operation pattern (3 heat source units)

(3) Ending the emergency operation

When communication is restored, the emergency mode is cancelled, and the units go into the normal operation mode.

Cooling

Heating

OC failure

pattern

Trouble

Normal

Permitted Permitted

Normal

Trouble

OS failure

pattern

Emergency

operation

Maximum total capacity

of indoor units (Note 1)

Capacity that matches

the total capacity of the

operable heat source

units

OC failure

pattern

Trouble Trouble Trouble

Normal

Normal Normal Normal

Normal Normal

Cooling

Heating

Normal Normal Normal

Trouble

Trouble Trouble Trouble

Trouble Trouble

OS1 failure

pattern

OS2 failure

pattern

OC, OS1 failure

pattern

OS1

OS2

Emergency

operation

Maximum total capacity

of indoor units (Note 1) Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable heat source units

(Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity,

some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF.

Permitted

OC, OS2 failure

pattern

OS1, OS2 failure

pattern

[ VII Control ]

- 155 -

HWE09080 GB

-15- Control Method <PQRY only>

The control system configuration for the PQRY models is shown in the chart below.

Control method

Data signal exchange

between system equipment

Calculation, processing

System control

Adjustment of refrigerant flow rate

Adjustment of rotation speed of

compressor or fan

Non-polar 2-wire

serial communication

method

16-bit CPU

microcomputer operation

processing

Autonomous distributed

control system

(F2-VPM control)

Rotation speed control of compressor

or fan depending on the refrigerant

pressure value and the changing speed

Self-contained capacity control depending

on the load

Refrigerant distribution control depending

on the operation mode

Heat source unit

Daisy-chained

non-polar 2-wire

transmission line

Indoor unit

BC controller

Autonomous distributed control system : A system that consists of three independent sub control systems,

instead of a single centralized control system, that work together

to maintain the overall control of the entire system.

[ VII Control ]

- 156 -

HWE09080 GB

-16- Cooling/heating Circuit Control and General Function of System Equipment

High-pressure gasHigh-pressure gas

Heat exchanger

High-pressure

liquid

4-way valve

Check valve

Selector valve

Low-pressure two-phase

Low-

pressure

two- phase

High-pressure liquid

Low-

pressure

two- phase

Low-

pressure

two- phase

Heat exchanger

High-pressure

liquid

High-pressure

liquid

High-pressure

liquid

High-pressure

liquid

High-pressure liquid

Cooling

Heating

Cooling

Heating

Low-

pressure

pipe

High-

pressure

pipe

High-

pressure

gas

High-

pressure

gas

High-

pressure

gas

High-pressure

two-phase

Low-pressure

gas

Low-pressure

gas

Low-pressure gasLow-pressure gas

Low-

pressure

gas

Gas-liquid

separator

Heat source unit BC controller

Indoor unit

LEV

J G I

K H

D C F E B

BCD

Gas-liquid mixture

Pressure

Liquid

Gas

Enthalpy

(energy)

Schematic diagram of refrigerant circuit

Gas

Two-phase

Liquid

Schematic diagram of refrigerating cycle

Cooling

only

Operation

status

Cooling

main

Heating

only

Heating

main

[ VII Control ]

- 157 -

HWE09080 GB

-17- Operation Mode <PQHY>

(1) Indoor unit operation mode

The operation mode can be selected from the following 5 modes using the remote controller.

(2) Heat source unit operation mode

When the heat source unit is performing a cooling operation, the operation mode of the connected indoor units that are not in

the cooling mode (Stopped, Fan, Thermo-OFF) cannot be changed to heating from the remote controller. If this attempt is

mode, "Heating" will flash on the remote controller. The opposite is true when the heat source unit is performing a heating

operation. (The first selection has the priority.)

1 Cooling mode

2 Heating mode

3 Dry mode

4Fan mode

5 Stopped mode

1 Cooling mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode.

2 Heating mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode.

3 Stopped mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode.

[ VII Control ]

- 158 -

HWE09080 GB

-18- Operation Mode <PQRY>

(1) Indoor unit operation mode

The operation mode can be selected from the following 6 modes using the remote controller.

(2) Heat source unit operation mode

When units in cooing and heating coexist, the operation mode (cooling main mode or heating main mode) will be determined

by the heat source unit, based on the refrigerant pressure and speed variation data.

(3) Operation pattern for automatic cooling/heating mode

When the automatic cooling/heating mode is selected from remote controller functions, the indoor temperature will be detect-

ed in pattern as shown in the figure below, and the operation mode (cooling or heating) will automatically be selected.

(4) Relationship between the operation mode and the load capacity (kW) (within a system)

1 Cooling mode

2 Heating mode

3 Dry mode

4 Automatic cooling/heating

mode

5Fan mode

6 Stopping mode

1 Cooling only mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode.

2 Heating only mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode.

3 Cooling main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes.

4 Heating main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes.

5 Stopping mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode.

Cooling Fan

Heating

Switches to cooling mode

Cooling operation under

Thermo-ON conditions

Set temperature

(Variable between 19 C and 28 C

[ 67 F and 83 F])

Heating operation under Thermo-ON conditions

Switches to heating mode

Fan

Temperature

rise

1.5 C

[3 F]

1.5 C

[3 F]

1 C [2 F]

Cooling load

capacity

Heating load

capacity

Cooling load

capacity

Heating load

capacity

Heating load

capacity

Cooling load

capacity

100(%)

Cooling only

mode

Cooling main

mode

Heating main

mode

Total heat recovery mode

Heating only

mode

100(%)

Heating

load (%)

Heating load

X100 = Cooling

load (%)

Cooling load

X 100

[ VII Control ]

- 159 -

HWE09080 GB

-19- DEMAND Control

Cooling/heating operation can be prohibited (Thermo-OFF) by an external input to the heat source units.

When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, the 4-step DEMAND control is enabled.

Eight-step demand control is possible in the system with two heat source units.

Twelve-step demand control is possible in the system with three heat source units.

Refer to Chapter II [3] 2.(7) "Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the heat source unit (various con-

nection options)" for details.(page 22)

[ VII Control ]

- 160 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Controlling BC Controller

1. Control of SV A, SV B, and SV C

SV A, SV B, and SV C turn on or off depending on the operation mode of the branch.

2. Control of SVM1 and 1b

SVM turns on or off depending on the operation mode.

3. Control of LEV

LEV opening (sj) is controlled as follows depending on the operation mode.

4. Control of SVM2, and 2b

Mode

Cooling Heating Stopped

Port

SV A ON OFF OFF

SV B OFF ON OFF

SV C ON OFF OFF

Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Stopped

SVM1,1b ON Pressure differen-

tial control*1

*1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlle every minute so as to be within

a certain range.

OFF OFF OFF

Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Stopped

G,GA

type

LEV1

2000 Liquid level

control*1differ-

ential control*2

*1. Liquid level control: The liquid level detected by the liquid inlet temperature (TH11 sensor) is controlled so as to be within

a certain range.

*2. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlle every minute so as to be within

a certain range.

110 110*3

*3. Can be 110 or more due to pressure rise on the liquid side (PS1).

1200

LEV2

(only GA type)

LEV3 Superheat con-

trol*4

*4. Superheat control: The amound of superheat that is calculated on the bypass inlet and outlet temperature (G, GA,

:TH12,TH15, GB, HB: TH12, TH15) is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range.

Pressure differ-

ential control*2 Pressure differ-

ential control*2 60

GB,HB

type LEV3 Superheat con-

trol*4 Superheat con-

trol*4 60 60 60

Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Stopped

SVM2,2b OFF OFF Pressure differen-

tial control*1

*1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlled every minute so as to be within

a certain range.

Pressure differen-

tial control*1 OFF

[ VII Control ]

- 161 -

HWE09080 GB

[4] Operation Flow Chart

1. Mode determination flowchart <PQHY>

(1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode)

*Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41.

*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. If some of the indoor units are

experiencing a problem (except water leakage), only those indoor units that are experiencing the problems will stop.

If the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all connected indoor units will stop.

*Note 3. The operation will be prohibited when the set cooling/heating mode is different from that of the heat source unit.

Start

Remote controller

display lit off

Error mode

Error stop

Error display

Self-holding of

protection function

Error command

to heat source unit

Indoor unit LEV

fully closed.

Refer to 2-(1)

Cooling operation.

Refer to 2-(2)

Heating operation.

Refer to 2-(3)

for dry operation.

ProhibitionProhibitionProhibition

Dry display

Heating displayCooling display

Dry mode

Heating mode

Fan mode

Fan display

Fan operations

Operation mode

Cooling mode

Operation command to heat source unit (to 2 )

Prohibition

"Blinking display on

the remote controller"

FAN stop

Breaker

turned on

Operation SW

turned on

Auxiliary heater

Drain pump

3-minute

drain pump ON

NO NO NO NO

*Note 1

*Note 2

*Note 1

*Note 3 *Note 3 *Note 3

1. Protection function

self-holding cancelled.

2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.

1. Auxiliary heater OFF

2. Low fan speed for

1 minute

YES

YES YES YES

YES

Normal operation

Error

Unit in the stopped state

From heat source unit

[ VII Control ]

- 162 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heat source unit (cooling and heating modes)

*Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address,

and for the group information will start. During this, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the remote

controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" keeps

blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on.

*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. The heat source unit

stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of even a single indoor

unit will keep the heat source unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display.

*Note 3. The heat source unit operates according to the operation mode commanded by the indoor unit. However, when the

heat source unit is running a cooling operation, come of the operating indoor units will stop, or the operation of these

indoor units will be prohibited even when the indoor unit mode is switched from fan mode to heating mode.

This also applies when the heat source unit is running a heating operation.

Start

Breaker

turned on

Operation

command

Error stop

Error display on the

heat source unit LED

Error command to

indoor unit

Operation

mode

Operation

mode

Error mode

72C ON

*Note 1

*Note 3

*Note 2

YES

"HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on

the remote controller

Operation command to indoor unit To 1 .

Cooling / Heating

1. Protection function self-holding cancelled.

2. LEV1 fully closed.

Normal operation

1. 72C OFF

2. Inverter output 0Hz

3. All solenoid valves OFF

Refer to Cooling/Dry

Operation 2-(1) and 2-(3)

Refer to

heating

Operation 2-(2).

2 From indoor unit

Error

Unit in the stopped state

Self-holding of

protection function

Indoor units

registered to the

remote controller

[ VII Control ]

- 163 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Operations in each mode

(1) Cooling operation

*Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the thermostat.

Cooling operation

Test run mode

Thermostat ON

3-minute restart

prevention

*Note 1

YES

4-way valve OFF

1. I

nverter frequency control

Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 control

LEV2a, LEV2b fully opened

3. Solenoid valve control

4. 72C control

Normal operation

During test run mode

Unit in the stopped state

Indoor unit fan

operation

1. Inverter output 0Hz

2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1

LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening

3. All solenoid valves OFF

4. 72C OFF

[ VII Control ]

- 164 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating operation

Heating operation

Test run mode

Thermostat ON

3-minute restart

prevention

YES

1. Indoor-heat source unit fan control

2. Inverter frequency control

3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1,LEV2a, LEV2b control

4. Solenoid valve control

5. 72C control

Normal operation

4-way valve ON

During test run mode

Indoor unit fan operation at

Very Low speed

2. Inverter output 0Hz

Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 Fully closed

LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening

4. All solenoid valves OFF

5. Heat source unit fan stop

6. 72C OFF

Unit in the stopped state

[ VII Control ]

- 165 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Dry operation

Dry operation

*Note 1

*Note 2

YES

4-way valve OFF

1. Heat source unit (compressor)

intermittent operation

2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations

(Synchronized with the compressor:

low speed, OFF operations)

Normal operation

Thermostat ON

1. Indoor unit fan stop

2. Inverter output 0Hz

3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 fully closed.

LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening.

4. Solenoid valve OFF

72C OFF

1 or 2

*Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18°C [64°F], the heat source unit (compressor) and the

indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature

becomes 18°C [64°F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The heat source unit, the indoor unit,

and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor

is turned on.

*Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation

(ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation.

Test run mode

Suction temperature

18°C[64°F]

Unit in the stopped state

[ VII Control ]

- 166 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Mode determination flowchart <PQRY>

(1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode)

Start

Remote controller

display lit off

Error mode

Error stop

Error display

Self-holding of

protection function

Error command

to heat source unit

Indoor unit

LEV fully closed.

Refer to 2-(1) for

cooling operation.

Refer to 2-(2) for

heating operation.

Refer to 2-(3) for

dry operation.

ProhibitionProhibitionProhibition

Dry display

Heating displayCooling display

Dry modeHeating mode Fan mode

Fan display

Fan operations

Operation mode

Cooling mode

Prohibition

"Blinking display on

the remote controller"

FAN stop

Breaker

turned on

Operation SW

turned on

Auxiliary heater

Drain pump

3-minute drain

pump ON

NO NO NO NO NO

*Note 1

*Note 2

*Note 3 *Note 3 *Note 3

1. Protection function

self-holding cancelled.

2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.

1. Auxiliary heater OFF

2. Low fan speed for

1 minute

YES

YES YES YES

YES

Normal operation

Error

Stop

Prohibition

Auto COOL/HEAT

display

Automatic

cooling/heating mode

*Note 3

YES

Auto

cooling/heating mode

*Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41.

*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source unit side.

If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem

will stop. If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all the connected units will stop.

*Note 3. If multiple indoor units are connected to a port and there is a discrepancy in the operation mode between the

indoor unit and the port, the operation will be prohibited. (Operation mode blinks on the remote controller, the

Fan stops, indoor unit LEV becomes fully closed.)

[ VII Control ]

- 167 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heat source unit (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes)

Start

Breaker

turned on

Operation

command

Error stop

Error display on the

heat source unit LED

Self-holding of

protection function

Operation command

to the BC controller

Operation

mode

Error mode

72C ON

*Note 1

*Note 2

*Note 3

*Note 4

YES

fan

"HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks

on the remote controller

Operation command to the BC controller

Cooling only, Heating only

Mixture of units in cooling and heating

Protection function

self-holding cancelled.

Normal operation

1. 52C1 4-way valve OFF

2. Inverter output 0Hz

3. All solenoid valves OFF

Cooling Only Heating Only

Cooling Main

Operation

mode

Operation

mode

*Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address,

and for the group information will start. During this, "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the

remote controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing,

"HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes

after power on.

*Note 3. The units will follow the operation mode commands from the BC controller

*Note 4. When the operation mode commands from the BC controllers are mixed (both cooling and heating), the

actual operation mode is determined by the heat source unit.

*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. The heat

source unit stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of

even a single indoor unit will keep the heat source unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display.

Heating Main

Indoor units

registered to the

remote controller

Error

Unit in the stopped state

[ VII Control ]

- 168 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) BC controller (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes)

Start

Breaker

turned on

Operation

command

Error command to

heat source unit

Error stop

Self-holding of

protection function

Error command to

indoor unit

Error mode

*Note 1

YES

Fan

All units in the

same mode

Solenoid valves OFF

LEV Fully closed

Determination of operation mode

(Cooling only, Heating only, Mixture

of units in cooling and heating)

Transmitted to the heat source unit

Operation

mode

Note 1. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source

unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are

experiencing the problem will stop. If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem,

all the connected units will stop.

Operation

mode

Operation

mode

Cooling Only Heating Only Cooling Main Heating Main

Mixture of units in cooling and heating

Reception of operation mode

command from the heat source unit

Protection function

self-holding cancelled.

Normal operation

Error

Unit in the stopped state

[ VII Control ]

- 169 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Operations in each mode

(1) Cooling operation

Cooling operation

Test run mode

Thermostat

3-minute restart

prevention

*Note 1

YES

4-way valve OFF

1. Inverter frequency control

Indoor unit LEV, Oil returnLEV control

3. Solenoid valve control

4. BC controller solenoid valve control

5. BC controller control

Normal operation

During test run mode

Indoor unit fan

operation

1. Inverter output 0Hz

Indoor unit LEV, Oil return LEV fully closed

3. Solenoid valves OFF

4. BC controller solenoid valves OFF

5. BC controller LEV fully closed

Unit in the stopped state

*Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the

ON/OFF state of the thermostat.

[ VII Control ]

- 170 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating operation

Heating operation

Test run mode

Thermostat

3-minute restart

prevention

YES

1. Indoor-heat source unit fan control

2. Inverter frequency control

3. Indoor unit LEV fully open

4. Solenoid valve control

5. BC controller solenoid valve control

6. BC controller LEV control

Normal operation

4-way valve ON

During test run mode

1. Indoor unit fan operation at

Very Low speed

2. Inverter output 0Hz

3. Indoor unit LEV fully open

4. Solenoid valve OFF

5. BC controller solenoid valve control

6. BC controller LEV control

Unit in the stopped state

[ VII Control ]

- 171 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Dry operation

Dry operation

*Note 1

*Note 2

YES

4-way valve OFF

1. Heat source unit (compressor)

intermittent operation

2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations

(Synchronized with the compressor:

low speed, OFF operations)

Normal operation

Thermostat ON

1. Indoor unit fan stop

2. Inverter output 0Hz

3. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.

4. Solenoid valve OFF

BC controller Solenoid valve OFF

6. BC controller

LEV fully closed

1 2

*Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18 C [64 F], the heat source unit (compressor) and the

indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature

becomes 18 C [64 F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The heat source unit, the indoor unit,

and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor

is turned on.

*Note 2.

Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation

(ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation.

Test run mode

Suction temperature

18 C[64 F]

Unit in the stopped state

- 172 -

[ VII Control ]

GBHWE09080

- 173 -

HWE09080 GB

VIII

Test Run Mode

[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run......................................................................... 175

[2] Test Run Method ........................................................................................................... 176

[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount ......................................................... 177

[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount .................................................................................. 177

[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode................................................................................... 182

[6] The following symptoms are normal. ............................................................................. 186

[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ..................................................................187

- 174 -

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 175 -

HWE09080 GB

VIII Test Run Mode

[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run

(1) Check for refrigerant leak and loose cables and connectors.

(2) Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground with a 500V megger and

make sure it reads at least 1.0Mohm.

Do not operate the unit if the insulation resistance is below 1.0Mohm.

Do not apply megger voltage to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the controller board.

The insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground could go down to close to 1Mohm imme-

diately after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant

in the compressor.

If insulation resistance reads at least 1Mohm, by turning on the main power and powering the crankcase heater for at least

12 hours, the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will go up.

Do not measure the insulation resistance of the terminal block for transmission line for the unit remote controller.

(3) Check that the valve on the gas pipe and liquid pipe are fully open.

Securely tighten the cap.

(4) Check the phase sequence and the voltage of the power supply.

(5) [When a transmission booster is connected]

Turn on the transmission booster before turning on the heat source units.

If the heat source units are turned on first, the connection information for the refrigerant circuit may not be properly recognized.

In case the heat source units are turned on before the transmission booster is turned on, perform a power reset on the heat

source units after turning on the power booster.

(6) Turn on the main power to the unit at least 12 hours before test run to power the crankcase heater.

Insufficient powering time may result in compressor damage.

(7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, perform a test run with the

power supply unit being energized. Leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 176 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Test Run Method

The figure shows an MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA).

PAR-21MAA

ON/OFF

FILTER

CHECK

OPERATION

CLEAR

TEST

TEMP.

BACK DAY

MONITOR/SET

CLOCK

ON/OFF

Set Temperature buttons

Down

Operation Mode button

ON/OFF button

Fan Speed button

Test Run button

Vertical Air Direction button

Louver button

(

Operation button)

To preceding

operation number.

Ventilation button

( Operation button)

To next operation

number.

ERROR CODE

AFTER

TIMER

TIME SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

OFF

AFTER

FILTER

FUNCTION

ONLY1Hr.

WEEKLY

SIMPLE

AUTO OFF

Operation procedures

Turn on the main power. "PLEASE WAIT" appears on the LCD for up to five minutes. Leave

the power on for 12 hours. (Energize the crankcase heater.)

Press the Test button twice.

Operation mode display "TEST RUN" and OPERATION MODE are

displayed alternately.

Press the Operation Mode button.

Make sure that cold (or warm) air blows out.

Make sure that the air is blowing out.

Switch to cooling (or heating) operation by pressing the Operation Mode button.

Press the Fan Speed button.

Change the air flow direction by pressing the Vertical Air Direction button or the Louver button.

Confirm the operation of all interlocked equipment, such as ventilation equipment.

Note 1: Refer to the following pages if an error code appears on the remote controller or when the unit malfunctions.

2: The OFF timer will automatically stop the test run after 2 hours.

3: The remaining time for the test run will be displayed in the time display during test run.

4: The temperature of the liquid pipe on the indoor unit will be displayed in the room temperature display window on the remote

controller during test run.

5: On some models, "NOT AVAILABLE" may appear on the display when the Vane Control button is pressed. This is normal.

6: If an external input is connected, perform a test run using the external input signal.

Perform simultaneous all-system operation for 15 minutes or longer because system error detection may take 15 minutes maximum.

Make sure that the fan speed changes with each pressing of the button.

Stop

Make sure that the air flow direction changes with each pressing of the button.

Cancel the test run by pressing the ON/OFF button.

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 177 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount

It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operating characteristics of air conditioners

before attempting to adjust the refrigerant amount in a given system.

1. Operating characteristic and refrigerant amount

The following table shows items of particular importance.

1) During cooling operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation.

2) During heating operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the largest when all indoor units are in operation.

3) General tendency of discharge temperature

Discharge temperature tends to rise when the system is short on refrigerant.

Changing the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge

temperature.

The higher the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise.

The lower the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise.

4) When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate, the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 60°C [18 to 108°F] higher

than the low pressure saturation temperature (Te).

-> If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is

smaller than 5°C [9°F], an overcharging of refrigerant is suspected.

[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount

1. Symptoms

Overcharging or undercharging of refrigerant can cause the following symptoms:

Before attempting to adjust the amount of refrigerant in the system, thoroughly check the operating conditions of the system.

Then, adjust the refrigerant amount by running the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

2. Amount of refrigerant

(1) To be checked during operation

Operate all indoor units in either cooling-only or heating-only mode, and check such items as discharge temperature, subcool-

ing, low pressure, suction temperature, and shell bottom temperature to estimate the amount of refrigerant in the system.

The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1500 (overcharged refrigerant) on

the controller.

Overcharged refrigerant

The operating frequency does not reach the set frequency, and there is a problem with

performance.

Insufficient refrigerant amount

The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1102 (abnormal discharge temper-

ature) on the controller.

Symptoms Conclusion

Discharge temperature is high. (Normal discharge temperature is below 95°C [203°F].) Slightly under-

charged refrigerant

Low pressure is unusually low.

Suction superheat is large. (Normal suction superheat is less than 20°C [36°F].)

Compressor shell bottom temperature is high. (The difference between the compressor shell

bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is greater than 60°C [108°F].)

Discharge superheat is small. (Normal discharge superheat is greater than 10°C [18°F].) Slightly overcharged

refrigerant

Compressor shell bottom temperature is low. (The difference between the compressor shell bot-

tom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is less than 5°C [9°F].)

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 178 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Amount of refrigerant to be added<PQHY>

The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to the heat source units.

The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site.

(1) Calculation formula

The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft])

Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg)

Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz.

(Example: 178.21Q\ to 179oz)

Heat source unit model P72 P96 P120

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in

the heat source unit (kg) 5.0 5.0 5.0

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in

the heat source unit [lbs] 11.0 11.0 11.0

Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.29x L1) + (0.2 x L2) + (0.12 x L3) + (0.06 x L4) + (0.024 x L5) +ǩ

Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.12x L1' ) +(2.15 x L2' ) + (1.29 x L3' ) + (0.65 x L4' ) + (0.26 x L5' ) + ǩ

L1 : Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe (m)

L2 : Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe (m)

L3 : Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe (m)

L4 : Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe (m)

L5 : Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe (m)

ǩ, ǩ' : Refer to the table below.

L1' : Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe [ft]

L2' : Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe [ft]

L3' : Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe [ft]

L4' : Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe [ft]

L5' : Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe [ft]

Total capacity of

connected indoor units ǩ(kg) ǩ'(oz)

-27 2.0 71

28 - 54 2.5 89

55 - 126 3.0 106

127 - 144 3.5 124

145 - 180 4.5 159

181 - 234 5.0 177

235 - 273 6.0 212

274 - 307 8.0 283

308 - 342 9.0 318

343 - 411 10.0 353

412 - 480 12.0 424

481 - 14.0 494

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 179 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Example: PQHY-P144TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

(3) Sample calculation

CAUTION

Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.

If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may

result in performance loss.

[3/4"][98 ft]

[3/4"] [32 ft]

[3/8"][32 ft]

9.52

(20 m)

9.52

(10 m)

9.52

(10 m)

9.52

(10 m)

6.35

(10 m)

9.52 (10 m)

[3/8"]

[32 ft]

[3/8"]

[3 ft]

[3/8"]

[9 ft]

[3/8"]

[32 ft]

[1/4"]

[32 ft]

[3/8"]

[32 ft]

[3/8"]

[65 ft]

15.88 (10 m)

15.88 (30 m)

9.52

(3 m)

9.52

(1 m)

model 48

model 30

model 24

model 06

model

model 48

model 30

model 24

model 06

model

Liquid

separator

Liquid

separator

All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes.

15.88 : 30 m + 10 m = 40 m

9.52 : 3 m + 1m + 10 m + 10 m + 20 m + 10 m + 10 m = 64 m

6.35 : 10 m

According to the above formula

The calculation result would be 17.08, and it is rounded up to the nearest 0.1.

The final result will be as follows:

Amount of refrigerant to be charged (kg) = (0.2 X 40) + (0.06 X 64) + (0.024 X 10) + 5.0 = 17.08kg

Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 17.1kg

All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes.

[3/4"] : [98 ft] + [32 ft] = [130 ft]

[3/8"] : [9 ft] + [3 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] + [65 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] = [205 ft]

[1/4"] : [32 ft]

According to the above formula

The calculation result would be 598.07 oz, and it is rounded up to the nearest 1 oz.

The final result will be as follows:

Amount of refrigerant to be charged (oz) = (2.15 X 130) + (0.65 X 205) + (0.26 X 32) + 177 = 598.07oz

Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 599 oz

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 180 -

HWE09080 GB

4. Amount of refrigerant to be added <PQRY>

The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to theheat source units.

The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site.

(1) Calculation formula

The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft])

Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg)

Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz. (Example: 78.21oz to 79oz)

Heat source unit model P72 P96 P120

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant

in the heat source unit (kg) 5.0 5.0 5.0

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant

in the heat source unit [lbs] 11.0 11.0 11.0

Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.36 x L1) + (0.23 x L2) + (0.16 x L3) + (0.11 x L4)+ (0.2 x L5)

+ (0.12 x L6) + (0.06 x L7) + (0.024 x L8) + ǩ1 + ǩ2 + ǩ3 + ǩ4

Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.88 x L1' ) + (2.48 x L2' ) + (1.73 x L3' ) + (1.19 x L4' )+ (2.16 x L5' )

+ (1.30 x L6' ) + (0.65 x L7' ) + (0.26 x L8' ) + ǩ1' + ǩ2' + ǩ3' + ǩ4'

L1 : Length of ø28.58[1-1/8"] high pressure pipe (m)

L2 : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe (m)

L3 : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe (m)

L4 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe (m)

L5 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe (m)

L6 : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe (m)

L7 : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe (m)

L8 : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe (m)

ǩ1,ǩ2,ǩ3,ǩ4, ǩ1' , ǩ2' , ǩ3' , ǩ4' : Refer to the table

below.

L1' : Length of ø28.58[1-1/8"] high pressure pipe [ft]

L2' : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe [ft]

L3' : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe [ft]

L4' : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe [ft]

L5' : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe [ft]

L6' : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe [ft]

L7' : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe [ft]

L8' : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe [ft]

Heat source unit

total index

Amount for the BC

controllers (main/sub) BC controller (sub) Total capacity of

connected indoor

units

Amount for the Indoor

unit

ǩ1(kg) ǩ1' (oz) 11.0 35 ǩ4(kg) ǩ4' (oz)

P72

3.0 106

2 2.0 71 - 27 2.0 71

P96 28 - 54 2.5 89

P120 55 - 126 3.0 106

P144 127 - 144 3.5 124

P168 145 - 180 4.5 159

P192 181 - 234 5.0 177

P216 235 - 273 6.0 212

P240 274 - 307 8.0 283

308 - 342 9.0 318

343 - 411 10.0 353

412 - 480 12.0 424

481 - 14.0 494

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 181 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Example

(3) Sample calculation

BC controller

BC controller(HB)

Indoor

HH′

h1 h1

(P06 - P54)

Junction pipe kit

(CMY-R160-J)

(Optional accessory)

Branch joint

(CMY-Y102S-G2)

c d

Branch joint

(CMY-Y202-G2)

(CMY-Y102L-G2)

(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Aeh1

Branch joint kit

Heat source unit 1

Heat source unit 2

Reducer (P06 - P18)

(Supplied with the BC Controller)

Indoor

Maximum of 3 units per port

Total capacity of P54 or below

Indoor IndoorIndoor

341

(P72 or P96)

Indoor unit1:30 model

Indoor unit2:96 model

Indoor unit3:12 model

Indoor unit4:15 model

Indoor unit5:12 model

Indoor unit6:24 model

A : 28.58

B : 9.52

C : 9.52

D : 9.52

E : 9.52

F : 22.2

G : 19.05

40m

10m

20m

[1-1/8"]

[3/8"]

[7/8"]

[3/4"]

[3/8"]

[1/4"]

[3/8"]

[131ft]

[32ft]

[65ft]

[16ft]

[9ft]

[3ft]

[32ft]

[16ft]

[32ft]

[16ft]

a : 9.52

b : 9.52

c : 6.35

d : 6.35

e : 6.35

f : 9.52

10m

28.58 A = 40m[131ft]

22.2 F = 30m[98ft]

19.05 G = 1m[3ft]

9.52 C+D+E+a+b+f = 50m[164ft]

6.35 c+d+e = 20m[65ft]

The aggregate length of each liquid pipe type.

The final result will be as follows:

Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 40×0.36+3×0.23+1×0.16+50×0.06+20×0.024+7.5+2+2+5

= 35.3kg

When

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 182 -

HWE09080 GB

[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode

1. Procedures <PQHY>

Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode.

When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the heat source unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the

refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed.

SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Operation

When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it nor-

mally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling.

1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the values of TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4,

TH3, TH6, and Tc values on the OC, OS1, and OS2 by following the flowchart. The TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc values can be

displayed by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS1, and OS2.

2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant

amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes).

When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate.

TH3-TH6 on the heat source unit is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F].

The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on.

TH3-TH6 on the heat source unit is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less.

Wait until the TH3-TH6 reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to

determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate.

3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa[290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made.

4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW4-

3 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH6

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH3

Self-diagnosis swithes on Tc

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 183 -

HWE09080 GB

CAUTION

Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air.

CAUTION

Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.

If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may

result in performance loss.

YES

Start

Put all indoor units in the test run mode

and run the units in cooling mode.

Has it been at least

30 minutes since

start up?

Note 3

Note 1

Does 8°C [14.4°F] Tc-TH3 12°C [21.6°F] hold true?

(Use the largest “Tc - TH3” value of the

OC, OS1, and OS2.)

Does the following hold true?

Tc-TH3 8°C [14.4°F]

*Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart.

Note 2

Note 1

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low-

pressure side.

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after

adjusting the refrigerant amount to

determine its adequacy.

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the

refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy.

Turn off SW4-3 on the OC.

Turn on SW4-3 on the OC.

Adjustment complete

Note 4

Has the initial start-up

mode been completed?

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low

pressure side.

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low

pressure side.

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes

after adjusting the refrigerant amount

and check(Tc-TH3)

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low

pressure side.

Gradually draw out

refrigerant from the service

port on the low pressure side.

Does Tc-TH6 20°C [36°F] hold true?

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1,

OS2 at or below 100°C [212°F]?

Has the operating frequency

of the compressor on the OC, OS1,

and OS2 become stable?

Note 1

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1,

OS2 at or below 95°C [203°F]

(Check this item on the unit whose “Tc – TH3” value was

used in the step above.)

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 184 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Procedures <PQRY>

Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode.

When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the heat source unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the

refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed.

SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Operation

When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it nor-

mally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling.

1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the TH4 value, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4, SC11, SC16, and Tc

values on the OC, OS by following the flowchart. The TH4, SC11, and SC16 values can be displayed by setting the self-diag-

nosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS.

2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant

amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes).

When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate.

Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and

27°F].

The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on.

Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less.

Wait until the Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is be-

tween 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate.

SC11: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller inlet; SC16: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller outlet

3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa [290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made.

4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW4-

3 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4

Self-diagnosis swithes on SC16

Use these switches to check the TH4, SC11, and SC16.

Self-diagnosis swithes on SC11

ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 185 -

HWE09080 GB

CAUTION

Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air.

CAUTION

Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.

If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may

result in performance loss.

Start

Turn on SW4-3 on the OC.

YES

Put all indoor units in the test run mode

and run the units in cooling mode.

Has it been at least

30 minutes since

start up?

Note 3

*Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart.

Note 2

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low-

pressure side.

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after

adjusting the refrigerant amount to

determine its adequacy.

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the

refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy.

Note 2

5K[41°F] ≤ SC11?

Turn off SW4-3 on the OC.

Adjustment complete

Does 10 ≤ SC16 ≤ 30K [86ºF]

hold true?

Note1

Does 10K [50ºF] > SC16

hole true?

Note 4

Has the initial start-up

mode been completed?

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low

pressure side.

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low

pressure side.

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the

refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3)

Note 2

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the

refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3)

Gradually add refrigerant

from the service port on

the low pressure side.

Gradually draw out

refrigerant from the service

port on the low pressure side.

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS

at or below 100°C [212°F]?

Does SH ≥ 5K [41ºF] hold

true for all indoor units?

Has the indoor unit

LEV opening stabilized?

Note 2

Has the

operating frequency

of the compressor on the OC, OS

become stable?

ote

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS

at or below 95°C [203°F]?

Gradually add refrigerant from

the service port on the low

pressure side.

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 186 -

HWE09080 GB

[6] The following symptoms are normal.

Symptoms Remote controller

display Cause

The indoor unit does not start

after starting cooling (heating)

operation.

"Cooling (heating)"

icon blinks on the

display.

The unit cannot perform a heating (cooling) operation when other indoor

units are performing a cooling (heating) operation.

The auto vane adjusts its posi-

tion by itself.

Normal display

After an hour of cooling operation with the auto vane in the vertical posi-

tion, the vane may automatically move into the horizontal position.

Louver blades will automatically move into the horizontal position while

the unit is in the defrost mode, pre-heating stand-by mode, or when the

thermostat triggers unit off.

The fan keeps running after

the unit has stopped. Unlit When the auxiliary heater is turned on, the fan operates for one minute

after stopping to dissipate heat.

The fan speed does not reach

the set speed when operation

switch is turned on. STAND BY

The fan operates at extra low speed for 5 minutes after it is turned on or

until the pipe temperature reaches 35°C[95°F], then it operates at low

speed for 2 minutes, and finally it operates at the set speed.

(Pre-heating stand-by)

When the main power is

turned on, the display shown

on the right appears on the in-

door unit remote controller for

5 minutes.

"HO" or "PLEASE

WAIT" icons blink

on the display.

The system is starting up. Wait until the blinking display of "HO" or

"PLEASE WAIT" go off.

The drain pump keeps run-

ning after the unit has

stopped.

Unlit

The drain pump stays in operation for three minutes after the unit in the

cooling mode is stopped.

The drain pump is running

while the unit is stopped.

When drain water is detected, the drain pump goes into operation even

while the unit is stopped.

Indoor unit and BC controller

make noise during cooling/

heating changeover.

Normal display

This noise is made when the refrigerant circuit is reversed and is normal.

Sound of the refrigerant flow is

heard from the indoor unit im-

mediately after starting opera-

tion.

Normal display

This is caused by the transient instability of the refrigerant flow and is nor-

mal.

Warm air sometimes comes

out of the indoor units that are

not in the heating mode. Normal display

This is due to the fact that the LEVs on some of the indoor units are kept

slightly open to prevent the refrigerant in the indoor units that are not op-

erating in the heating mode from liquefying and accumulating in the com-

pressor. It is part of a normal operation.

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 187 -

HWE09080 GB

[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data)

1. Single unit<PQHY>

(1) Cooling operation

Item

Heat source unit model

PQHY-P72YHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C

[80°F/67°F]

26.7°C/19.4°C

[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 2 2

Model - 36/36 48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8 ] 5 [16-3/8 ]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4 ] 10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 25 [82] 25 [82]

Fan speed - Hi Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29]

Heat source

unit

Current A 17.7 23.3

Voltage V 230 230

Compressor frequency Hz 66 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325 387/387

SC (LEV1) 80 100

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.27/0.81 [329/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 47 [117] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 188 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

Heat source unit model

PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C

[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 3

Model - 36/36/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8 ]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 35 [115]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 13.6 [30]

Heat source

unit

Current A 23.8

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 114

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387

SC (LEV1) 100

LEV2 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.30/0.81 [334/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 42 [108]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 189 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating operation

Item

Heat source unit model

PQHY-P72YHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-] 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 2 2

Model - 36/36 48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8 ] 5 [16-3/8 ]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4 ] 10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 25 [82] 25 [82]

Fan speed - Hi Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29]

Heat source

unit

Current A 18.6 25.2

Voltage V 230 230

Compressor frequency Hz 60 72

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332 406/406

SC (LEV1) 0 0

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 2.90/0.80 [421/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

73 [163] 80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99] 38 [100]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 190 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

Heat source unit model

PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 3

Model - 36/36/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8 ]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 35 [115]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 13.6 [30]

Heat source

unit

Current A 28.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/406

SC (LEV1) 0

LEV2 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.68/0.80 [389/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 191 -

HWE09080 GB

2. 2-unit combination<PQHY>

(1) Cooling operation

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P144YSHMU-A

PQHY-P72YHMU-A PQHY-P72YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model - 36/36/36/36

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 20.3 [45]

Heat source

unit

Current A 42.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 66 66

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/325/325

SC (LEV1) 80 80

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.20/0.81 [319/117] 2.20/0.81 [319/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 47 [117] 47 [117]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 192 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P168YSHMU-A

PQHY-P96YHMU-A PQHY-P72YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model - 36/36/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 23.1 [51]

Heat source

unit

Current A 42.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 78 78

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387/387

SC (LEV1) 90 90

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.23/0.81 [323/117] 2.23/0.81 [323/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 47 [117]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 193 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P192YSHMU-A

PQHY-P96YHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model - 48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 24.6 [54]

Heat source

unit

Current A 51.8

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

387/387/387/387

SC (LEV1) 100 100

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.27/0.81 [329/117] 2.27/0.81 [329/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 194 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P216YSHMU-A

PQHY-P120YHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 5

Model - 36/36/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 52.2

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 98 98

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387/387/387

SC (LEV1) 159 159

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.28/0.81 [331/117] 2.28/0.81 [331/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 195 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P240YSHMU-A

PQHY-P120YHMU-A PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 6

Model - 36/36/36/36/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 32.7

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 105 105

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/325/325/387/387

SC (LEV1) 159 159

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.30/0.81 [334/117] 2.30/0.81 [334/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 196 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating operation

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P144YSHMU-A

PQHY-P72YHMU-A PQHY-P72YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model - 36/36/36/36

pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 20.3 [45]

Heat source

unit

Current A 25.5

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 60 60

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/332/332

SC (LEV1) 0 0

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.64/0.80 [383/116] 2.64/0.80 [383/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

77 [171] 77 [171]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 197 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P168YSHMU-A

PQHY-P96YHMU-A PQHY-P72YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model - 36/36/48/48

pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 23.1 [51]

Heat source

unit

Current A 44.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 66 66

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0 0

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.80/0.80 [406/116] 2.80/0.80 [406/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

77 [171] 77 [171]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 198 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P192YSHMU-A

PQHY-P96YHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model - 48/48/48/48

pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 24.6 [55]

Heat source

unit

Current A 51.1

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 72 72

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

406/406/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0 0

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.90/0.80 [421/116] 2.90/0.80 [421/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

80 [176] 80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 199 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P216YSHMU-A

PQHY-P120YHMU-A PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 5

Model - 36/36/48/48/48

pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 55.1

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 81 81

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/406/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0 0

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.75/0.80 [399/116] 2.75/0.80 [399/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

81 [178] 81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 200 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQHY-P240YSHMU-A

PQHY-P120YHMU-A PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 6

Model - 36/36/36/36/48/48

pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 33.5

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/332/332/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0 0

LEV2 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa

[psi] 2.68/0.80 [389/116] 2.68/0.80 [389/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

81 [178] 81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 201 -

HWE09080 GB

3. 3-unit combination<PQHY>

(1) Cooling operation

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P264YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P72YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 6

Model - 48/48/48/48/36/36

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 23.5 [52]

Heat source

unit

Current A 62.6

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 82 82 82

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

387/387/387/387/325/325

SC (LEV1) 130 141 138

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.25/0.81 2.25/0.81 2.25/0.81

[326/117] [326/117] [326/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 47 [117] 47 [117] 47 [117]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [65]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [42]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 202 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P288YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 6

Model - 48/48/48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 25.5 [57]

Heat source

unit

Current A 69.9

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90 90 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

387/387/387/387/387/387

SC (LEV1) 141 141 185

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.27/0.81 2.27/0.81 2.27/0.81

[329/117] [329/117] [329/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [65]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [42]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 203 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P312YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 6

Model - 54/54/54/54/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 25.5 [57]

Heat source

unit

Current A 77.2

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 95 95 95

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

395/395/395/387/387/387

SC (LEV1) 141 141 185

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.28/0.81 2.28/0.81 2.28/0.81

[331/117] [331/117] [331/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [65]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [42]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 204 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P336YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 7

Model - 48/48/48/48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.5 [59]

Heat source

unit

Current A 84.2

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 100 100 100

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

387/387/387/387/387/387/387

SC (LEV1) 141 141 185

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.29/0.81 2.29/0.81 2.29/0.81

[332/117] [332/117] [332/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [65]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [42]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 205 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P360YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 7

Model - 54/54/54/54/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length 75 [246-1/16]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.8 [60]

Heat source

unit

Current A 89.0

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 105 105 105

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

395/395/395/395/387/387/387

SC (LEV1) 100 100 100

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.30/0.81 2.30/0.81 2.30/0.81

[334/117] [334/117] [334/117]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

65 [149] 65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95] 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [67] 19 [67] 19 [67]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 42 [105] 42 [105] 42 [105]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [65]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [42]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 206 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating operation

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P264YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P72YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 6

Model - 48/48/48/48/36/36

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 23.5 [52]

Heat source

unit

Current A 66.1

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 70 70 70

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

406/406/406/406/332/332

SC (LEV1) 0

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.81/0.80 2.81/0.80 2.81/0.80

[408/116] [408/116] [408/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

77 [171] 77 [171] 77 [171]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 38 [100]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 207 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P288YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 6

Model - 48/48/48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 25.5 [57]

Heat source

unit

Current A 71.0

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 72 72 72

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

406/406/406/406/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.90/0.80 2.90/0.80 2.90/0.80

[421/116] [421/116] [421/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

80 [176] 80 [176] 80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 208 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P312YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 6

Model - 54/54/54/54/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 25.5 [57]

Heat source

unit

Current A 71.7

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 78 78 78

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

414/414/414/414/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.82/0.80 2.82/0.80 2.82/0.80

[409/116] [409/116] [409/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

80 [176] 80 [176] 80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 38 [100]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 209 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P336YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P96YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 7

Model - 48/48/48/48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.5 [59]

Heat source

unit

Current A 79.1

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 83 83 83

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

406/406/406/406/406/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.72/0.80 2.72/0.80 2.72/0.80

[395/116] [395/116] [395/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

81 [178] 81 [178] 81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 210 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

3-unit combination

PQHY-P360YSHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

PQHY-

P120YHMU-A

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [°F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in opera-

tion 7

Model - 54/54/54/54/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 75 [246-1/16]

Fan speed - Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.8 [60]

Heat source

unit

Current A 84.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90 90 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

414/414/414/414/406/406/406

SC (LEV1) 0

LEV2 1400 1400 1400

Pressure

switch

High pressure (after O/S)/

Low pressure (before accumu-

lator)

MPa

[psi]

2.68/0.80 2.68/0.80 2.68/0.80

[389/116] [389/116] [389/116]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [°F]

81 [178] 81 [178] 81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bot-

tom 40 [104] 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 211 -

HWE09080 GB

4. Single unit<PQRY>

(1) Cooling only operation

Item

Heat source unit model

PQRY-P72YHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P104NU-G CMB-P104NU-G

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C

[80 °F/67 °F]

26.7°C/19.4°C

[80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 2 2

Model  36/36 48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8] 5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4] 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 25 [82] 25 [82]

Fan speed  Hi Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29]

Heat source

unit

Current A 17.7 23.3

Voltage V 230 230

Compressor frequency Hz 66 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325 387/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000//160 2000//170

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.20/0.81

[319/117]

2.27/0.81

[329/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.10/2.10

[305/305]

2.17/2.17

[315/315]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 47 [117] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43] 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 212 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

Heat source unit model

PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P104NU-G

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C

[80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4[85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 3

Model  36/36/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 35 [115]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 13.6 [30]

Heat source

unit

Current A 23.8

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 105

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000//180

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.30/0.81

[334/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.20/2.20

[319/319]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 42 [108]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 213 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating only operation

Item

Heat source unit model

PQRY-P72YHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P104NU-G CMB-P104NU-G

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/

[70 °F/]

21.1°C/

[70 °F/]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 2 2

Model  36/36 48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8] 5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4] 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 25 [82] 25 [82]

Fan speed  Hi Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 11.8 [27] 13.0 [29]

Heat source

unit

Current A 18.6 25.2

Voltage V 230 230

Compressor frequency Hz 60 72

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332 406/406

BC controller (1/2/3) 110//520 110//590

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.64/0.80

[383/116]

2.90/0.80

[421/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.61/2.29

[378/332]

2.87/2.55

[416/370]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

73 [163] 80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99] 38 [100]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158] 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 214 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

Heat source unit model

PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P104NU-G

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/

[70 °F/]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1[70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

[G/h]

[gpm]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 3

Model  36/36/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5 [16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 35 [115]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 13.6 [30]

Heat source

unit

Current A 28.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/406

BC controller (1/2/3) 110//660

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.68/0.80

[389/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.64/2.32

[383/336]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 215 -

HWE09080 GB

5. 2-unit combination<PQRY>

(1) Cooling only operation

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P144YSHMU-A

PQRY-P72YHMU-A PQRY-P72YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model  36/36/36/36

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 20.3 [45]

Heat source

unit

Current A 42.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 66 66

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/210

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.20/0.81

[319/117]

2.20/0.81

[319/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.10/2.10

[305/305]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 47 [117]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 216 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P168YSHMU-A

PQRY-P96YHMU-A PQRY-P72YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model  36/36/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 23.1 [51]

Heat source

unit

Current A 42.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 78 78

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/210

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.23/0.81

[323/117]

2.23/0.81

[323/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.13/2.13

[309/309]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 33 [91] 33 [91]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 47 [117]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 217 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P192YSHMU-A

PQRY-P96YHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model  48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [148]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 24.6 [55]

Heat source

unit

Current A 51.8

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

387/387/387/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/220

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.27/0.81

[329/117]

2.27/0.81

[329/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.17/2.17

[315/315]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 34 [93] 34 [93]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 218 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P216YSHMU-A

PQRY-P120YHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 5

Model  36/36/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 52.2

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 98 98

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/387/387/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/230

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.28/0.81

[331/117]

2.28/0.81

[331/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.18/2.18

[316/316]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 219 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P240YSHMU-A

PQRY-P120YHMU-A PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 6

Model  36/36/36/36/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 32.7

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 105 105

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

325/325/325/325/387/387

BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/240

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.30/0.81

[334/117]

2.30/0.81

[334/117]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.20/2.20

[319/319]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

65 [149] 65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet 35 [95] 35 [95]

Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46]

Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 42 [108]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet 6 [43]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 220 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heating only operation

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P144YSHMU-A

PQRY-P72YHMU-A PQRY-P72YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model  36/36/36/36

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [147]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 20.3 [45]

Heat source

unit

Current A 25.5

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 60 60

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/332/332

BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/870

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.64/0.80

[383/116]

2.64/0.80

[383/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.61/2.29

[378/332]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

77 [171] 77 [171]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 221 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P168YSHMU-A

PQRY-P96YHMU-A PQRY-P72YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model  36/36/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [147]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 23.1 [51]

Heat source

unit

Current A 44.3

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 66 66

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/406/406

BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/870

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.80/0.80

[406/116]

2.80/0.80

[406/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.77/2.45

[402/355]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

77 [171] 77 [171]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 222 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P192YSHMU-A

PQRY-P96YHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

IIndoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 4

Model  48/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 45 [147]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 24.6 [55]

Heat source

unit

Current A 51.1

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 72 72

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

406/406/406/406

BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/980

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.90/0.80

[421/116]

2.90/0.80

[421/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.87/2.55

[416/370]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

80 [176] 80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 223 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P216YSHMU-A

PQRY-P120YHMU-A PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 5

Model  36/36/48/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 55.1

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 81 81

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/406/406/406

BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/1050

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.75/0.80

[399/116]

2.75/0.80

[399/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.72/2.40

[395/348]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

81 [178] 81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

- 224 -

HWE09080 GB

Item

2-unit combination

PQRY-P240YSHMU-A

PQRY-P120YHMU-A PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller CMB-P108NU-GA

Operating

conditions

Indoor temperature DB/WB 21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature °C [ °F] 21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h

G/h

gpm

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

5.76

[1522]

[25.4]

Indoor

unit

No. of connected units

Unit

No. of units in operation 6

Model  36/36/36/36/48/48

Pipe

length

Main pipe

m [ft]

5[16-3/8]

Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length 65 [213]

Fan speed  Hi

Refrigerant charge kg

[lbs-oz] 26.2 [58]

Heat source

unit

Current A 33.5

Voltage V 230

Compressor frequency Hz 90 90

LEV opening

Indoor unit

Pulse

332/332/332/332/406/406

BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/1120

Pressure

switch

High pressure (63HS1)/

Low pressure (63LS) MPa

[psi]

2.68/0.80

[389/116]

2.68/0.80

[389/116]

BC controller on the liquid side

(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

2.64/2.32

[383/336]

Sectional

temperatures

Heat

source

unit

Discharge (TH4)

°C [ °F]

81 [178] 81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet 5 [41] 5 [41]

Accumulator inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Accumulator outlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor inlet 4 [39] 4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104]

Indoor

unit

LEV inlet 35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet 70 [158]

- 225 -

HWE09080 GB

Troubleshooting

[1] Error Code Lists.............................................................................................................227

[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller................................................. 230

[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise......................................................... 303

[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts..................................................................................... 306

[5] Refrigerant Leak ............................................................................................................ 343

[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions.......................................................................... 347

[7] Servicing the BC controller ............................................................................................ 353

[8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display ................................... 356

- 226 -

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 227 -

HWE09080 GB

IX Troubleshooting

[1] Error Code Lists

Error

Code

Prelimi-

nary

error

code

Error

(prelim-

inary)

detail

code

Error code definition

Searched unit

Notes

0403 4300 01 Serial communication error O

1102 1202 - Discharge temperature fault O

1301 - - Low pressure fault O

1302 1402 - High pressure fault O

1500 1600 - Refrigerant overcharge O

- 1605 - Preliminary suction pressure fault O

2000 2100 - Pump interlock error O

2134 2234 - Abnormal water temperature O

2135 2235 - Water heat exchanger freeze up O

2500 - - Drain sensor submergence O

2502 - - Drain pump fault O O

2503 - - Drain sensor (Thd) fault O O

2600 - - Water leakage O

2601 - - Water supply cutoff O

4102 4152 - Open phase O

4106 - - Transmission power supply fault O

4115 - - Power supply signal sync error O

4116 - - RPM error/Motor error O O

4220 4320

[108] Abnormal bus voltage drop O

[109] Abnormal bus voltage rise O

[111] Logic error O

[131] Low bus voltage at startup O

4230 4330 - Heatsink overheat protection O

4240 4340 - Overload protection O

4250 4350

[101] IPM error O

[102] ACCT overcurrent (H/W detection) O

[103] DCCT overcurrent (H/W detection) O

[104] Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault O

[105] Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor O

[106] Instantaneous overcurrent O

[107] Overcurrent O

4260 - - Heatsink overheat protection at startup O

5101 1202 - Temperature sensor

fault

Return air temperature

(TH21) O

OA processing unit inlet

temperature (TH4) O

Heat source unit

Indoor unit

BC controller

LOSSNAY

Remote controller

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 228 -

HWE09080 GB

5102 1217 - Temperature sensor

fault

Indoor unit pipe tempera-

ture (TH22) O

OA processing unit pipe

temperature (TH2) O

HIC bypass circuit outlet

temperature (TH2) O

5103 1205 00 Temperature sensor

fault

Indoor unit gas-side pipe

temperature (TH23) O

OA processing unit gas-

side pipe temperature

(TH3)

Pipe temperature at heat

exchanger outlet (TH3) O

5104 1202 - Temperature sensor

fault

OA processing unit intake

air temperature (TH1) O

Outside temperature

(TH24) O

Detectable

only by the All-

Fresh type in-

door units

Heat source unit discharge

temperature (TH4) O

5105 1204 - Temperature sensor

fault

Accumulator inlet tempera-

ture (TH5) O

5106 1216 - Temperature sensor

fault

HIC circuit outlet tempera-

ture (TH6) O

5107 1221 - Temperature sensor

fault Water inlet pipe (TH7) O

5108 1218 - Temperature sensor

fault Water outlet pipe (TH8) O

5112 1215 - Temperature sensor

fault

Component cooler heat ex-

changer outlet (THINV) O

5110 1214 01 Temperature sensor

fault

Heatsink temperature

(THHS) O

5111 - -

Temperature sensor

fault

(BC controller)

Liquid inlet temperature

(TH11) O

5112 - - Bypass outlet temperature

(TH12) O

5115 - - LEV3 outlet temperature

(TH15) O

5116 - - LEV3 inlet temperature

(TH16) O

5201 - - High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1) O

5201 1402 - High-pressure sensor fault

(Heat source unit HPS/BC controller PS1) OO

5203 - - Intermediate pressure sensor fault

(BC controller PS3) O

Error

Code

Prelimi-

nary

error

code

Error

(prelim-

inary)

detail

code

Error code definition

Searched unit

Notes

Heat source unit

Indoor unit

BC controller

LOSSNAY

Remote controller

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 229 -

HWE09080 GB

5301 4300

[115] ACCT sensor fault O

[117] ACCT sensor circuit fault O

[119] Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector O

[120] Faulty ACCT wiring O

5701 - - Loose float switch connector O

6201 - - Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory

error) O

6202 - - Remote controller board fault (clock IC error) O

6600 - - Address overlaps O OOOO

6601 - - Polarity setting error O

6602 - - Transmission processor hardware error O OOOO

6603 - - Transmission line bus busy error O OOOO

6606 - - Communication error between device and trans-

mission processors OOOOO

6607 - - No ACK error O OOOO

6608 - - No response error O OOOO

6831 - - MA controller signal reception error (No signal re-

ception) OO

6832 - - MA remote controller signal transmission error

(Synchronization error) OO

6833 - - MA remote controller signal transmission error (H/

W error) OO

6834 - - MA controller signal reception error (Start bit de-

tection error) OO

7100 - - Total capacity error O

7101 - - Capacity code setting error O O O

7102 - - Wrong number of connected units O O

7105 - - Address setting error O

7106 - - Attribute setting error O

7107 - - Port setting error O

7110 - - Connection information signal transmission/recep-

tion error O

7111 - - Remote controller sensor fault O O

7113 - - Function setting error O

7117 - - Model setting error O

7130 - - Incompatible unit combination O

Error

Code

Prelimi-

nary

error

code

Error

(prelim-

inary)

detail

code

Error code definition

Searched unit

Notes

Heat source unit

Indoor unit

BC controller

LOSSNAY

Remote controller

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 230 -

HWE09080 GB

[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller

1. Error Code

Serial communication error

2. Error definition and error detection method

Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor.

Detail code 01: Between the control board and the INV board

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Faulty wiring

Check the following wiring connections.

1) Between Control board and Fan board

2) Between Control board and INV board

(2) INV board failure and Control board failure

Replace the INV board or the Fan board when the power turns on automatically, even if the power source is reset.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

0403

CN2 CN21

CN4 CN4

CN332 CN18V

Control board FAN board

CN2 CN2

CN4 CN4

Control board INV board

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 231 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Discharge temperature fault

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) If the discharge temperature of 120 °C [248°F] or more is detected during the above operation (the first detection), the heat

source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically.

2) If the discharge temperature of 120° C [248°F] or more is detected again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the

second stop of the heat source unit described above, the mode will be changed to 3 - minute restart mode, then the heat

source unit will restart in 3 minutes.

3) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected (the third detection) within 30 minutes after the stop of the

heat source unit described above (regardless of the first or the second stop), the heat source unit will make an error stop, and

the error code "1102" will be displayed.

4) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected more than 30 minutes after the previous stop of the heat

source unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start.

5) For 30 minutes after the stop (the first stop or the second stop) of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on

the LED display.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1102

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Gas leak, gas shortage Refer to the page on refrigerant amount

evaluation.(page 177)

(2) Overload operation Check operating conditions and operation status of indoor/

heat source units.

(3) LEV failure on the indoor unit Perform a heating operation and check the operation.

Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit

BC controller LEV1,2,3

Heat source unit LEV2a,2b

BC controller SVM1,2

BC controller SVA,C

Heating: LEV on the indoor unit

Heat source unit LEV2a,2b

BC controller LEV3

BC controller SVB

BC controller SV4a - 4d

Refer to the page on troubleshooting LEV.(page 310)

(4) BC controller LEV malfunction

Cooling only : LEV3

Cooling main : LEV1,2,3

Heating only or heating

main : LEV3

(5) BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction

-> Cooling only or defrost

(6) BC controller SVA malfunction

-> Cooling only or cooling main

(7) BC controller SVB malfunction

-> Heating only or heating main

(8) Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a-4d,7a,7b

:heating only, heating main

(9) Heat source unit LEV1 actuation failure

Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation

failure

(10) Port address setting error. Confirm the port address of the indoor unit.

(11) Closed ball valve Confirm that the ball valve is fully open.

(12) Insufficient heat source water flow, heat

source water supply cutoff, dirty or clogged

water heat exchangerHeating

Check the water heat exchanger for clogging.

Check the heat source water circulation pump.

(13) Gas leak between low and high pressures

(4-way valve failure, Compressor failure, So-

lenoid valve (SV1a) failure)

Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the opera-

tion.

(14) Thermistor failure

(TH4)

Check the thermistor resistor.(page 260)

(15) Input circuit failure on the controller board

thermistor

Check the inlet air temperature on the LED monitor.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 232 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Low pressure fault

2. Error definition and error detection method

When starting the compressor from Stop Mode for the first time if low pressure reads 0.098MPa [14psi] immediately before

start-up, the operation immediately stops.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1301

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inner pressure drop due to a leakage. Refer to the section on troubleshooting the low pressure

sensor.(page 307)

(2) Low pressure sensor failure

(3) Short-circuited pressure sensor cable due to

torn outer rubber

(4) A pin on the male connector is missing.

(5) Disconnected wire

(6) Failure of the low pressure input circuit on the

controller board

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 233 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

High pressure fault 1 (Heat source unit)

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor during operation (the first detection), the heat

source stops once, turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically.

2) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor again (the second detection) within 30 min-

utes after the first stop of the heat source unit, the heat source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and

restarts after 3 minutes automatically.

3) If the pressure of 3.87MPa [561psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor (the third detection) within 30 minutes of the

second stop of the heat source unit, the heat source unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1302" will be displayed.

4) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected more than 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, the de-

tection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start.

5) For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.

6) The heat source unit makes an error stop immediately when not only the pressure sensor but also the pressure switch detects

4.15+0,-0.15 MPa [601+0,-22 psi]

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1302

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Indoor unit LEV actuation failure  Heating Perform a heating operation and check the op-

eration.

Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit

Heat source unit LEV1,2,3

BC controller LEV2a,2b

BC controller SVM1,1b,2,2b

BC controller SVA

Heating: LEV on the indoor unit

BC controller LEV3

BC controller SVM2,2b

BC controller SVB,SV4a - 4d

Refer to the page on troubleshooting for LEV

and solenoid valve.(page 310)

(2) BC controller LEV malfunction Heating only or heating main :

Indoor LEV 3

(3) BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction

->Cooling only

(4) BC controller SVA and SVC malfunction

->Cooling only or cooling main

(5) BC controller SVB malfunction ->Heating only or heating main

Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a-4d ->Cooling only or cooling

main

(6) Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failureCooling

(7) Port address setting error. Confirm the port address of the indoor unit.

(8) Refrigerant service valve actuation failure Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully

(9) Short cycle on the indoor unit side Check the indoor units for problems and correct

them, if any.

(10) Clogged filter on the indoor unit

(11) Reduced air flow due to dirty fan on the indoor unit fan

(12) Dirty heat exchanger of the indoor unit

(13) Insufficient heat source water flow Check the water heat exchanger for clogging.

Check the heat source water circulation pump.

(14) Heat source water supply cutoff

(15) Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger

Items (13) through (15) above reduce the condensing capabil-

ity of the unit, resulting in high-pressure rise during heating op-

eration.

(16) Solenoid valve (SV1a) malfunction

The by-pass valve (SV1a) can not control rise in high pressure.

Refer to the section on troubleshooting the so-

lenoid valve.(page 308)

(17) Thermistor failure (TH3, TH7) Check the thermistor resistor.(page 260)

(18) Pressure sensor failure Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the

high pressure sensor. (page 306)

(19) Failure of the thermistor input circuit and pressure sensor input

circuit on the controller board

Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the

LED monitor.

(20) Thermistor mounting problem (TH3, TH7) Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the

LED monitor.

(21) Disconnected male connector on the pressure switch (63H1) or

disconnected wire

(22) Voltage drop caused by unstable power supply voltage Check the input voltage at the power supply ter-

minal TB1.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 234 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

High pressure fault 2 (Heat source unit)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If the pressure of 0.098MPa [14psi] or lower is registered on the pressure sensor immediately before start-up, it will trigger an

abnormal stop, and error code "1302" will be displayed.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Refrigerant overcharge

2. Error definition and error detection method

An error can be detected by the discharge temperature superheat.

1) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied during operation (first detection), the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3-

minute restart mode, and starts up in three minutes.

2) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied again within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit (second

detection), the unit comes to an abnormal stop, and the error code "1500" appears.

3) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied 30 minutes or more after the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the same

sequence as Item "1 above (first detection) is followed.

4) For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1302

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inner pressure drop due to a leakage. Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high

pressure sensor.(page 306)

(2) Pressure sensor failure

(3) Shorted-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn

outer rubber

(4) A pin on the male connector on the pressure sensor

is missing or contact failure

(5) Disconnected pressure sensor cable

(6) Failure of the pressure sensor input circuit on the

controller board

1500

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Overcharged refrigerant Refer to the page on refrigerant amount

evaluation.(page 177)

(2) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the temperature and pressure readings on the sen-

sor that are displayed on the LED monitor.

(3) Faulty mounting of thermistor (TH4) Check the temperature and pressure readings on the

thermistor that are displayed on the LED monitor.

(4) Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation fail-

ureHeating

Refer to the section on troubleshooting the LEV.

(page 310)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 235 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Pump interlock error

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) This error is detected by the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4).

2) If it is detected that the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4) is open (first detection) during operation or immediately before startup,

the heat source unit stops and goes into the 10-minute restart delay mode.

3) If the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4) has remained open for continuous 10 minutes (second detection) since the first stoppage

of the heat source unit, the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2000" appears on the LED.

4) For the 10 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error, and it is indicated on the LED.

5) This error is indicated on the LED only when Dip switch SW2-8 on the control board of the heat source unit is set to OFF.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2000

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump, and check for proper operation.

(2) Broken wire Check the field wiring for proper installation and conduc-

tion.

(3) Loose connectors or contact failure Check the connectors for proper connection.

(4) Interlock signal input circuit fault on the relay board

(5) Interlock signal input circuit fault on the control

board

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 236 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Abnormal water temperature

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected (first detection) during op-

eration, the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode, and automatically restarts after three minutes.

2) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected again (second detection)

within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2134"

appears on the LED.

3) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected after 30 minutes of the first

stoppage of the heat source unit, this is considered as the first detection, and the sequence as described in section 1) above

is followed.

4) The period of 30 minutes after a stoppage of the heat source unit is considered a preliminary error, and a preliminary error

code appears on the LED display.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2134

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump, and check for proper operation.

(2) Cooling tower or heater problem Check the cooling tower and heater, and correct any prob-

lems found.

(3) Thermistor fault (TH7) Check thermistor resistance.

(4) Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control

board

Check the sensor reading on the LED.

(5) Improper installation of thermistor (TH7) Check the sensor reading on the LED.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 237 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Water heat exchanger freeze up

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) If either of the following conditions is detected (first detection) during operation, the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3-

minute restart delay mode, and automatically restarts after three minutes.

Water outlet pipe temperature (TH8) of 4°C[39ºF] or below is detected.

All of the following conditions are continuously met for one minute during Heating-all or Heating-main operation: Compres-

sor frequency < Minimum frequency + 20 AND Evaporation temperature (Te) < -2ºC[28°F] AND Accumulator inlet pipe tem-

perature (TH5)  3°C[37ºF].

2) If the conditions above (1) are met again within 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit (second detection),

the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2135" will appear on the LED.

3) If the conditions above (1) are met again after 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, it is considered the first

detection, and the sequence as described in section 1) above is followed.

4) For the 60 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error, and it is indicated on the LED.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2135

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Heat source water circulation pump fault Operate the pump, and check for proper operation.

(2) Heater problem Check the heater, and correct any problems found.

(3) Poorly maintained field-installed water pipes Identify and remove the cause of water flow reduction, such

as a clogged strainer or cavitation.

(4) Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger Check the pressure difference between the unit's inlet and

outlet.

(5) Thermistor fault (TH5, TH8) Check thermistor resistance.

(6) Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control

board

Check the sensor reading on the LED.

(7) Improper installation of thermistor (TH5, TH8) Check the sensor reading on the LED.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 238 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Drain sensor submergence (Models with a drain sensor)

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) If an immersion of the drain sensor in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and

when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being

detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.(Applicable to the units manufactured in or after October 1996)

2) If the immersion of the sensor in the water is detected four consecutive times at an hour interval, this is considered water leak-

age, and "2500" appears on the monitor.

3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped.

4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met:

One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON.

The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry.

Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature -10°C[ -18°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2500

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Drain water drainage problem

Clogged drain pump

Clogged drain piping

Backflow of drain water from other units

Check for proper drainage.

(2) Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor

Trickling of water along the lead wire

Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging

1) Check for proper lead wire installation.

2) Check for clogged filter.

(3) Failure of the relay circuit for the solenoid valve Replace the relay.

(4) Indoor unit control board failure

Drain sensor circuit failure

If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit

control board.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 239 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Drain sensor submergence (Models with a float switch)

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) If an immersion of the float switch in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and

when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being

detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.

2) If the drain pump turns on within one hour after preliminary water leakage is detected and the above-mentioned condition is

detected two consecutive times, water leakage error water leakage is detected, and "2500" appears on the monitor.

3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped.

4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met:

One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON.

The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry.

Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10°C[-18°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2500

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Drain water drainage problem

Clogged drain pump

Clogged drain piping

Backflow of drain water from other units

Check for proper drainage.

(2) Stuck float switch

Check for slime in the moving parts of the float

switch.

Check for normal operation of the float switch.

(3) Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and

turned off.

6 minutes6 minutes

seconds 15

seconds

OFF

Drain pump operation triggered by a submergence of the liquid level sensor

(except during the Cooing/Dry mode)

Drain pump

output

Float switch

input

Submergence of

the sensor

Submergence of

the sensor

Preliminary water leakage

Submergence of

the sensor

Water leakage

Sensor in the airSensor in the air

Within 1-hour periodWithin 1-hour period

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 240 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Drain pump fault (Models with a drain sensor)

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) Make the drain sensor thermistor self-heat. If the temperature rise is small, it is interpreted that the sensor is immersed in

water. This condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode.

2) If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain pump error, and

"2502" appears on the monitor.

3) This error is always detected while the drain pump is in operation.

4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit (system stoppage) are met.

"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10 °C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.

The immersion of drain sensor is detected 10 consecutive times.

The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage

of the heat source unit.

5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant

circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same re-

frigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. "2502" appears on the monitor of the units that

came to an error stop.

6) Forced stoppage of the heat source unit

Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.

7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit

Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same

refrigerant circuit.

Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller.

(Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other.

The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit)

that caused the error.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2502

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump.

(2) Drain water drainage problem

Clogged drain pump

Clogged drain piping

Check for proper drainage.

(3) Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor

Trickling of water along the lead wire

Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging

1) Check for proper lead wire installation.

2) Check for clogged filter.

(4) Indoor unit control board failure

Drain pump drive circuit failure

Drain heater output circuit failure

If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit

control board.

(5) Items (1) through (4) above and an indoor unit elec-

tronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred si-

multaneously.

Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 241 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Drain pump fault (Models with a float switch)

2. Error definition and error detection method

1) The immersion of sensor tip in water is detected by the ON/OFF signal from the float switch.

Submergence of the sensor

When it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is immersed in

water.

Sensor in the air

When it is detected that the float switch has been OFF for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is not immersed

in water.

2) If it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 3 minutes after the immersion of the sensor tip was detected, this is con-

sidered a drain pump failure, and "2502" appears on the monitor.

The total time it takes for this error to be detected is 3 minutes and 15 seconds, including the time it takes for the first im-

mersion of the sensor tip to be detected.

3) Detection of drain pump failure is performed while the unit is stopped.

4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit (system stoppage) are met.

"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10°C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.

It is detected by the float switch that the sensor tip has been immersed in water for 15 minutes or more.

The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage

of the heat source unit.

5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant

circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same re-

frigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop.

6) Forced stoppage of the heat source unit

Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.

This error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.

7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit

Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same

refrigerant circuit.

Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller.

(Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other.

The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit)

that caused the error.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2502

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump

mechanism

(2) Drain water drainage problem

Clogged drain pump

Clogged drain piping

Check for proper drainage.

(3) Stuck float switch

Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch.

Check for normal operation of the float switch.

(4) Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned

on and turned off.

(5) Indoor unit control board failure

Drain pump drive circuit failure

Float switch input circuit failure

Replace indoor unit control board.

(6) Items (1) through (5) above and an indoor unit electronic

valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultane-

ously.

Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for

leaks.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 242 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Drain sensor (Thd) fault

2. Error definition and error detection method

If the open or short circuit of the thermistor has been detected for 30 seconds, this condition is considered to be a preliminary

error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode.

If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain sensor error.(If

the short or open circuit of the thermistor is no longer detected, normal operation will be restored in 3 minutes.)

This error is detected when one of the following conditions are met.

During Cool/Dry operation

Liquid pipe temperature minus inlet temperature is equal to or smaller than - 10°C[ -18°F] (except during the defrost cycle)

When the liquid temperature thermistor or suction temperature thermistor or short or open circuited.

Drain pump is in operation.

One hour has elapsed since the drain sensor went off.

Short: 90 °C [194 °F] or above

Open: - 20 °C [-4 °F] or below

3. Cause, check method and remedy

2503

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Faulty connector (CN31) insertion. 1) Check for connector connection failure.

Reinsert the connector, restart the operation, and check for

proper operation.

(2) Broken or semi-broken thermistor wire 2) Check for a broken thermistor wire.

(3) Thermistor failure 3) Check the resistance of the thermistor.

0°C[32 °F]:6.0k

10°C[50 °F]:3.9k

20°C[68°F]:2.6k

30°C[86°F]:1.8k

40°C[104 °F]:1.3k

(4) Indoor unit control board (error detection circuit)

failure

4) Replace the indoor unit control board if the problem recurs

when the unit is operated with the No.-1 and No.-2 pins on

the drain sensor connector (CN31) being short-circuited.

If the above item checks out OK, there are no problems with

the drain sensor.

Turn off the power and turn it back on.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 243 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Water leakage

2. Cause, check method and remedy

Check that water does not leak from the pipes in such as the humidifier.

1. Error Code

Water supply cutoff

2. Cause, check method and remedy

2600

2601

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) The water tank of the humidifier is empty. Check the amount of supply water.

Check for the solenoid valve and for the connection.

(2) The solenoid valve for humidification is OFF. Check the connector.

(3) Disconnected float switch Check the connecting part.

(4) Poor operation of float switch Check for the float switch.

(5) Frozen water tank Turn off the power source of the water tank to defrost, and

turn it on again.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 244 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Open phase

2. Error definition and error detection method

An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on.

The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range.

The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

4102 (THMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Power supply problem

Open phase voltage of the power supply

Power supply voltage drop

Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1.

(2) Noise filter problem

Coil problem

Circuit board failure

Check the coil connections.

Check for coil burnout.

Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is 188 V or

above.

(3) Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is

188 V or above.

If the voltage is below 188V, check the wiring connection between

the noise filter board CN02 and control board CNAC.

Confirm that the wiring between TB23 and INV board SC-T is put

through CT3.

(4) Blown fuse Check that F01 on the control board is not blown.

->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault

of the actuator.

(5) CT3 failure Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compres-

sor has gone into operation.

(6) Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the

problem.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 245 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Open phase

2. Error definition and error detection method

An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on.

The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range.

The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

4102 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Power supply problem

Open phase voltage of the power supply

Power supply voltage drop

Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1.

(2) Noise filter problem

Coil problem

Circuit board failure

Check the coil connections.

Check for coil burnout.

Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter

board is 414V or above.

(3) Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is

190 V or above.

If the voltage is below 190, check the wiring between noise filter

CN6, noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC.

Confirm that the wiring between noise filter TB23 and INV board

SC-L3 is put through CT3.

(4) Blown fuse Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse.

->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault

of the actuator.

(5) CT3 failure Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compres-

sor has gone into operation.

(6) Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the

problem.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 246 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

2. Error definition and error detection method

Transmission power output failure

3. Cause

1) Wiring failure

2) Transmission power supply cannot output voltage because overcurrent was detected.

3) Voltage cannot be output due to transmission power supply problem.

4) Transmission voltage detection circuit failure

4. Check method and remedy

Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the

same refrigerant circuit.

2. Error definition and error detection method

Transmission power reception failure

3. Cause

One of the heat source units stopped supplying power, but no other heat source units start supplying power.

4. Check method and remedy

Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the

same refrigerant circuit.

4106

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 247 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Power supply signal sync error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Power supply signal sync error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

4115 (THMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Power supply error Check the voltage of the power supply terminal

block (TB1).

(2) Noise filter problem

Coil problem

Circuit board failure

Check the coil connections.

Check for coil burnout.

Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is

188 V or above.

(3) Faulty wiring Check fuse F01 on the control board.

(4) Wiring failure

Between noise filter board CN02 and control board

CNAC

Confirm that the voltage at the control board con-

nector CNAC is 188 V or above.

(5) Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable,

and if the trouble reappears even after the power is

switched on again, replace the control board.

4115 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Power supply error Check the voltage of the power supply terminal

block (TB1).

(2) Noise filter problem

Coil problem

Circuit board failure

Check the coil connections.

Check for coil burnout.

Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on

the noise filter board is 414V or above.

(3) Faulty wiring Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a

blown fuse.

(4) Wiring failure

Between noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control

board CNAC

Confirm that the voltage at the control board con-

nector CNAC is 190 V or above.

(5) Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable,

and if the trouble reappears even after the power is

switched on again, replace the control board.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 248 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

RPM error/Motor error

2. Error definition and error detection method

LOSSNAY

The motor keep running even if the power is OFF.

The thermal overload relay is ON. (Only for the three-phase model)

Indoor unit

If detected less than 180rpm or more than 2000rpm, the indoor unit will restart and keep running for 3 minutes.If detected

again, the display will appear.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

4116

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Board failure Replace the board.

(2) Motor malfunction Check for the motor and the solenoid switch.

(3) Solenoid switch malfunction

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 249 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If Vdc 160V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Power supply environment

Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs.

Check whether the power voltage is 188V or less across all phases.

(2) Voltage drop detected

4220

Check the voltage between the tab terminal TB-P and TB-N on the INV board while the inverter is stopped. -> Check the fol-

lowing items if it is 253V or above.

1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 160 V.

Replace the INV board if it is below 160 V.

2) Check the voltage at CN505 on the control board. ->Go to (3).

3) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.

4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections

Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL. Between the INV board and C1.

Replace 72C if no problems are found.-> Check the following items if the voltage is below 253V.

1) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.

2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.

3) Check the connection to SC-P1 and SC-P2 on the INV board.

4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. Replace the INV board if no problems are found.

(3) Control board failure

Check that 200 VAC is applied to connector CN505 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or

the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

4220 (THMU-A)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 250 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If Vdc 289V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Power supply environment

Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs.

Check whether the power voltage (Between L1 and L2, L2 and L3, and L1 and L3) is 414V or less across all phases.

(2) Voltage drop detected

4220

Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or

above, check the following items.

1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 289V.

Replace the INV board if it is below 289 V.

2) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. ->Go to (3).

3) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout.

4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections

Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL.

Replace 72C if no problems are found.

5) Check the IGBT module resistance on the INV board (Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module).

Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than

420 V, check the following items.

1) Check the coil connections and for coil burnout on the noise filter.

2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.

3) Check the connection to SC-L1 and SC-L2 on the INV board.

4) Check the in-rush current resistor value.

5) Check the 72C resistance value.

6) Check the DCL resistance value.

Replace the INV board if no problems are found.

(3) Control board failure

Check that 12VDC is applied to connector CN72 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or

the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

4220 (YHMU-A)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 251 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If Vdc 400V is detected during inverter operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Different voltage connection

Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1).

(2) INV board failure

If the problem recurs, replace the INV board.

In the case of 4220: INV board

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If Vdc 830V is detected during inverter operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Different voltage connection

Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1).

(2) INV board failure

If the problem recurs, replace the INV board.

In the case of 4220: INV board

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

1. Error Code

Logic error (Detail code 111)

2. Error definition and error detection method

H/W error

If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.

3. Cause, Check method and remedy

In the case of 4220

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

4220 (THMU-A)

4220 (YHMU-A)

4220 (THMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) External noise

(2) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 252 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Logic error (Detail code 111)

2. Error definition and error detection method

H/W error

If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.

3. Cause, Check method and remedy

In the case of 4220

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

1. Error Code

Low bus voltage at startup (Detail code 131)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When Vdc 160 V is detected just before the inverter operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Inverter main circuit failure

Same as detail code 108 of 4220 error

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

4220 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) External noise

(2) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].(page 335)

4220

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 253 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Heatsink overheat protection

2. Error definition and error detection method

When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH is detected.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

Heatsink overheat protection

2. Error definition and error detection method

When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] is detected.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

4230 (THMU-A)

Model TOH

P72, P96, P120 models 100°C [212°F]

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2) THHS failure 1) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper instal-

lation of the IGBT heatsink.)

2) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT.

->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.

4230 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2) THHS failure 1) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper instal-

lation of the IGBT heatsink.)

2) Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor.

->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 254 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Overload protection

2. Error definition and error detection method

If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > TOL" is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter

operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

Overload protection

2. Error definition and error detection method

If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > 95°C [203°F] " is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during

inverter operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

4240 (THMU-A)

Model Imax(Arms)

P72, P96, P120 models 35

Model TOL

P72, P96, P120 models 95°C [203°F]

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2) Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 188 V or above.

(3) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 328)

(4) Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation.

-> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section).

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 330)

4240 (YHMU-A)

Model Imax(Arms)

P72, P96, P120 models 19

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2) Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 414 V or above.

(3) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 333)

(4) Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation.

-> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section).

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 335)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 255 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

IPM error (Detail code 101)

2. Error definition and error detection method

IPM error signal is detected.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

IPM error (Detail code 101)

2. Error definition and error detection method

IPM error signal is detected.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

4250 (THMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter output related Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 330)

4250 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter output related Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 335)

Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no

problems are found.

(Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 256 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106)

Overcurrent (Detail code 107)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Overcurrent 123 Apeak or 42 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106)

Overcurrent (Detail code 107)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Overcurrent 94 Apeak or 22 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

4250 (THMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter output related Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 330)

Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no

problems are found.

(Refer to "Troubleshooting" for IGBT module related problems)

4250 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter output related Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 335)

Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no

problems are found.

(Refer to "Troubleshooting" for IGBT module related problems)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 257 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault (Detail code 104)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When IPM/IGBT short damage or grounding on the load side is detected just before starting the inverter.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

4250

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Grounding fault compressor Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(2) Inverter output related Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 258 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor (Detail code 105)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When a short is detected on the load side just before starting the inverter operation.

3. Cause, Check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

1. Error Code

Heatsink overheat protection at startup

2. Error definition and error detection method

The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Same as 4230 error

1. Error Code

Heatsink overheat protection at startup

2. Error definition and error detection method

The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Same as 4230 error

4250

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Short - circuited compressor Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(2) Output wiring Check for a short circuit.

4260 (THMU-A)

Model TOH

P72, P96, P120 models 100°C [212°F]

4260 (YHMU-A)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 259 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Return air temperature sensor (TH21) fault (Indoor unit)

Return air temperature sensor (TH4) fault (OA processing unit)

Pipe temperature sensor (TH22) fault (Indoor unit)

Pipe temperature sensor (TH2) fault (OA processing unit)

Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH23) fault (Indoor unit)

Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH3) fault (OA processing unit)

Intake air temperature sensor (TH1) fault (OA processing unit)

Intake air temperature sensor (TH24) fault (All-fresh (100% outdoor air) type indoor unit)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If a short or an open is detected during thermostat ON, the heat source unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes. When

the error is not restored after 3 minutes (if restored, the heat source unit runs normally), the heat source unit makes an error

stop.

Short: detectable at 90°C [194°F] or higher

Open: detectable at -40°C [-40°F] or lower

Sensor error at gas-side cannot be detected under the following conditions.

During heating operation

During cooling operation for 3 minutes after the compressor turns on.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

5101

5102

5103

5104

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Thermistor failure Check the thermistor resistor.

0°C [32°F]: 15 kohm

10°C [50°F]: 9.7 kohm

20°C [68°F] : 6.4 kohm

30°C [86°F] : 4.3 kohm

40°C [104°F] : 3.1 kohm

(2) Connector contact failure

(3) Disconnected wire or partial disconnected

thermistor wire

(4) Unattached thermistor or contact failure

(5) Indoor board (detection circuit) failure Check the connector contact.

When no fault is found, the indoor board is a failure.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 260 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH2) fault (Heat source unit)

Heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor (TH3) fault (Heat source unit)

Discharge temperature sensor (TH4) fault (Heat source unit)

Accumulator inlet temperature sensor (TH5) fault (Heat source unit)

HIC circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH6) fault (Heat source unit)

Outside temperature sensor (TH7) fault (Heat source unit)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When a short (high temperature intake) or an open (low temperature intake) of the thermistor is detected (the first detection),

the heat source unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts when the detected temperature of the therm-

istor.

When a short or an open is detected again (the second detection) after the first restart of the heat source unit, the heat source

unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts in 3 minutes when the detected temperature is within the nor-

mal range.

When a short or an open is detected again (the third detection) after the previous restart of the heat source unit, the heat

source unit makes an error stop.

When a short or an open of the thermistor is detected just before the restart of the heat source unit, the heat source unit makes

an error stop, and the error code "5102", "5103", 5104", "5105", "5106"or "5107" will appear.

During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.

A short or an open described above is not detected for 10 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost mode, or for 3

minutes after defrost mode.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

5102

5103

5104

5105

5106

5107

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Thermistor failure Check thermistor resistance.

(2) Pinched lead wire Check for pinched lead wire.

(3) Torn wire coating Check for wire coating.

(4) A pin on the male connector is missing or

contact failure

Check connector.

(5) Disconnected wire Check for wire.

(6) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control

board

Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED

monitor.

When the temperature is far different from the actual temper-

ature, replace the control board.

TH2

TH3

TH4

TH5

TH6

TH7

Open detection

-40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k )

0 C [ 32 F ] and below (698 k )

-40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k )

Short detection

70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k )

110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )

240 C [464 F ] and above (0.57 k )

70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k )

70 C [158 F ] and above (1.14 k )

110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 261 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter " under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

5110

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) INV board failure If the problem recurs when the unit is put into operation, replace

the INV board.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 262 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)

2. Error definition and error detection method

If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less during the operation, the heat source unit stops once, turns to

anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes when the detected high pressure sensor is 0.098MPa [14psi] or

more.

If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less just before the restart, the heat source unit makes an error stop,

and the error code "5201" will appear.

During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.

A error is not detected for 3 minutes after the compressor start.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

5201

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) High pressure sensor failure Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of

the high pressure sensor.

(IX [4] -1- (page 306))

(2) Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak

(3) Torn wire coating

(4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure

(5) Disconnected wire

(6) High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 263 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When the formula "output current < 2 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

P72 and P96 models

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When the formula "output current < 1.5 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the

inverter.(page 333)

1. Error Code

ACCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code 117)

2. Error definition and error detection method

When an error value is detected with the ACCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6-"Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

5301 (THMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections.

(2) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 330)

(3) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 330)

5301 (YHMU-A)

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections.

(2) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(3) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].

5301

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) INV board failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].

(2) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 264 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

1. Error Code

Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup. (Detection of

improperly mounted ACCT sensor)

3. Cause, check method and remedy

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

5301

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections.

Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12

and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-.

(3) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

5301

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections.

Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12

and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2) Inverter failure Refer to IX [4] -6-.

(3) Compressor failure Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(4) INV board failure Replace the INV board.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 265 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Loose float switch connector

2. Error definition and error detection method

Detection of the disconnected float switch (open-phase condition) during operation

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) CN4F disconnection or contact failure

Check for disconnection of the connector (CN4F) on the indoor unit control board.

1. Error Code

Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error)

2. Error definition and error detection method

This error is detected when the data cannot be read out from the built-in nonvolatile memory on the remote controller.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Remote controller failure

Replace the remote controller.

1. Error Code

Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)

2. Error definition and error detection method

This error is detected when the built-in clock on the remote controller is not properly functioning.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

(1) Remote controller failure

Replace the remote controller.

5701

6201

6202

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 266 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Address overlaps

2. Error definition and error detection method

An error in which signals from more than one indoor units with the same address are received

The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller indicate the controller that detected the error.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Polarity setting error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error detected when transmission processor cannot distinguish the polarities of the M-NET transmission line.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

6600

Cause Check method and remedy

Two or more of the following have the same address:

Heat source units, indoor units, LOSSNAY units, con-

trollers such as M-NET remote controllers.

6600 "01" appears on the remote controller

Unit #01 detected the error.

Two or more units in the system have 01 as their ad-

dress.

Find the unit that has the same address as that of the

error source.

Once the unit is found, correct the address. Then,

turn off the heat source units, indoor units, and

LOSSNAY units, keep them all turned off for at least

five minutes, and turn them back on.

6601

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) No voltage is applied to the M-NET transmission

line.

Check if power is supplied to the M-NET transmission

line and correct any problem found.

(2) M-NET transmission line is short-circuited.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 267 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Transmission processor hardware error

2. Error definition and error detection method

Although "0" was surely transmitted by the transmission processor, "1" is displayed on the transmission line.

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc-

curred.

3. Cause

1) When the wiring work of or the polarity of either the indoor or heat source transmission line is performed or is changed while

the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, the wave shape will be changed, and an error will be detected.

2) Grounding fault of the transmission line

3) When grouping the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units, the male power supply connectors on the

multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40).

4) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used in the system connected with MELANS, the male power supply

connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit.

5) Controller failure of the source of the error

6) When the transmission data is changed due to the noise on the transmission line

7) Voltage is not applied on the transmission line for centralized control (in case of grouped indoor units connected to different

heat source units or in case of the system connected with MELANS)

4. Check method and remedy

6602

Tightly reconnect the male power

supply connector to the female

power supply switch connector (CN40).

YES

Is the transmission line work

performed while the power is on?

Check the power source of the indoor unit.

198 / 264V?

Check the transmission line work is performed

and the shielded wire is treated properly.

Grounding fault or does the shielded

wire contact with the transmission line?

System ?

Faulty power source work

Improper transmission line work

Turn off the power source of heat source-

indoor units, and turn them on again.

Investigation into the

transmission line noise

Noise exist?

Controller failure of the

source of the error

*For the investigation method, follow

Investigation into the

cause of the noise

Correct the error.

System with the power supply

unit for transmission lines

Is the male power supply connector

connected to the female power supply

switch connector (CN40) on only one

of the heat source unit?

Is the male power supply connector

connected to the female power supply

switch connector (CN40) ?

Confirm that the power supply

connector on the heat source

unit is not plugged into CN40.

Confirm that the power supply

connector on the heat source

unit is not plugged into CN40.

Disconnect the male

power supply on

CN40 and connect it to CN41

Single-heat source-unit

system

Multiple-heat source-unit

system

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 268 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Transmission line bus busy error

2. Error definition and error detection method

Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted for 4-10 minutes in a row due to bus-busy

Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted to the transmission line for 4-10 minutes in a row due to noise

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc-

curred.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Communication error between device and transmission processors

2. Error definition and error detection method

Communication error between the main microcomputer on the indoor unit board and the microcomputer for transmission

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc-

curred.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

6603

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) The transmission processor cannot be transmit-

ted as the short-wavelength voltage like noise ex-

ists consecutively on the transmission line.

No noise indicates that the error source controller is a fail-

ure. If noise exists, investigate the noise.

-> No noise indicates that the error source controller is a

failure.

-> If noise exists, investigate the noise.

(2) Error source controller failure

6606

Cause Check method and remedy

(1) Data is not properly transmitted due to accidental

erroneous operation of the controller of the error

source.

Turn off the power source of the heat source and the in-

door units.(When the power source is turned off separate-

ly, the microcomputer will not be reset, and the error will

not be corrected.)

-> If the same error occurs, the error source controller is

a failure.

(2) Error source controller failure

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 269 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(1) System with one heat source unit

6607

Error

source

address

Error dis-

play

Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

Heat

source

unit (OC)

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

MA re-

mote con-

troller

(MA)

No ac-

knowl-

edgement

(ACK) at

IC trans-

mission to

(1) Contact failure of transmission line of OC or IC Turn off the power

source of the heat

source unit, and turn it

on again.

If the error is accidental,

it will run normally. If not,

check the causes (1) -

(4).

(2) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by ex-

ceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring.

Farthest:200 m [656ft] or less

Remote controller wiring:

10m [32ft] or less

(3) Erroneous sizing of transmission line (Not within the

range below). Wire diameter:

1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more

(4) Heat source unit control board failure

BC con-

troller

(BC)

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

MA re-

mote con-

troller

(MA)

No ac-

knowl-

edgement

(ACK) at

IC trans-

mission to

(1) When BC controller address is changed or modified

during operation.

Turn off the heat source-

indoor units for 5 or

more minutes, and turn

them on again.

If the error is accidental,

they will run normally. If

not, check the causes

(1) - (4).

(2) Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of BC

controller

(3) Disconnected connector of BC controller (CN02)

(4) Faulty control board of BC controller

Indoor

unit (IC)

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

MA re-

mote con-

troller

(MA)

No ac-

knowl-

edgement

(ACK) at

RC trans-

mission to

(1) When IC unit address is changed or modified during

operation.

Turn off the heat source-

indoor units for 5 or

more minutes, and turn

them on again.

If the error is accidental,

they will run normally.

If not, check the causes

(1) - (5).

(2) Faulty or disconnected IC transmission wiring

(3) Disconnected IC connector

(CN2M)

(4) Indoor unit controller failure

(5) ME remote controller failure

LOSS-

NAY

(LC)

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

MA re-

mote con-

troller

(MA)

No ac-

knowl-

edgement

(ACK) at

IC trans-

mission to

(1) The power source of LOSSNAY has been shut off. Turn off the power

source of LOSSNAY

and turn it on again.

If the error is accidental,

it will run normally.

If not, check the causes

(1) - (5).

(2) When the address of LOSSNAY is changed in the

middle of the operation

(3) Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of

LOSSNAY

(4) Disconnected connector (CN1) on LOSSNAY

(5) Controller failure of LOSSNAY

ME re-

mote

control-

ler (RC)

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

MA re-

mote con-

troller

(MA)

No ac-

knowl-

edgement

(ACK) at

IC trans-

mission to

(1) Faulty transmission wiring at IC unit side. Turn off the power

source of the heat

source unit for 5 minutes

or more, and turn it on

again.

If the error is accidental,

it will run normally.

If not, check the causes

(1) - (4).

(2) Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote

controller

(3) When the address of ME remote controller is

changed in the middle of the operation

(4) ME remote controller failure

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 270 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

Heat

source

unit

(OC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmission to

Same cause as that for system

with one heat source unit

Same remedy as that for sys-

tem with one heat source unit

BC con-

troller

(BC)

ME remote

controller

(RC)

MA remote

controller

(MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmission to

Same cause as that for system

with one heat source unit

Same remedy as that for sys-

tem with one heat source unit

Indoor

unit

(IC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at RC

transmission to

(1) Same causes as (1) - (5) for sys-

tem with one heat source unit

1) Turn off the power sources of

the heat source and indoor

units for 5 or more minutes,

and turn them on again. If the

error is accidental, the will run

normally.If not, check the

cause 2).

(2) Disconnection or short circuit of

the transmission line for the heat

source unit on the terminal block

for centralized control line con-

nection (TB7)

2) Check the causes of (1) - (5). If

the cause is found, correct it. If

no cause is found, check 3).

(3) When multiple heat source units

are connected and the power

source of one of the heat source

units has been shut off.

3) Check the LED displays for

troubleshooting on other re-

mote controllers whether an

error occurs.

(4) The male power supply connector

of the heat source unit is not con-

nected to the female power supply

switch connector (CN40).

If an error is found,

-> If an error is found, check

the check code definition, and

correct the error.

If no error is found,

-> Indoor unit board failure

(5) The male power supply connec-

tors on 2 or more heat source

units are connected to the female

power supply switch connector

(CN40) for centralized control.

If an error occurs, after the unit

runs normally once, the following

causes may be considered.

Total capacity error (7100)

Capacity code error (7101)

Error in the number of con-

nected units (7102)

Address setting error (7105)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 271 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

LOSS-

NAY

(LC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmission to

(1) Factors (1) through (5) in the

"Factors in system with one

heat source unit" (When per-

forming an interlocked opera-

tion of the LOSSNAY unit

and the indoor units that are

connected to different heat

source units.)

1) Turn off the power source of

heat source unit for 5 or more

minutes, and turn it on again. If

the error is accidental, it will

run normally.If not, check the

cause 2).

(2) Disconnection or short circuit

of the transmission line for

the heat source unit on the

terminal block for centralized

control line connection (TB7)

2) Check the causes of (1) - (5). If

the cause is found, correct it. If

no cause is found, check 3).

(3) When multiple heat source

units are connected and the

power source of one of the

heat source units has been

shut off.

3) Same cause as that for indoor

unit described in 3)

(4) The male power supply con-

nector of the heat source unit

is not connected to the fe-

male power supply switch

connector (CN40).

(5) The male power supply con-

nectors on 2 or more heat

source units are connected to

the female power supply

switch connector (CN40) for

centralized control.

If an error occurs, after the

unit runs normally once, the

following causes may be con-

sidered.

Total capacity error

(7100)

Capacity code error

(7101)

Error in the number of

connected units (7102)

Address setting error

(7105)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 272 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmission to

(1) Same causes as (1) - (4) for

system with one heat source

unit

1) Turn off the power source of

heat source unit for 5 or more

minutes, and turn it on again. If

the error is accidental, it will

run normally.If not, check the

cause 2).

(2) Disconnection or short circuit

of the transmission line for

the heat source unit on the

terminal block for centralized

control line connection (TB7)

2) Check the causes of (1) - (5). If

the cause is found, correct it. If

no cause is found, check 3).

(3) When multiple heat source

units are connected and the

power source of one of the

heat source units has been

shut off.

3) Same cause as that for indoor

unit described in 3)

(4) The male power supply con-

nector of the heat source unit

is not connected to the fe-

male power supply switch

connector (CN40).

(5) The male power supply con-

nectors on 2 or more heat

source units are connected to

the female power supply

switch connector (CN40) for

centralized control.

If the problem recurs after

normal operation is restored,

the problem is caused by one

of the following factors:

Total capacity error

(7100)

Capacity code setting

error (7101)

Error in the number of

connected units (7102)

Address setting error

(7105)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 273 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

Heat

source

unit

(OC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

System control-

ler (SC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmis-

sion to OC

Same cause as that for system with one

heat source unit

Same remedy as that for

system with one heat

source unit

BC con-

troller

(BC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

system control-

ler (SC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmis-

sion to BC

Same cause as that for system with one

heat source unit

Same remedy as that for

system with one heat

source unit

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 274 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

Indoor

unit

(IC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at RC

transmis-

sion to IC

Same as grouping of units in a system

with multiple heat source units

Same remedy as that for

grouping of units in a sys-

tem with multiple heat

source units

System control-

ler (SC)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at SC

transmis-

sion to IC

1. Error occurrence on some IC Same remedy as that for

system with one heat

source unit

(1) Same cause as that for system with one

heat source unit

2. Error occurrence on all IC in the system

with one heat source unit

1) Check the LED display

for troubleshooting on the

heat source unit.

(1) Total capacity error (7100) If an error is found,

check the check code

definition, and correct

the error.

If no error is found,

check 2).

(2) Capacity code error (7101)

(3) Error in the number of connected units

(7102)

(4) Address setting error (7105)

(5) Disconnection or short circuit of the trans-

mission line for the heat source unit on

the terminal block for centralized control

line connection (TB7)

2) Check (5) - (7) on the left.

(6) Turn off the power source of the heat

source unit

(7) Malfunction of electrical system for the

heat source unit

3. Error occurrence on all IC Check voltage of the

transmission line for cen-

tralized control.

20V or more: Check (1)

and (2) on the left.

Less than 20V: Check

(3) on the left.

(1) Same causes as (1) - (7) described in 2.

(2) The male power supply connectors on 2

or more heat source units are connected

to the female power supply switch con-

nector (CN40) for the transmission line for

centralized control.

(3) Disconnection or shutdown of the power

source of the power supply unit for trans-

mission line

(4) System controller (MELANS) malfunction

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 275 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

ME re-

mote con-

troller

(RC)

ME remote

controller (RC)

System con-

troller (SC)

MA remote

controller (MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmission to

Same as grouping of units in a sys-

tem with multiple heat source units

Same remedy as that for

grouping of units in a system

with multiple heat source

units

System con-

troller

(SC)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at

MELANS

transmission to

1. Error occurrence on some IC Same remedy as that for

system with one heat source

unit

(1) Same cause as that for system

with one heat source unit

2. Error occurrence on all IC in the

system with one heat source unit

1) Check the LED display for

troubleshooting on the heat

source unit.

(1) An error is found by the heat

source unit.

Total capacity error (7100)

Capacity code error (7101)

Error in the number of connected

units (7102)

Address setting error (7105)

 If an error is found, check

the check code definition,

and correct the error.

If no error is found, check

the cause 2).

(2) Disconnection or short circuit of the

transmission line for the heat

source unit on the terminal block

for centralized control line connec-

tion (TB7)

2) Check (2) - (4) on the left.

(3) Turn off the power source of the

heat source unit

(4) Malfunction of electrical system for

the heat source unit

3. Error occurrence on all IC Check (1) - (4) on the left.

(1) Same causes as (1) - (4) described

in 2.

(2) When the power supply unit for

transmission lines is used and the

male power supply connector is

connected to the female power

supply switch connector (CN40) for

the transmission line for central-

ized control

(3) Disconnection or shutdown of the

power source of the power supply

unit for transmission line

(4) System controller (MELANS) mal-

function

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 276 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)

6607

Error

source

address

Error display Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

System

controller

(SC)

ME remote

controller

(RC)

MA remote

controller

(MA)

No acknowl-

edgement

(ACK) at IC

transmission to

1. Error display on some displays on

ME remote controllers

Check (1) - (3) on the left.

(1) Faulty wiring of the transmission

line for ME remote controller

(2) Disconnection or contact failure of

the transmission connector for ME

remote controller

(3) ME remote controller failure

2. Error occurrence on all IC in the

system with one heat source unit

1) Check the LED display for

troubleshooting on the heat

source unit.

(1) An error is found by the heat source

unit.

Total capacity error (7100)

Capacity code error (7101)

Error in the number of connected

units (7102)

Address setting error (7105)

 If an error is found, check

the check code definition,

and correct the error.

If no error is found, check

the cause 2)

(2) Disconnection or short circuit of the

transmission line for the heat

source unit on the terminal block for

centralized control line connection

(TB7)

2) Check (2) - (4) on the left.

(3) Turn off the power source of the

heat source unit

(4) Malfunction of electrical system for

the heat source unit

3. Error display on all displays on ME

remote controllers

Check (1) - (4) on the left

(1) Same causes as (1) - (4) described

in 2.

(2) When the power supply unit for

transmission lines is used and the

male power supply connector is

connected to the female power sup-

ply switch connector (CN40) for the

transmission line for centralized

control

(3) Disconnection or shutdown of the

power source of the power supply

unit for transmission line

(4) System controller (MELANS) mal-

function

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 277 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No ACK error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans-

mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide

the response (ACK).

3. System configuration

(4) Errors that are not limited to a particular system

6607

Error

source ad-

dress

Error dis-

play

Detection

method Cause Check method and remedy

Address

which

should not

be existed

- - (1) Although the address of ME

remote controller has been

changed after the group is set

using ME remote controller,

the indoor unit is keeping the

memory of the previous ad-

dress. The same symptom will

appear for the registration with

SC.

Delete unnecessary informa-

tion of non-existing address

which some indoor units have.

Use either of the following two

methods for deletion.

(2) Although the address of

LOSSNAY has been changed

after the interlock registration

of LOSSNAY is made using

ME remote controller, the in-

door unit is keeping the mem-

ory of the previous address.

1) Address deletion by ME remote

controller

Delete unnecessary address in-

formation using the manual set-

ting function of ME remote

controller. Refer to this service

handbook "IV [2] Group Set-

tings and Interlock Settings via

the ME Remote Controller 1. (3)

Address deletion."(page 98)

2) Deletion of connection informa-

tion of the heat source unit by

the deleting switch

Note that this switch deletes

all the group information set

via ME remote controller and

all the interlock information

of LOSSNAY and the indoor

unit.

Turn off the power source of

the heat source unit, and wait

for 5 minutes.

Turn on the dip switch (SW2-

2) on the heat source unit

control board.

Turn on the power source of

the heat source unit, and wait

for 5 minutes.

Turn off the power source of

the heat source unit, and wait

for 5 minutes.

Turn off the dip switch (SW2-

2) on the heat source unit

control board.

 Turn on the power source of

the heat source unit.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 278 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

No response error

2. Error definition and error detection method

When no response command is returned although acknowledgement (ACK) is received after transmission, an error is detect-

ed.

When the data is transmitted 10 times in a row with 3 seconds interval, an error is detected on the transmission side.

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc-

curred.

3. Cause

1) The transmission line work is performed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, and the wave shape will be

changed.

2) The transmission is sent and received repeatedly due to noise.

3) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring.

Farthest:200m [656ft] or less

Remote controller wiring:12m [39ft] or less

4) The transmission line voltage/signal is decreased due to erroneous sizing of transmission line.

Wire diameter: 1.25mm2[AWG16] or more

4. Check method and remedy

1) When an error occurs during commissioning, turn off the power sources for the heat source unit, indoor unit, BC controller,

and LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes, and then turn them on again.

 When they return to normal operation, the cause of the error is the transmission line work performed with the power on.

If an error occurs again, check the cause 2).

2) Check 3) and 4) above.

If the cause is found, correct it.

 If no cause is found, check 3).

3) Check transmission wave shape/ noise on trans-mission line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/

Noise" (page 303).

Noise is the most possible cause of the error "6608".

6608

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 279 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.

No proper data has been received for 3 minutes.

3. Cause

1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit.

2) All the remote controllers are set to SUB.

3) Failure to meet wiring regulations

Wire length

Wire size

Number of remote controllers

Number of indoor units

4) The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off.

5) Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines

6) Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller

7) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4. Check method and remedy

1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.

2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.

3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.

4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.

5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).

[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)

[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.

[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference <Go to 6)>

6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/

Noise".(page 303)

7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.

The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.

If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.

If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

6831

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 280 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error)

2. Error definition and error detection method

MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.

Failure to detect opening in the transmission path and unable to send signals

Indoor unit : 3 minutes

Remote controller : 6 seconds

3. Cause

1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit

2) 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN

3) Overlapped indoor unit address

4) Noise interference on the remote controller lines

5) Failure to meet wiring regulations

Wire length

Wire size

Number of remote controllers

Number of indoor units

6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4. Check method and remedy

1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.

2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.

3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.

4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.

5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).

[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)

[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.

[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference <Go to 6)>

6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/

Noise".(page 303)

7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.

The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.

If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.

If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

6832

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 281 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

MA remote controller signal transmission error (Hardware error)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.

An error occurs when the transmitted data and the received data differ for 30 times in a row.

3. Cause

1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit

2) 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN

3) Overlapped indoor unit address

4) Noise interference on the remote controller lines

5) Failure to meet wiring regulations

Wire length

Wire size

Number of remote controllers

Number of indoor units

6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4. Check method and remedy

1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.

2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.

3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.

4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.

5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).

[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)

[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.

[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference <Go to 6)>

6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/

Noise".(page 303)

7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.

The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.

If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.

If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

6833

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 282 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error)

2. Error definition and error detection method

Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.

No proper data has been received for 2 minutes.

3. Cause

1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit.

2) All the remote controllers are set to SUB.

3) Failure to meet wiring regulations

Wire length

Wire size

Number of remote controllers

Number of indoor units

4) The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off.

5) Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines

6) Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller

7) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4. Check method and remedy

1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.

2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.

3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.

4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.

5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).

[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)

[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.

[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference <Go to 6)>

6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/

Noise".(page 303)

7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.

The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.

If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on

If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

6834

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 283 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Total capacity error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The model total of indoor units in the system with one heat source unit exceeds limitations.

3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy,

7100

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

(1) The model total of indoor units in the sys-

tem with one heat source unit exceeds the

following table.

1) Check the model total (capacity code total) of

units connected.

2) Check the model name (capacity code) of the

connected indoor unit set by the switch (SW2 on

indoor unit board).

When the model name set by the switch is differ-

ent from that of the unit connected, turn off the

power source of the heat source and the indoor

units, and change the setting of the model name

(capacity code).

(2) The model selection switches (SW5-1 - 5-

4) on the heat source unit are set incor-

rectly.

Check the setting for the model selection switch

on the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 5-

4 on the heat source unit control board).

(3) The heat source unit and the auxiliary unit

(OS) that is connected to the same system

are not properly connected.

Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are

properly connected.

P72 model

P96 model

P120 model

P144 model

P168 model

P192 model

P216 model

P240 model

P264 model

P288 model

P312 model

P336 model

P360 model

124

156

187

218

249

280

312

343

374

405

436

468

P72 model

P96 model

P120 model

P144 model

P168 model

P192 model

P216 model

P240 model

108

144

180

216

252

288

324

360

Capacity Total

Model

<PQHY>

Capacity Total

Model

<PQRY>

72 model

96 model

120 model

SW5

OFF ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

OFF OFF ON OFF

1234

Model

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 284 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Capacity code setting error

2. Error definition and error detection method

Connection of incompatible (wrong capacity code) indoor unit or heat source unit

3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

7101

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

Indoor unit

(1) The model name (capacity code) set by

the switch (SW2) is wrong.

1) Check the model name (capacity code) of the in-

door unit which has the error source address set by

the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board).

When the model name set by the switch is different

from that of the unit connected, turn off the power

source of the heat source and the indoor units, and

change the setting of the capacity code.

*The capacity of the indoor unit can be

confirmed by the self-diagnosis function

(SW1 operation) of the heat source unit.

Heat source

unit

(2) The model selection switches (SW5-1 -

5-4) on the heat source unit are set in-

correctly.

Check the setting for the model selection switch on

the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 5-4 on

the heat source unit control board).

72 model

96 model

120 model

SW5

OFF ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

OFF OFF ON OFF

1234

Model

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 285 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Wrong number of connected units

2. Error definition and error detection method

The number of connected indoor units is "0" or exceeds the allowable value.

3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

7102

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

(1) Number of indoor units connected to the heat

source terminal block (TB3) for indoor-heat source

transmission lines exceeds limitations described

below.

1) Check whether the number of units con-

nected to the heat source terminal block

(TB3) for indoor-heat source transmission

lines does not exceed the limitation. (See

(1) and (2) on the left.)

2) Check (2) - (3) on the left.

3) Check whether the transmission line for

the terminal block for centralized control

(TB7) is not connected to the terminal

block for the indoor-heat source transmis-

sion line (TB3).

4) Check the setting for the model selection

switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitch-

es SW5-7 on the heat source unit control

board).

(2) Disconnected transmission line from the heat

source unit or BC controller

(3) Short-circuited transmission line

When (2) and (3) apply, the following display will

appear.

M-NET remote controller

Nothing appears on the remote controller be-

cause it is not powered.

MA remote controller

"HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" blinks.

(4) The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the heat

source unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to ON)

(5) Heat source unit address setting error

The heat source units in the same refrigerant cir-

cuit do not have sequential address numbers.

(6) A type-G BC controller is connected to a unit P144

model or above.

Restriction on the number of units

Number of units

0 or 1

(P72 - P120 models only)

0,1 or 2

1 - 15 : P72 model

1 - 20 : P96 model

1 - 26 : P120 model

1 - 31 : P144 model

1 - 36 : P168 model

1 - 41 : P192 model

2 - 46 : P216 model

2 - 50 : P240 - P360 models

1 - 18 : P72 model

1 - 24 : P96 model

1 - 30 : P120 model

1 - 36 : P144 model

1 - 42 : P168 model

1 - 48 : P192 model

2 - 50 : P216 - P240 models

1 : P72 - P120 models

2 : P144 - P240 models

3 : P264 - P360 models(PQHY only)

Total number of indoor units

Total number of LOSSNAY

units (During auto address

start-up only)

Number of Sub BC controllers

Number of

Main BC controllers

Number of BC controllers

Total number of heat source

units

<PQHY>

<PQRY>

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 286 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Address setting error

2. Error definition and error detection method

Erroneous setting of OC unit address

Erroneous setting of BC controller address

3. Cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Attribute setting error

2. Error definition and error detection method

7105

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

BC controller

Erroneous setting of OC unit address

The address of heat source unit is not being set to

51 - 100.

The address of BC controller is not set to 51 - 100.

Check that the heat source unit and BC con-

troller addresses are set to 00 or a number be-

tween 51 and 100.

If the heat source unit address is out of the val-

id range, reset the address with the power to

the heat source unit turned off.

If the BC controller address is out of the valid

range, reset the address with the power to both

the heat source unit and BC controller turned

off.

7106

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

- A remote controller for use with indoor

units, such as the MA remote controller, is

connected to the OA processing unit whose

attribute is FU.

To operate the OA processing unit directly via a re-

mote controller for use with indoor units, such as the

MA remote controller, set the DIP SW 3-1 on the OA

processing unit to ON.

SW3-1

OFF

Interlocked operation

with the indoor unit

Operation Method

Direct operation via the

MA remote controller

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 287 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Port setting error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The port with wrong number is connected to the indoor unit.The model total connected to the port is greater than the specifi-

cation.

3. Cause, check method and remedy

7107

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

BC controller (1) Model total of indoor units per each port or per

each port merge is greater than the specification.

Before resetting the port number using

the port number setting switch or the

model using the model (capacity code)

setting switch, turn off the power of the

heat source unit, the BC controller and

the indoor unit.

(2) 4 or more indoor units are connected to the same

port.

(3) When two ports are used, the port with the smaller

number is not connected to the indoor unit.

(4) For the address of the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2),

50 is not added to the smallest indoor unit address,

which is connected to the BC controller (Sub1 or

2).

(5) In the system to which multiple BC controllers are

connected, the indoor unit address connected to

the BC controller is not set as shown below.

(i) The indoor unit address which is connected to

the BC controller (main)

(ii) The indoor unit address which is connected to

the BC controller (Sub1)

(iii) he indoor unit address which is connected to

the BC controller (Sub2)

Address setting

(i)<(ii)<(iii)

*(ii) and (iii) can be reversed.

Model totalTotal port number

Single branching

2 branches merge

Change the port No.

Is there a BC

controller (Sub)?

Are 4 or more indoor units

connected to the same port?

Is the model total of indoor

units connected to the same port

greater than the item (1)?

When two ports are used,

is the port with the smallest number

connected to the indoor unit?

YES

For the address of the BC

controller (Sub), is 50 added to

the smallest indoor unit address,

which is connected to the

BC controller (Sub)?

Is the address of the indoor

unit, which is connected to the the

BC controller (Main) ,smaller than

that of the indoor, which is

connected to the BC controller

(Sub 1 or 2)?

YES

Is the address of the indoor

unit, which is connected to the the

BC controller (Main), smaller than

that of the indoor, which is

connected to the BC controller

(Sub 1 or 2)?

YES

Change the port No.

Change the BC

controller

(Sub) address.

Change the indoor

unit address or

change the BC

controller address

YES

Change the port No.

YES

Change the set

indoor unit model

(capacity code).

Port No. setting error?

The wrong model

(capacity code) is set.

Adjust the piping

connection to the port.

Adjust the piping

connection to the port.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 288 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Connection information signal transmission/reception error

2. Error definition and error detection method

The given indoor unit is inoperable because it is not properly connected to the heat source unit in the same system.

3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Remote controller sensor fault

2. Error definition and error detection method

This error occurs when the temperature data is not sent although the remote controller sensor is specified.

3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

7110

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

(1) Power to the transmission booster is cut off. 1) Confirm that the power to the transmission

booster is not cut off by the booster being

connected to the switch on the indoor unit.

(The unit will not function properly unless the

transmission booster is turned on.)

(2) Power resetting of the transmission booster

and heat source unit.

->Reset the power to the heat source unit.

(3) Wiring failure between OC and OS 2) Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are

properly connected.

(4) Broken wire between OC and OS. 3) Check the model selection switch on the

heat source unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the

control board.).

(5) The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the

heat source unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to

ON)

7111

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Indoor unit

OA process-

ing unit

The remote controller without the temperature

sensor (the wireless remote controller or the

ME compact remote controller (mounted

type)) is used and the remote controller sen-

sor for the indoor unit is specified. (SW1-1 is

ON.)

Replace the remote controller with the one

with built-in temperature sensor.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 289 -

HWE09080 GB

1. Error Code

Function setting error

2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Model setting error

2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

1. Error Code

Incompatible unit combination

2. Error definition and error detection method

The check code will appear when the indoor units with different refrigerant systems are connected.

3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy

7113

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

(1) Wiring failure 1) Control board connector

Check the CNTYP2,4,5 connector connection.

Inverter board connector

Check the CNTYP connector connection.

(2) Disconnected connector, short cir-

cuit, contact failure

2) Check the compatibility of the circuit board, and replace

it with a correct one if necessary.

(3) Incompatibility between the control

board and inverter board (Replace-

ment of the circuit board with the

wrong one)

3) Check the model selection switch on the heat source

unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the control board.).

7117

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

(1) Wiring failure 1) Control board connector

Check the CNTYP2,4,5 connector connec-

tion.

Inverter board connection

Check the CNTYP connector connection

(2) Disconnected connector, short circuit, contact

failure

7130

Error source Cause Check method and remedy

Heat source

unit

The connected indoor unit or BC controller is

exclusively for use with R22 or R407C. An in-

compatible indoor unit or BC controller is con-

nected.

The M-NET connection adapter is connected

to the indoor unit system in a system in which

the Slim Model (A control) of units are con-

nected to the M-NET.

Check the model names of the connected in-

door unit and the BC controller.

Check whether the connecting adapter for

M-NET is not connected to the indoor unit.

(Connect the connecting adapter for M-NET

to the heat source unit.)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 290 -

HWE09080 GB

-1- Troubleshooting according to the remote controller malfunction or the external input error

In the case of MA remote controller

1. Phenomena

Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start run-

ning.(Power indicator does not appear on the screen.)

(1) Cause

1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit.

The main power of the indoor unit is not on.

The connector on the indoor unit board has come off.

The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted.

Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit.

2) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller

Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.

Short-circuited MA remote controller wiring

Incorrect wiring of the MA remote controller cables

Incorrect connection of the MA remote wiring to the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit

Wiring mixup between the MA remote controller cable and 220 - 240 VAC power supply cable

Reversed connection of the wire for the MA remote controller and the M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit

3) The number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceeds the allowable range (2 units).

4) The length or the diameter of the wire for the MA remote controller are out of specification.

5) Short circuit of the wire for the remote display output of the heat source unit or reversed polarity connection of the relay.

6) The indoor unit board failure

7) MA remote controller failure

(2) Check method and remedy

1) Measure voltages of the MA remote controller terminal (among 1 to 3).

If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12V, the remote controller is a failure.

If no voltage is applied, check the causes 1) and 3) and if the cause is found, correct it.

If no cause is found, refer to 2).

2) Remove the wire for the remote controller from the terminal block (TB13) on the MA remote controller for the indoor unit, and

check voltage among 1 to 3.

If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12 V, check the causes 2) and 4) and if the cause is found, correct it.

If no voltage is applied, check the cause 1) and if the cause is found, correct it.

If no cause is found, check the wire for the remote display output (relay polarity).

If no further cause is found, replace the indoor unit board.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 291 -

HWE09080 GB

In the case of MA remote controller

2. Phenomena

When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, the operation status briefly appears on the display, then it goes off,

and the display lights out immediately, and the unit stops.

(1) Cause

1) The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit.

2) Short circuit of the transmission line.

3) Incorrect wiring of the M-NETtransmission line on the heat source unit.

Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.

The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).

The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch con-

nector (CN40).

In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connect-

ed to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit.

4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit side.

5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or

disconnected connector.

(2) Check method and remedy

1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit.

Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit" for how to check item 1 in the flow chart

above.

YES

Same symptom for all units in a

system with one heat source

unit?

Check the

self-diagnosis LED

Check 1).

Check for

2 and 3.

Check 4.

Measure voltages of the

terminal block for transmission

line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

17 - 30V?

Check 5.

Error found?

Indoor unit board or

MA remote controller failure

Correct

the error.

Correct the error.

Is the error code 7102

displayed?

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 292 -

HWE09080 GB

In the case of MA remote controller

3. Phenomena

"HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button

is pressed. ("HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display will normally turn off 5 minutes later after the power on.)

(1) Cause

1) The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit.

2) Short-circuited transmission line

3) Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the heat source unit.

Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.

The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).

The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch con-

nector (CN40).

In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connect-

ed to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit

4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit.

5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or

disconnected connector.

6) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller

Short-circuited wire for the MA remote controller

Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller (No.2) and disconnected line to the terminal block.

Reversed daisy-chain connection between groups

Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller to the terminal block for transmission line connection (TB5) on the indoor unit

The M-NET transmission line is connected incorrectly to the terminal block (TB13) for the MA remote controller.

7) The sub/main setting of the MA remote controller is set to sub.

8) 2 or more main MA remote controllers are connected.

9) Indoor unit board failure (MA remote controller communication circuit)

10) Remote controller failure

11) Heat source unit failure (Refer to IX [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display.)(page 356)

(2) Check method and remedy

1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit.

Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit" for how to check item 1 in the flow chart

above.

YES

Check the self-diagnosis LED

Error found?

Replace the ME remote

controller with the MA

remote controller

Check for 5 and 6.

17 - 30V?

Same symptom for all units in a

system with one heat source

unit?

Check (1).

Check

2 and 3.

Check 4.

Correct

the error.

Correct

the error.

Measure voltages of the

terminal block for transmission

line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

Is the error code 7102

displayed?

Indoor unit board or

MA remote controller failure

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 293 -

HWE09080 GB

Flow chart

Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the indoor and the heat source units do not start running.

YES

Blinking?

Is " " displayed on

the remote controller?

YES

When all wires used for

grouping are disconnected, is at

least one of the LED2 on the

grouped indoor units lit?

YES

Check the wiring

Is there an indoor unit on

which LED2 is turned off?

If operated afterwards,

error 6602 or

6607 occurs.

Check the voltage between

the MA remote controller

terminals (A and B).

9-13VDC if the voltage is applied

and 0V if no voltage is applied.

Is LED1 on the indoor unit

control board lit?

(Blinks for 2 or 3 seconds

approximately every

20 seconds)

Does the number of the MA

remote controllers that are

connected to an indoor

unit exceed the allowable

range (2 units)?

Blinking?

(Turns on momentarily

approximately every

20 seconds)

MA remote controller

→To "1. Phenomenon"

MA remote controller

→To "1. Phenomenon"

MA remote controller

→To "1. Phenomenon"

To "2. Phenomenon"

MA remote controller

→To "1. Phenomenon"

To "3. Phenomenon"

MA remote controller

→To "1. Phenomenon"

Check No. 1 refrigerant

circuit.

To "2. Phenomenon"

MA remote controller

→To "1. Phenomenon"

Check the refrigerant circuit.

To "2. Phenomenon"

Check for the M-NET

transmission line.

Replace the indoor unit control board.

Connect 2 remote controllers or less.

Restore the original MA remote

controller wiring connections after repairs.

Check whether the screw

on the wire is not loose.

Is LED2 on the indoor unit

control board blinking?

When the unit is operated with

the remote controller, will "ON"

appear on the display?

Is "Centralized"

displayed?

"HO"/"PLEASE WAIT" keeps

blinking on the MA remote controller.

Is only the power source of the

indoor unit turn turned on again?

DEMAND by MELANS?

External thermo

input setting?

(SW3-3=ON)

Does an error occur when

the power is reset?

Does the unit work properly

when the wire for the MA

remote controller is

daisy-chained again?

Is LED1 on the indoor

unit control board lit?

Does the MA remote controller

work properly when it is connected

to the specified indoor unit?

Does an error occur when

the power is reset?

Running group operation with

the MA remote controller?

Is the unit grouped

with the equipment package

indoor unit?

No fault with the equipment

package indoor unit?

Does an error occur when

the power is reset?

Check that no error occurs in other indoor units.

Check the indoor unit on

which LED2 is lit.

All the indoor unit

power failure?

All the indoor unit

power failure?

Error display?

Thermo is OFF?

Is operation possible?

Short circuit of the

remote controller?

After turning the power on, check whether "HO"/

"PLEASE WAIT" is displayed on the remote controller.

After more than 20 seconds since

turning the power on, is LED2 check

of the indoor control board still

displayed?

Is the operation by MELANS

forbidden or the input from external control

equipment allowed (SWC=ON)?

Is the compulsory

thermo OFF (SWA)

switch set to "2" or "3"?

Although No.1 refrigerant circuit

is normal, No.2 or No.3

refrigerant circuit remain stopped.

Running group operation with

the MA remote controller?

Does the indoor unit make

an instantaneous stop?

Power supply voltage

AC198~264V?

YES

When no error occurs

Keep displaying

for 5 or more minutes.

Check the

power supply.

Check the wire for

the remote controller.

Replace the indoor unit control board.

Replace the MA

remote controller.

Replace the remote controller

or the indoor control board.

YES

Replace the indoor unit control

board where an error occurs.

Keep the operation.

YES

Power on

YES

Refer to the self-diagnosis list

for the displayed error code.

YES

Normal

Turns off within approximately 5 minutes.

After the main power on, start the MA remote

controller. "HO" display will appear.

YES

Normal

"Centralized" is displayed.

YES

Refer to the error code list.

YES

Normal

YES

Normal

(Is the thermo OFF

signal input?)

YES

Set the SWA to "1".

YES

Refer to the self-diagnosis list for

the displayed error code.

YES

Check the equipment

package indoor unit.

YES

Replace the remote controller or

the indoor control board.

Replace the indoor unit control board.

YES

Replace the remote controller

or the indoor control board.

Normal

(Operate the unit with

external control equipment)

YES

Replace the indoor

unit control board.

Check the

power supply.

YES

Check the voltage

between the MA remote controller

terminal blocks (TB15) (A and B).

9-13VDC if the voltage

is applied and 0V if no voltage

is applied.

Disconnected wire for

the remote controller?

Disconnected wire to

the terminal block?

Disconnected relay connector?

Are the length or the diameter

of the wire for MA remote controller

out of specification?

YES

Use the wire that meets the specification.

Replace the wire for the MA remote controller.

YES

Check for the wire for

the remote controller.

Keep the operation.

YES

Replace the indoor

unit control board.

YES

Power on

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 294 -

HWE09080 GB

In case of ME remote controller

1. Phenomena

Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running.

(Power indicator does not appear on the screen.)

(1) Cause

1) The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the indoor unit.

2) Short circuit of the transmission line.

3) Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the heat source unit.

Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.

The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).

4) Disconnected transmission line on the remote controller.

5) Remote controller failure

6) Heat source unit failure (Refer to IX [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display.)(page 356)

(2) Check method and remedy

1) Check voltage of the transmission terminal block for of the ME remote controller.

If voltage between is 17V and 30V -> ME remote controller failure

 When voltage is 17V or less -> Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power curcuit of heat source unit".

2) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 295 -

HWE09080 GB

In case of ME remote controller

2. Phenomena

When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, a temporary operation display is indicated, and the display lights out

immediately.

(1) Cause

1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit.

The main power of the indoor unit (AC208/230V) is not on.

The connector on the indoor unit board has come off.

The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted.

Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit

The indoor unit board failure

2) The heat source control board failure

As the indoor unit does not interact with the heat source unit, the heat source unit model cannot be recognized.

(2) Check method and remedy

YES

*1 *1

Check LED1 on the

indoor unit control board.

Is it lit?

When it is lit When it is off

or cannot be checked

Check for the change of LED

display by operating dip

switch SW1 for self-diagnosis.

Check voltage of the power supply

terminal on the indoor unit.

AC208/230V?

Check the fuse on

the circuit board.

Melted?

Check 200V circuit for

short circuit and ground fault

Check the connection

of the connector.

Check the main power of

the power supply wire

Turn on the

power again.

Connector contact failure

Disconnected?

heck the resistance value

of the transformer

Within specification?

Check the cause of the

disconnected transformer.

Ground fault on the circuit board

Ground fault of the sensor and the LEV

Check self-diagnosis function

of heat source unit

Changed?

Heat source unit board failure

Check self-diagnosis function of

heat source unit after the power on.

Accidental

error

Heat source unit control

board failure

Correct

the error.

*1. Refer to the parts catalog “transformer check”.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 296 -

HWE09080 GB

In case of ME remote controller

3. Phenomena

"HO" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed.

(1) Cause

Without using MELANS

1) Heat source unit address is set to "00"

2) A wrong address is set.

The address of the indoor unit that is connected to the remote controller is incorrect. (It should equal the ME remote controller

address plus 100.)

A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller. (100 must be added to the address of the indoor unit.)

3) Faulty wiring of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) of the indoor unit in the same group with the remote controller.

4) The centralized control switch (SW2-1) on the heat source unit is set to ON.

5) Disconnection or faulty wiring of indoor unit transmission line.

6) Disconnection between the terminal block for M-NET line connection (TB5) of the indoor unit and the male connector (CN2M)

7) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector

(CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control.

8) Heat source unit control board failure

9) Indoor unit control board failure

10) Remote controller failure

Interlocking control with MELANS

1) No group registration is made using MELANS. (The indoor unit and the ME remote controller are not grouped.)

2) Disconnected transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the heat source unit

3) The male power supply connector is connected to CN40 on more than one heat source unit, or the connector is connected to

CN40 on the heat source unit in the system to which a power supply unit for transmission line is connected.

Using MELANS

1) When MELANS is used, "HO" display on the remote controller will disappear when the indoor unit and the local remote con-

troller (ME remote controller) are grouped.

If "HO" does not disappear after the registration, check the causes (2) 1) - 3).

(2) Check method and remedy

YES

*1. When the heat source unit address is set to 1 - 50, the address will be forcibly set to 100.

Without using MELANS

Are all the units in the system

experiencing the same problem?

Check the address of

the heat source unit.

51 - 100?

Check the centralized centralized

switch (SW2-1) on the heat source unit.

ON?

Heat source unit control board failure

A wrong address is set

to the heat source unit.

Wrong switch setting

Change it from

ON to OFF.

A wrong address is

set to the ME

remote controller.

A wrong address is

set to the indoor unit.

Wrong wiring of the

M-NET transmission

line of the indoor unit

Disconnected

connector (CN2M)

Correct

the error.

Disconnected?

17 - 30V?

ME remote controller

- 100?

Check the address of the

indoor unit to be coupled.

Indoor unit + 100?

Check the address of the ME remote controller

on which "HO" is displayed.

Check connection between indoor M-NET

transmission terminal block (TB5) and the

male connector (CN2M)

Measure voltages of the terminal

block for M-NET transmission line

on the indoor unit.

Indoor unit board or

remote controller failure

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 297 -

HWE09080 GB

In case of ME remote controller

4. Phenomena

"88" appears on the remote controller when the address is registered or confirmed.

(1) Cause, check method and remedy

Cause Check method and remedy

An error occurs when the address is registered or con-

firmed. (common)

1. A wrong address is set to the unit to be coupled. (1) Confirm the address of unit to be coupled.

2. The transmission line of the unit to be coupled is dis-

connected or is not connected.

(2) Check the connection of transmission line.

3. Circuit board failure of the unit to be coupled (3) Check voltage of the terminal block for transmission

line of the unit to be coupled.

1) Normal if voltage is between DC17 and 30V.

4. Improper transmission line work 2) Check (4) in case other than 1).

Generates at interlocking registration between LOSS-

NAY and the indoor unit

5. The power of LOSSNAY is OFF. (4) Check for the main power of LOSSNAY.

Generates at confirmation of controllers used in the

system in which the indoor units connected to different

heat source units are grouped

6. The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed

has been cut off.

(5) Check the power supply of the heat source unit

which is coupled with the unit to be confirmed.

7. The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed

has been cut off.

(6) Check that the transmission line for centralized

control (TB7) of the heat source unit is not discon-

nected.

8. When the indoor units connected to different heat

source units are grouped without MELANS, the male

power supply connector is not connected to the fe-

male power supply switch connector (CN40) for the

transmission line for centralized control.

(7) Check voltage of the transmission line for central-

ized control.

9. The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat

source units are connected to the female power sup-

ply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line

for centralized control.

1) Normal when voltage is between 10V and 30V

10. In the system to which MELANS is connected, the

male power supply connector is connected to the fe-

male power supply switch connector (CN40) for the

transmission line for centralized control.

2) Check 8 - 11 described on the left in case other than

1).

11. Short circuit of the transmission line for centralized

control

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 298 -

HWE09080 GB

Both for MA remote controller and ME remote controller

1. Phenomena

Although cooling operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough

(1) Cause, check method and remedy

Cause Check method and remedy

1. Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.

Faulty detection of pressure sensor.

Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise due to high discharge temperature

Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise due to high pressure

Pressure drops excessively.

(1) Check pressure difference between the detected

pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual

pressure with self-diagnosis LED.

-> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check

the pressure sensor. (Refer to the page on Trouble-

shooting of Pressure Sensor).

Note: Lower inlet pressure by the low pressure sensor

than the actual pressure causes insufficient capac-

ity.

SW1 setting

(2) Check temperature difference between the evapo-

rating temperature (Te) and the target evaporating

temperature (Tem) with self-diagnosis LED.

Note: Higher Te than Tem causes insufficient capacity.

SW1 setting

Note: Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise even at higher Te than Tem due to high dis-

charge temperature and high pressure.

At high discharge temperature:

Refer to 1102.(page 231)

At high pressure:

Refer to 1302.(page 233)

2. Indoor unit LEV malfunction Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ([4] -4-

).(page 310)

Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunc-

tion (not enough opening) or protection works and

compressor frequency does not rise due to pres-

sure drop.

Refrigerant leak from LEV on the stopping unit

causes refrigerant shortage on the running unit.

High pressure sensor

Low pressure sensor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Evaporating temperature Te

Target evaporating temperature Tem

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SW1

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 299 -

HWE09080 GB

Cause Check method and remedy

3. Long piping length

The cooling capacity varies greatly depending on the

pressure loss. (When the pressure loss is large, the

cooling capacity drops.)

Check the piping length to determine if it is contrib-

uting to performance loss.

Piping pressure loss can be estimated from the

temperature difference between the indoor unit

heat exchanger outlet temperature and the satura-

tion temperature (Te) of 63LS. ->Correct the piping.

4. Piping size is not proper (thin)

5. Insufficient refrigerant amount

Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise due to high discharge temperature.

Refer to 1-1. (Compressor frequency does not rise

sufficiently.)(page 298)

Refer to the page on refrigerant amount

adjustment(page 177)

6. Clogging by foreign object Check the temperature difference between in front

of and behind the place where the foreign object is

clogging the pipe (upstream side and downstream

side). When the temperature drops significantly, the

foreign object may clog the pipe.

-> Remove the foreign object inside the pipe.

7. The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively.

(Less than 15°C [59°F] WB)

Check the inlet air temperature and for short cy-

cling. Change the environment where the indoor

unit is used.

8. Compressor failure

The amount of circulating refrigerant decreases due

to refrigerant leak in the compressor.

Check the discharge temperature to determine if

the refrigerant leaks, as it rises if there is a leak.

9. LEV3 malfunction

Sufficient liquid refrigerant is not be supplied to the

indoor unit as sufficient sub cool cannot be secured

due to LEV3 malfunction.

Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting

( [4] -4- ).(page 310)

It most likely happens when there is little difference

or no difference between TH12 and TH15.

10. TH12, TH15 and 63HS1 sensor failure or faulty wir-

ing

LEV3 is not controlled normally.

Check the thermistor.

Check wiring.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 300 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Phenomena

Although heating operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough.

(1) Cause, check method and remedy

Cause Check method and remedy

1. Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.

Faulty detection of pressure sensor.

Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise due to high discharge temperature

Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise due to high pressure.

(1) Check pressure difference between the detected

pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual

pressure with self-diagnosis LED.

-> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check

the pressure sensor.(Refer to the page on Trouble-

shooting of Pressure Sensor)

Note: Higher inlet pressure by the high pressure sensor

than the actual pressure causes insufficient capac-

ity.

SW1 setting

(2) Check the difference between the condensing tem-

perature (Tc) and the target condensing tempera-

ture (Tcm) with self-diagnosis LED.

Note: Higher Tc than Tcm causes insufficient capacity.

SW1 setting

Note: Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise even at lower Tc than Tcm due to high dis-

charge temperature and high pressure.

At high discharge temperature:

Refer to 1102.(page 231)

At high pressure:

Refer to 1302.(page 233)

High pressure sensor

Low pressure sensor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SW1

Condensing temperature Tc

Target condensing temperature Tcm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SW1

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 301 -

HWE09080 GB

Cause Check method and remedy

2. Indoor unit LEV malfunction

Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction

(not enough opening).

Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting

( [4] -4- ).(page 310)

3. Temperature reading error on the indoor unit piping

temperature sensor

If the temperature reading on the sensor is higher

than the actual temperature, it makes the subcool

seem smaller than it is, and the LEV opening de-

creases too much.

Check the thermistor.

4. Insulation failure of the refrigerant piping

5. Long piping length

Excessively long piping on the high pressure side

causes pressure loss leading to increase in the high

pressure.

Confirm that the characteristic of capacity drop due

to piping length.

-> Change the pipe

6. Piping size is not proper (thin)

7. Clogging by foreign object Check the temperature difference between the up-

stream and the downstream of the pipe section that

is blocked. Since blockage in the extended section

is difficult to locate, operate the unit in the cooling

cycle, and follow the same procedures that are

used to locate the blockage of pipe during cooling

operation.

->Remove the blockage in the pipe.

8. The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively

high.(exceeding 28°C [82°F])

Check the inlet air temperature and for short cy-

cling. Change the environment where the indoor

unit is used.

9. Insufficient refrigerant amount

Protection works and compressor frequency does

not rise due to low discharge temperature

Refrigerant recovery operation is likely to start.

Refer to 2 - 1. (Compressor frequency does not rise

sufficiently.)(page 300)

Refer to the page on refrigerant amount

adjustment.(page 177)

10. Compressor failure (same as in case of cooling) Check the discharge temperature.

11. LEV3 actuation failure

A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a

blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the

resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tenden-

cy for the discharge temperature to rise.

Refer to the page on troubleshooting the LEV ([4] -

4-).(page 310)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 302 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Phenomena

Heat source unit stops at times during operation.

(1) Cause, check method and remedy

Cause Check method and remedy

The first stop is not considered as an error, as the

unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes as a pre-

liminary error.

(1) Check the mode operated in the past by displaying

preliminary error history on LED display with SW1.

Error mode

1 Abnormal high pressure (2) Reoperate the unit to find the mode that stops the

unit by displaying preliminary error history on LED

display with SW1.

2 Abnormal discharge air temperature

3 Heatsink thermistor failure

4 Thermistor failure -> Refer to the reference page for each error mode.

*Display the indoor piping temperature table with

SW1 to check whether the freeze proof operation

runs properly, and check the temperature.

5 Pressure sensor failure

6 Over-current break

7 Refrigerant overcharge

Note1: Frost prevention tripping only under cooling mode

may be considered in addition to the above. (Freeze

protection is detected by one or all indoor units.)

Note2: Even the second stop is not considered as an error

when some specified errors occur. (eg. The third

stop is considered as an error when the thermistor

error occurs.)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 303 -

HWE09080 GB

[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise

1. M-NET transmission

Control is performed by exchanging signals between the heat source unit and the indoor unit (ME remote controller) through

M-NET transmission. Noise interference on the transmission line will interrupt the normal transmission, leading to erroneous

operation.

(1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line

(2) Wave shape check

Wave shape check

Check the wave pattern of the transmission line with an oscilloscope. The following conditions must be met.

1) Small wave pattern (noise) must not exist on the transmission signal. (Minute noise (approximately 1V) can be generated by

DC-DC converter or the inverter operation; however, such noise is not a problem when the shield of the transmission line is

grounded.)

2) The sectional voltage level of transmission signal should be as follows.

Cause Erroneous operation Error code Error code definition

Noise interference on

the transmission line

Signal is transformed and will be misjudged as the

signal of another address.

6600 Address overlap

Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to

the noise creating a new signal

6602 Transmission pro-

cessor hardware er-

ror

Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to

the noise, and will not be received normally leading

to no acknowledgement (ACK).

6607 No ACK error

Transmission cannot be performed due to the fine

noise.

6603 Transmission line

bus busy error

Transmission is successful; however, the acknowl-

edgement (ACK) or the response cannot be re-

ceived normally due to the noise.

6607

6608

No ACK error

No response error

Logic Voltage level of the transmission line

HL = 2.5V or higher

BN = 1.3V or below

[With transmission]

[Without transmission]

No fine noise allowed

No fine noise

allowed

52 52 52 52 52

Logic "0" Logic "1"

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 304 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Check method and remedy

1) Measures against noise

Check the followings when noise exists on the wave or the errors described in (1) occur.

2) Check the followings when the error "6607" occurs, or "HO" appears on the display on the remote controller.

Error code definition Remedy

Check that the wiring

work is performed ac-

cording to wiring

specifications.

1. The transmission line and

the power line are not

wired too closely.

Isolate the transmission line from the power line (5cm [1-31/32"] or

more). Do not insert them in the same conduit.

2. The transmission line is

not bundled with that for

another systems.

The transmission line must be isolated from another transmission

line.

When they are bundled, erroneous operation may be caused.

3. The specified wire is used

for the transmission line.

Use the specified transmission line.

Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote control-

ler)

Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more

(Remote controller wire: 0.3 - 1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])

4. When the transmission

line is daisy-chained on

the indoor unit terminals,

are the shields daisy-

chained on the terminals,

too?

The transmission is two-wire daisy-chained. The shielded wire

must be also daisy-chained.

When the shielded cable is not daisy-chained, the noise cannot be

reduced enough.

Check that the

grounding work is

performed according

to grounding specifi-

cations.

5. Is the shield of the indoor-

heat source transmission

cable grounded to the

earth terminal on the heat

source unit?

Connect the shield of the indoor-heat source transmission cable to

the earth terminal ( ) on the heat source unit.

If no grounding is provided, the noise on the transmission line can-

not escape leading to change of the transmission signal.

6. Check the treatment meth-

od of the shield of the

transmission line (for cen-

tralized control).

The transmission cable for centralized control is less subject to

noise interference if it is grounded to the heat source unit whose

power jumper cable was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the pow-

er supply unit.

The environment against noise varies depending on the distance

of the transmission lines, the number of the connected units, the

type of the controllers to be connected, or the environment of the

installation site. Therefore, the transmission line work for central-

ized control must be performed as follows.

(1) When no grounding is provided:

Ground the shield of the transmission cable by connecting to

the heat source unit whose power jumper connector was

moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit.

(2) When an error occurs even though one point grounding is

provided: Ground the shield on all heat source units.

Error code definition Remedy

7. The farthest distance of transmission line is

200m [656ft] or longer.

Check that the farthest distance from the heat source unit to the in-

door unit and to the remote controller is within 200m [656ft].

8. The types of transmission lines are different. Use the specified transmission line.

Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote control-

ler)

Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more

(Remote controller wire: 0.3-1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])

9. Heat source unit circuit board failure Replace the heat source unit control board or the power supply

board for the transmission line.

10. Indoor unit circuit board failure or remote con-

troller failure

Replace the indoor unit circuit board or the remote controller.

11. The MA remote controller is connected to the M-

NET transmission line.

Connect the MA remote controller to the terminal block for MA re-

mote controller (TB15).

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 305 -

HWE09080 GB

2. MA remote controller transmission

The communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is performed with current tone burst.

(1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line

If noise is generated on the transmission line, and the communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit

is interrupted for 3 minutes in a row, MA transmission error (6831) will occur.

(2) Confirmation of transmission specifications and wave pattern

A, B : No polarity

Across terminal No. 1-2

: Power supply (9V to 12VDC)

Satisfies the formula

12 msec/bit 5%

Voltage among terminals must

be between DC9 and 12 V.

TB15

MA remote controller

Transmission waveform (Across terminal No.1 - 2)

DC9~12V

Logic 1 Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 1

12msec 12msec 12msec 12msec

Indoor unit

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 306 -

HWE09080 GB

[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts

-1- High-Pressure Sensor (63HS1, PS1, PS3)

1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the high pressure sensor, and the high-pressure gauge pressure to check

for failure.

By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the high-

pressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board.

(1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1.

1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak.

2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or

be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4).

3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], go to (3).

4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2).

(2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running. (Com-

pare them by MPa [psi] unit.)

1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.098MPa [14psi], both the high pressure sensor and the control board

are normal.

2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. (perfor-

mance deterioration)

3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the high pressure sensor has a problem.

(3) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure on the self-diagnosis LED1.

1) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a

problem.

2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 4.15MPa [601psi], the control board has a problem.

(4) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors

(63HS1, PS1, PS3) to check the pressure with self-diagnosis LED1.

1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem.

2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.

2. Pressure sensor configuration

The high pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC 5V is applied between the red and the black

wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage

will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.071V per 0.098MPa [14psi].

The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side

is different from that on the control board side.

Body side Control board side

Vcc Pin 1 Pin 3

Vout Pin 2 Pin 2

GND Pin 3 Pin 1

12345678910

SW1

0.5 [73]

1.0 [145]

1.5 [218]

2.0 [290]

2.5 [363]

3.0 [435]

3.5 [508]

4.0 [580]

4.5 [653]

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

Output voltage (

Pressure (

MPa [psi])

Connector

63HS1

1 2 3

GND (Black)

Vout (White)

Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red)

Pressure 0 ~ 4.15 MPa [601psi]

Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V

0.071 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 307 -

HWE09080 GB

-2- Low-Pressure Sensor (63LS)

1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the low pressure sensor, and the low pressure gauge pressure to check

for failure.

By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the low-

pressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board.

(1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1.

1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak.

2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or

be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4).

3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], go to (3).

4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2).

(2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running.(Com-

pare them by MPa [psi] unit.)

1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.03MPa [4psi], both the low pressure sensor and the control board are

normal.

2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.03MPa [4psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. (performance

deterioration)

3) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the low pressure sensor has a problem.

(3) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1 display.

1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the low pressure sensor has a

problem.

2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem.

When the heat source temperature is 30°C [86°F] or less, the control board has a problem.

When the heat source temperature exceeds 30°C [86°F], go to (5).

(4) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors

(63LS:CN202) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1.

1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem.

2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.

(5) Remove the high pressure sensor (63HS1) from the control board, and insert it into the connector for the low pres-

sure sensor (63LS) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1.

1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem.

2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.

2. Low-pressure sensor configuration

The low pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC5V is applied between the red and the black

wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage

will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.173V per 0.098MPa [14psi].

The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side

is different from that on the control board side.

Body side Control board side

Vcc Pin 1 Pin 3

Vout Pin 2 Pin 2

GND Pin 3 Pin 1

12345678910

SW1

0.2 [29]

0.4 [58]

0.6 [87]

0.8 [116]

1.0 [145]

1.2 [174]

1.4 [203]

1.6 [232]

1.8 [261]

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

Output voltage (

Pressure (

MPa [psi])

Connector

63LS

1 2 3

GND (Black)

Vout (White)

Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red)

Pressure 0 ~ 1.7 MPa [247psi]

Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V

0.173 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 308 -

HWE09080 GB

-3- Solenoid Valve

Check whether the output signal from the control board and the operation of the solenoid valve match.

Setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below causes the ON signal of each relay to be output to the LED's.

Each LED shows whether the relays for the following parts are ON or OFF. LEDs light up when relays are on.

The circuits on some parts are closed when the relays are ON. Refer to the following instructions.

When a valve malfunctions, check if the wrong solenoid valve coil is not attached the lead wire of the coil is not disconnected, the

connector on the board is not inserted wrongly, or the wire for the connector is not disconnected.

(1) In case of 21S4a (4-way switching valve)

About this 4-way valve

When not powered:

Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and heat exchanger AND the gas ball valve (BV1) and the accumulator

to complete the circuit for the cooling cycle.

When powered:

The electricity runs between the oil separator and the gas ball valve, and between the heat exchanger and the accumulator.

This circulation is for heating.

Check the LED display and the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4-way valve to check whether the valve has no

faults and the electricity runs between where and where.Do not touch the pipe when checking the temperature, as the pipe

on the oil separator side will be hot.

Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve.

(2) In case of SV1a (Bypass valve)

This solenoid valve opens when powered (Relay ON).

1) At compressor start-up, the SV1a turns on for 4 minutes, and the operation can be checked by the self-diagnosis LED display

and the closing sound.

2) To check whether the valve is open or closed, check the change of the SV1a downstream piping temperature while the valve

is being powered.Even when the valve is closed, high-temperature refrigerant flows inside the capillary next to the valve.

(Therefore, temperature of the downstream piping will not be low with the valve closed.)

(3) SV4a - 4d, SV7a, 7b(Controls heat exchanger capacity)

1) At least one of the solenoid valves among SV4a through 4d,SV7a, and SV7b turns on. Check for proper operation on the LED

and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valve.

2) This diagram shows the flow of the high-temperature (high-pressure) gas refrigerant in the Cooling-only and Cooling-main

modes and the flow of the low-temperature gas/liquid refrigerant in the Heating-only and Heating-main modes. Refer to the

refrigerant circuit diagram. Solenoid valves turns on and off according to such factors as the capacity of the indoor units in

operation and water inlet temperature. Check the LED. Remove the SV coil, open the lid, and check the plunger. The type of

pin face wrench that is listed in the service parts list is required to perform this task.

SW1

Display

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

Upper 21S4a CH11 SV1a

Lower

Upper SV4a SV4b SV4d SV9

Lower SV7a SV7b

12345678910

SW1

12345678 9 10

SW1

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 309 -

HWE09080 GB

Refrigerant Circuit diagram <PQHY>

2 3 45

Solenoid valve block(three compartments)

1 is located behind 3

TH3

CV8

CV6a

TH8

TH7

SV7bSV7a

CV4a

CV3a

CV7a

BV2

SV4a SV4b

SV4d

Solenoid valve block

THINV

Component cooler

heat exchanger

LEVINV

ST13

Water circuit

ST2

LEV1

HIC

TH2

TH6

LEV2a

LEV2b

BV1

ST1

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 310 -

HWE09080 GB

(4) In the case of SV9 (Bypass valve)

This solenoid valve opens when energized (when the relay is on)

This valve turns on when the value of 63HS1 is greater than 3.5 MPa [507psi] during Heating-only or Heating-main operation

at the minimum frequency. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe tem-

perature on the downstream of SV9 while the unit is energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant

passes through the pipe. Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe.

-4- LEV

LEV operation

LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve), LEV2a, and LEV2b (Heat source unit: Linear expansion valve) are stepping-motor-

driven valves that operate by receiving the pulse signals from the indoor and heat source unit control boards.

(1) Indoor LEV and Heat source LEV (LEV2a, LEV2b)

The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses.

1) Indoor and heat source unit control boards and the LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve)

Solenoid valve block(three compartments)

1 is located behind 3

Refrigerant Circuit diagram <PQRY>

2 3 45

ST1

BV1

BV2

Water circuit

CV8

CV6a

TH8

TH7

SV7bSV7a

SV9

CV4a

CV2aCV3a

CV7a

CV5a

SV4a SV4b

SV4d

Solenoid valve block

THINV

Component cooler

heat exchanger

LEVINV

ST13

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 311 -

HWE09080 GB

2) Pulse signal output and valve operation

3) LEV valve closing and opening operation

Note. The connector numbers on the intermediate connector and the connector on the control board differ. Check the color of the lead wire

to judge the number.

Heat source control board

Drive circuit

LEV

DC12V

Red

Intermediate connector

Brown

Blue

Orange

Yellow

White

Red Orange

White

Brown

Blue

Yellow

4 4

Output state

Output

(phase)

number

1234

1 ON OFF OFF ON

2 ON ON OFF OFF

3 OFF ON ON OFF

4 OFF OFF ON ON

Output pulses change in the following orders when the

Valve is closed; 1 2 3 4 1

Valve is open;

4 3 2 1 4

*1. When the LEV opening angle does not change,

all the output phases will be off.

*2. When the output is open phase or remains ON,

the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates.

*When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 2200 pulses

will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position.

It must be fixed at point A.

When the valve operates smoothly, no sound from LEV or no vibration

occurs, however, when the pulses change from E to A in the chart or

the valve is locked, a big sound occurs.

*Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by

holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle.

Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate)

Valve closed

Valve open

80 - 100 pulses

Pulses

Fully open: 1400 pulses

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 312 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Heat source LEV (LEV1,LEVINV)

The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses.

1) Connections between the heat source control board and LEV

2) Pulse signal output and valve operation

3) LEV valve closing and opening operation

LEV

DC 12V

Heat source control board

Red

Brown

Blue

Orange

Yellow

White

Drive circuit

12345678

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

2 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

Output pulses change in the following orders when the

Valve is open; 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1

Valve is closed;

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8

*1. When the LEV opening angle does not change,

all the output phases will be off.

*2. When the output is open phase or remains ON,

the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates.

Output

(phase)

number

Output state

*When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 520 pulses

will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position.

It must be fixed at point A.

(Pulse signal is output for approximately 17 seconds.)

When the valve operates smoothly, there is no sound from the LEV and no

vibration occurs, but when the valve is locked, noise is generated.

*Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by

holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle.

*If liquid refrigerant flows inside the LEV, the sound may become smaller.

Fully open: 480 pulses

Pulses

Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate)

Valve closed

Valve open

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 313 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Judgment methods and possible failure mode

The specifications of the heat source unit (heat source LEV), indoor unit (indoor LEV),and BC controller (BC controller LEV)

differ.Therefore, remedies for each failure may vary. Check the remedy specified for the appropriate LEV as indicated in the

right column.

Malfunction

mode

Judgment method Remedy Target LEV

Microcomputer

driver circuit fail-

ure

Disconnect the control board connector and connect

the check LED as shown in the figure below.

resistance : 0.25W 1k

LED : DC15V 20mA or more

When the main power is turned on, the indoor unit cir-

cuit board outputs pulse signals to the indoor unit LEV

for 10 seconds, and the heat source unit circuit board

outputs pulse signals to the heat source unit LEV for 17

seconds.

If any of the LED remains lit or unlit, the drive circuit is

faulty.

When the drive circuit

has a problem, replace

the control board.

Indoor

Heat source

LEV mechanism

is locked

If the LEV is locked, the drive motor runs idle, and

makes a small clicking sound.

When the valve makes a closing and opening sound,

the valve has a problem.

Replace the LEV. Indoor

Heat source

BC controller

Disconnected or

short-circuited

LEV motor coil

Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red

-orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester.

They are normal if resistance is 150ohm 10%.

Replace the LEV coils. Indoor

Heat source

(LEV2a,LEV2b)

BC controller

Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red

-orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester.

They are normal if resistance is 46ohm 3%.

Replace the LEV coils. Heat source

(LEV1,LEVINV)

Incomple sealing

(leak from the

valve)

When checking the refrigerant leak from the indoor

LEV, run the target indoor unit in the fan mode, and the

other indoor units in the cooling mode. Then, check the

liquid temperature (TH22) with the self-diagnosis LED.

When the unit is running in the fan mode, the LEV is ful-

ly closed, and the temperature detected by the thermis-

tor is not low. If there is a leak, however, the

temperature will be low. If the temperature is extremely

low compared with the inlet temperature displayed on

the remote controller, the LEV is not properly sealed,

however, if there is a little leak, it is not necessary to re-

place the LEV when there are no effects to other parts.

If there is a large

amount of leakage, re-

place the LEV.

Indoor

BC controller

Faulty wire con-

nections in the

connector or

faulty contact

1. Check for loose pins on the connector and check

the colors of the lead wires visually

Check the continuity at

the points where an er-

ror occurs.

Indoor

Heat source

BC controller

2. Disconnect the control board's connector and

conduct a continuity check using a tester.

1 k

LED

Thermistor

(liquid piping

temperature detection)

Linear Expansion Valve

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 314 -

HWE09080 GB

(4) Heat source unit LEV (LEV1,LEVINV) coil removal procedure

1) LEV component

As shown in the figure, the heat source LEV is made in such a way that the coils and the body can be separated.

2) Removing the coils

Fasten the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then pull out the coils toward the

top.If the coils are pulled out without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent.

3) Installing the coils

Fix the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then insert the coils from the top, and

insert the coil stopper securely in the pipe on the body. Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe

will not be bent.

If the coils are pushed without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent. Hold the body when

pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent.

Coils Stopper

Lead wire

Body

Part A

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 315 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) Heat source unit LEV (LEV2a,2b) coil removal procedure

Notes on the procedure

1) Do not put undue pressure on the motor.

2) Do not use motors if dropped.

3) Do not remove the cap until immediately before the procedure.

4) Do not wipe off any molybdenum.

5) Do not remove the packing.

6) Do not apply any other than specified liquid such as screw lock agent, grease and etc.

Motor

Driver

Locknut

Valve assembling

Valve body side

Orifice

Bellows

Refrigerant Circuit

Motor

Packing Cap

Molybdenum

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 316 -

HWE09080 GB

Replacement procedure

1) Stop the air conditioner. After checking that the air conditioner is stopped, turn off the power of the heat source unit.

2) Prepare two spanners. Hold the valve body with one spanner and loosen the locknut with another one.

Turning the locknut counter-clockwise from motor side view can loosen it.

Two spanners must be used.

Do not hold the motor with one hand and loosen the locknut with only one spanner.

3) Turning the locknut several times. The locknut will come off and then the motor can be removed.

4) Prepare a motor replacement. Use only factory settings, which the head part of the driver does not come out.Use of

other than factory settings may result in malfunction and failure of valve flow rate control.

5) Keep dust, contaminants, and water out of the space between the motor and the valve body during replacement. (The

space is the mechanical section of the valve.) Do not damage the junction with tools.

After removing the motor, blow N2 gas or etc. into bellows in order to blow off water from inside.

6) Remove the cap of the motor replacement. Joint the axis of the motor and the one of the valve body with the locknut to

stick precisely. Apply screw lock agent to whole part of the screw. Do not introduce screw lock agent into the

motor.Use new motors if problems are found on the motor during the replacement.

7) After rotating the locknut 2~3 times by hands, hold the valve body with the spanner, and tighten the locknut with the

specified torque with a torque wrench. Apply the tightening torque of 15N m (150kgf cm) (administration value

15 1 N m (150 10kgf cm)).

Note that undue tightening may cause breaking a flare nut.

8) When tightening the locknut, hold the motor with hands so that undue rotary torque and load can not be applied.

9) The differences of relative position after assembling the motor and the valve body do not affect the valve control and

the switching function.

Do not relocate the motor and the valve body after tightening the locknut. Even the relative position is different from

before and after assembling.

The motor may not be fixed with clamp because of the changing of the motor configuration. However, the fixing is not

necessary due to the pipe fixing.

10) Connect the connector. Do not pull hard on the lead wire. Make sure that the connector is securely inserted into the

specified position, and check that the connector does not come off easily.

11) Turn on the indoor unit, and operate the air conditioner. Check that no problems are found.

Difference in rotational direction is acceptable.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 317 -

HWE09080 GB

-5- Troubleshooting Principal Parts of BC Controller

1. Pressure sensor

Troubleshooting flow chart for pressure sensor

Check whether the pressure sensor or the

connectors of P1 and P3 are connected,

properly

All the compressors of the heat source units to

which the BC controller is connected are stopped.

Check P1 and P3 on the self-diagnosis

LED, and check that the detected

pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less.

On the self-diagnosis monitor, measure

Heat source high-pressure 63HS1

Heat source low-pressure 63LS

BC controller pressure P1 (liquid side)

and P3 (intermediate part)

Check whether the result is

63HS1 P1 P3 63LS

START

Repair the fault.

Fix the relation between

the refrigerant piping

and the transmission line.

Fix the relation between the

refrigerant piping and the

transmission line.

Replace the pressure sensor. Replace the board.

Restore contact failure.

Check whether the contact of the pressure

sensor connector in trouble is not faulty.

OK?

Check that the difference between each

detected pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less.

OK?

Both the board and the pressure sensor are normal.

OK?

Is Pd P1 P3 Ps?

Remove the pressure sensor connector

from the board, and check the pressure.

OK?

Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the

transmission line are connected correctly between

the heat source unit and the BC controller.

OK?

Operating at the moment?

Check whether the refrigerant pipe

and the transmission line are

connected correctly between the heat

source unit and the BC controller.

OK?

YES

Note 2

Note 1

YES

Note 3

Note 4

YES

Replace the pressure sensor, which detects

less than 6MPa [870psi] pressure, with the

pressure sensor, which detects 6MPa [870psi]

or more pressure, check the pressure, and

check whether the detected pressure is

displayed normally.

10 minutes or longer after

the operation stops?

Pressure 0MPa [0psi]

6MPa [870psi] pressure

or more is displayed.

Short-circuit between connecter pins #2 and #3

on the circuit board, and check the pressure.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 318 -

HWE09080 GB

1) BC controller: Phenomena when the pressure sensor is connected wrongly (reverse connection of P1 and P3) to the board.

2) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Heat source control board SW1).

3) Check whether CNP1 (liquid side) connector on the BC controller control board and the connector CNP2 (intermediate part)

are not disconnected or not loose.

4) Check the pressure value on the self-diagnosis switch (same as note 2) with the connector of the applied pressure sensor is

disconnected from the board.

Cooling-only Heating only

Heating main

Non-cooling

Indoor heating SC small

Heating indoor Thermo ON

Especially noise is large.

Indoor heating SC small

Heating indoor Thermo ON

Especially noise is large.

Cooling-main

Symptoms

SC11 large

SC16 small

PHM large

SC11 large

SC16 small

PHM large

Non-cooling Normal SC11 large

SC16 small

PHM large

Measurement data SW1 setting value

Heat source high pressure

Heat source low pressure

BC controller pressure

(liquid side)

BC controller pressure

(intermediate part)

Symbol

63HS1

PS1

63LS

PS3

12345678910

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 319 -

HWE09080 GB

2. Temperature sensor

Pull out the thermistor connector in

trouble from the board.

Measure the temperature of the thermistor

in trouble. (actual measurement value)

Check the thermistor resistor.

Compare the temperature corresponding to the

resistance measured by the thermistor and the

temperature measured by a commercially

available thermometer, and check whether

there is no difference between them.

Insert the connector of the thermistor

in trouble into the board, check the sensor

inlet temperature on the LED monitor,

and check the temperature difference.

START

Normal

Troubleshooting instructions for thermistor

Replace the thermistor

Temperature difference

Check for contact failure.

Replace the control board.

Note 1

Note 2

Note 3

YES

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 320 -

HWE09080 GB

1) For the connectors on the board, TH11 and TH12 are connected to CN10, and TH15 and TH16 are connected to CN11. Dis-

connect the connector in trouble, and check the sensor of each number.

Pull out the sensor connector from the I/O board, Do not pull the sensor by holding the lead wire.

Measure the resistance with such as a tester.

Compare the measured value with that of shown in the figure below. When the result is 10%, it is normal.

3) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Heat source control board SW1).

12345678910

TH12

TH15

TH12

TH15

Liquid inlet temperature

Bypass outlet temperature

TH11

TH12

Bypass inlet temperature

TH15

TH16

Measurement data SW1 setting value Symbol

G, GA

(Standard / main)

GB, HB

(Sub 1)

GB, HB

(Sub 2)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 321 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Troubleshooting flow chart for LEV Solenoid valve

(1) LEV

Check whether the electric expansion

valve and the solenoid valve connector

are not disconnected or not loose.

Run the cooling operation or the heating

operation in the system in trouble

(only in one system).

No cooling capacity

No heating capacity

Repair the fault.

Fault is found.

Note 1

Check that LEV1 is fully open. Check that LEV1 is fully open.

Check that SVA and SVC are ON.

Check that SVA and SVC are OFF.

Cooling or heating operation

Note 2

Heating operation

Check whether LEV3 is controlling

superheat.

Check LEV1.

Check LEV3.

Check SVA and SVC.

Check SVB.

LEV1 is fully open.

Check whether LEV 3 is controlled by

the value of the differential pressure.

LEV1 is fully open.

Note 3

Note 2

Note 3

YES

Cooling operation

Superheat control OK Differential pressure OK

YES

Check that SVB is OFF. Check that SVB is ON.

SVA, SVC ON SVA, SVC OFF

YES

Completed

SVB OFF SVB ON

YES

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 322 -

HWE09080 GB

1) BC controller: Phenomena when LEV is connected wrongly (reverse connection of LEV1 and LEV3) to the board.

2) Check method of fully open state or fully closed state of LEV

Check LEV opening (pulse) on the self-diagnosis LED (Heat source control board SW1).

Full open: 2000 pulses

Fully closed: 110 pulses (In the case of heating-only mode, however, the pulse may become 110 or more.)

When LEV is fully open, measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of LEV, and make sure that there

is no temperature difference.

When LEV is fully closed, check that there is no refrigerant flowing sound.

3) Refer to the chart below to judge LEV opening controlled by the values of the differential pressure and of the superheat.

(BC controller LEV basic operation characteristic)

Phenomena

Cooling-only Cooling-main Heating only Heating main

Non-cooling

SH12 small, SC11 small

SH16 small, branch pipe

SC small

BC controller sound

Non-cooling and non-heating

SH12 small, SC11 small

SH16 large, but branch pipe

SC small

BC controller sound

PHM large

Indoor heating SC small

PHM large

Non-cooling

Indoor heating SC small

PHM large

Part Malfunction

mode

Operation

mode Content Standards of judgment on

unit stable operation

G, GA

type

LEV1

Inclined to

close Heating only

Heating-

main

Cooling-

main

Difference between high

pressure (P1) and interme-

diate pressure (P3) is large.

0.3 to 0.4MPa

[44 to 58psi]

Inclined to

open

Difference between high

pressure (P1) and interme-

diate pressure (P3) is

small.

LEV3

Inclined to

Cooling-only

Cooling-

main

SH12 is large. SH12 < 20°C [36°F]

Heating only

Heating-

main

Difference between high

pressure (P1) and interme-

diate pressure (P3) is

small.

0.3 to 0.4MPa

[44 to 58psi]

Inclined to

open

Cooling-only

Cooling-

main

SC16 and SH12 are small. SC16 > 3°C [5.4°F]

SH12 > 3°C [5.4°F]

Heating only

Heating-

main

Difference between high

pressure (P1) and interme-

diate pressure (P3) is large.

0.3 to 0.4MPa

[44 to 58psi]

GB, HB type LEV3

Inclined to

Cooling-only

Cooling-

main

SH22 is large. SH22 < 20°C [36°F]

Inclined to

open

Cooling-only

Cooling-

main

SH22 is small. SH22 > 3°C [5.4°F]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 323 -

HWE09080 GB

Self-diagnosis LED

12345678910

LEV1 opening

LEV3 opening

BC controller bypass

outlet superheat

BC controller intermediate

part subcool

SH12

LEV2 opening

LEV3 opening

SC16

BC controller liquid-side subcool

SC11

Measurement data SW1 setting value Symbol

G, GA

(Standard

/ main)

GB, HB

(Sub 1)

GB, HB

(Sub 2)

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 324 -

HWE09080 GB

Troubleshooting flow chart for solenoid valve body

LEV

LED10 k

Start

Brown

Red

Blue

Orange

Yellow

White

Brown

Red

Blue

Orange

Yellow

White

OK? NO

YES

OK? NO

YES

Repair the fault.

OK? NO

YES

OK? NO

YES

Replace LEV.

OK? NO

YES

Replace LEV.

OK? NO

YES

Replace the board in trouble.

Completed

Check for pins not fully inserted on the connector

and check the colors of the lead wires visually.

Intermediate connector

Control board

Check that no refrigerant

leaks from LEV.

Pull out the connector from the board, and check

that the electricity runs with a tester.

The wiring side of CN05 and 07: Among 1, 3 and 5,

and among 2, 4 and 6

Check the resistance between each coil

with a tester (between red and white,

red and orange, brown and yellow and

brown and blue), and check that the

resistance is 150 within 10%.

Connect the LED for check,

which is as shown in the

right figure, to the board

connector, and check that

the LED keeps lighting for

10 seconds.

When LEV is fully closed : tick sound

When LEV is fully open : no sound

Check the above.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 325 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Solenoid valve (SVA, SVB, SVC)

Stop the operation of the applied

BC remote controller system.

Faulty judgment of solenoid valve

Solenoid valve failure

Replace the control board.

Replace the solenoid valve coil.

Repair the fault.

Replace the control board.

Stop the operation

Note 1

Check whether the wire to the

solenoid valve is not connected

wrongly, or the connector is not loose.

No fault

Check the operation sound of the solenoid

valve to be magnetized at the time of

turning on the remote controller.

Makes a tick sound.

Check the relay output with the

self-diagnosis LED, and check

whether the operation corresponds

with the operation mode.

Corresponds

Measure the temperature at the upstream

and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve.

When the solenoid valve is ON : There is no temperature difference.

When the solenoid valve is OFF : There is a temperature difference.

Remove the solenoid valve coil, and

check that there is a suction force.

There is a suction force.

Note 2

Measure the temperature at the upstream

and downstream pipes of the solenoid

valve, and compare them.

There is no temperature difference. : OK

There is a temperature difference. : NO

Run the cooling or heating operation

of the refrigerant system of the

solenoid valve in trouble.

Stop the unit with the remote controller.

Remove the solenoid valve connector, and

check that the electricity runs through the

solenoid valve coil.

The electricity runs.

Output 230V

NO NO

YES

Turn on the remote controller with the

connector of the solenoid valve in trouble

disconnected, and check that the control

board outputs 230V.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 326 -

HWE09080 GB

Check whether the BC board output signal corresponds with the solenoid valve operation correspond.

1) SVA, SVB, SVC

SVA, SVB, and SVC turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode.

SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, SVM2b

SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, and SVM2b turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode.

2) SVA, SVB, SVC

Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and of SVA.

Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and of SVB.

Mode

Cooling Heating Stopped Defrost Fan

Port

SVA ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

SVB OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SVC ON OFF OFF OFF ON

Operation

mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Defrost Stopped

SVM1,SVM1b ON

Pressure dif-

ferential con-

trol OFF or

OFF OFF ON OFF

SVM2,

SVM2b OFF OFF

Pressure dif-

ferential con-

trol OFF or

Pressure dif-

ferential con-

trol OFF or

OFF OFF

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 327 -

HWE09080 GB

4. BC controller transformer

* Before measuring the resistance, pull out the connector.

Normal Abnormal

CNTR(1)-(3) about 58 ohm.

Open-phase or shorting

CN03(1)-(3) about 1.6 ohm.

CNTR CN03

BC controller control board

Red White Red Red

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 328 -

HWE09080 GB

-6- Inverter (THMU-A)

Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the

compressor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrent is detected, protecting the inverter

from damage.)

Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective.

If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices.

(1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies

1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is

turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Before inspecting the inverter-related items, turn off the main power, wait for 5 to 10

minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor has dropped to a sufficiently low level.

2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some

of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors,

and Faston terminals.

3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned

on.

4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.

5) When the IPM, diode stack, or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these

parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure.

6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence.

Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 329 -

HWE09080 GB

Error display/failure condition Measure/inspection item

[1] Inverter related errors

4250, 4220, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403

Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor

Display on the Heat source Unit Board.

Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in ac-

cordance with IX. [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Con-

troller.

[2] Main power breaker trip <1> Check the breaker capacity.

<2> Check whether the electrical system is short-circuited or ground-

faulted.

<3> If items cause is not <1>or <2> are not the causes of the problem,

see (3)-[1].

[3] Main power earth leakage breaker trip <1> Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity cur-

rent.

<2> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter

<3> If the cause is not <1>or <2>, see (3)-[1]

[4] Only the compressor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) -

[4] if the compressor is in operation.

[5] The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnor-

mal sound.

See (2)-[4].

[6] Noise is picked up by the peripheral device <1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not

run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit.

<2> Check that the inverter output wiring is not in close contact with the

power supply wiring and the transmission lines.

<3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when

it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed prop-

erly on the shielded wire.

<4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter

<5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the fac-

tory for details of the service part settings.)

<6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other

electric appliances.

<7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output

can be considered. See (2)-[4].

*Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[7] Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.) <1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly.

<2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when

it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed prop-

erly on the shielded wire.

<3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connec-

tion wiring does not run close to another power supply system or

does not run through the same conduit pipe.

* Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 330 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Inverter output related troubles

Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy

[1]

Check the INV

board error

detection cir-

cuit.

(1) Disconnect the invert-

er output wire from

the terminals of the

INV board (SC-U,

SC-V, SC-W).

1) IPM/overcurrent breaker trip

Error code: 4250

Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105, 106,

and 107

Replace the INV board.

(2) Put the heat source

unit into operation.

2) Logic error

Error code: 4220

Detail code: No. 111

Replace the INV board.

3) ACCT sensor circuit failure

Error code: 5301

Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4) IPM open

Error code: 5301

Detail code: No.119

Normal

[2]

Check for

compressor

ground fault or

coil error.

Disconnect the compres-

sor wiring, and check the

compressor Meg, and coil

resistance.

1) Compressor Meg failure

Error if less than 1 Mohm.

When no liquid refrigerant in the

compressor

Check that no liquid refrigerant is

present in the compressor, and re-

place the compressor.

2) Compressor coil resistance failure

Coil resistance value of 0.3 ohm

(20°C [68°F])

Replace the compressor.

[3]

Check wheth-

er the inverter

is damaged.

(No load)

(1) Disconnect the invert-

er output wire from

the terminals of the

INV board (SC-U,

SC-V, SC-W).

1) Inverter-related problems are de-

tected.

Connect the short-circuit connec-

tor to CN6, and go to section [1].

(2) Disconnect the short-

circuit connector from

CN6 on the INV

board.

2) Inverter voltage is not output. Replace the INV board.

(3) Put the heat source

unit into operation.

Check the inverter

output voltage after

the inverter output

frequency has stabi-

lized.

3) There is an voltage imbalance be-

tween the wires.

Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

4) There is no voltage imbalance be-

tween the wires.

Normal

*Reconnect the short-circuit con-

nector to CN6 after checking the

voltage.

[4]

Check wheth-

er the inverter

is damaged.

(During com-

pressor oper-

ation)

Put the heat source unit

into operation.

Check the inverter output

voltage after the inverter

output frequency has sta-

bilized.

1) There is an voltage imbalance be-

tween the wires.

Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

If the problem persists, replace the

INV board.

If the problem persists after replac-

ing the above parts, go to section

[2].

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 331 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped.

(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped

The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended

period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please

use the following procedure to take care of this.

Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block.

If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wires still disconnected.

Leave the power on for at least 12 hours.

Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater.

Earth leakage current measurement method

For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter

functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure.

Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION

When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block.

Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy

[1] Perform Meg check between the

terminals on the power terminal

block TB1.

Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure Check each part in the main inverter

circuit.

*Refer to "Simple checking procedures

for individual components of main in-

verter circuit".

IGBT module

IPM

Rush current protection resistor

Electromagnetic relay

DC reactor

[2] Turn on the power again and

check again.

1) Main power breaker trip

2) No remote control display

[3] Turn on the heat source unit and

check that it operates normally.

1) Operates normally without tripping

the main breaker.

a) The wiring may have been short-

circuited. Search for the wire that

short-circuited, and repair it.

b) If item a) above is not the cause of

the problem, the compressor may

have a problem.

2) Main power breaker trip A compressor ground fault can be con-

sidered. Go to (2)-[2].

Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy

[1] Check the earth leakage breaker

capacity and the sensitivity cur-

rent.

Use of a non-specified earth

leakage breaker

Replace with a regulation earth leakage

breaker.

[2] Check the resistance at the power

supply terminal block with a meg-

ger.

Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring.

*Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures

for individual components of main inverter

circuit".

IGBT module

Rush current protection resistor

Electromagnetic relay

DC reactor

[3] Disconnect the compressor wir-

ings and check the resistance of

the compressor with a megger.

Failure compressor if the insu-

lating resistance value is not in

specified range.

Failure when the insulating re-

sistance value is 1 Mohm or

less.

Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in

the compressor. If there is none, replace

the compressor.

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 332 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit

Before checking, turn the power off and remove the parts to be checked from the control box.

Part name Judgment method

Rush current

protection resis-

tor

R1(R2)

Measure the resistance between terminals: 22 ohm 10%

Electromagnetic

relay

72C This electromagnetic relay is rated at 200VAC and is driven by a coil. The resistance between the

coils in row A cannot be measured with a tester.Check only for shorting.

DC reactor DCL Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm)

Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis:

Check point

Row A

Not to be short-circuited

Row B to Row E

Installation direction

Test button

Row

A2 44 34 24 14

43 33 23 13

Coil

Contact

Checking criteria

With the test button

turned off :

With the test button

turned on : 0

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 333 -

HWE09080 GB

-6- Inverter (YHMU-A)

Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective.

Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective.

If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices.

(1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies

1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is

turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Turn off the unit, leave it turned off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the voltage

across FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board or the terminals at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor is 20V or below

before checking inside the control box.

(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turn off.)

2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some

of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors,

and Faston terminals.

3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned

on.

4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.

5) When the IPM or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off

any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure.

6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence.

Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 334 -

HWE09080 GB

Error display/failure condition Measure/inspection item

[1] Inverter related errors

4250, 4220, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403

Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor

Display on the Heat source Unit Board.

Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in ac-

cordance with IX. [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Con-

troller.

[2] Main power breaker trip Refer to "(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is

tripped".

[3] Main power earth leakage breaker trip Refer to "(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage

breaker is tripped".

[4] Only the compressor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) -

[4] if the compressor is in operation.

[5] The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnor-

mal sound.

See (2)-[4].

[6] Noise is picked up by the peripheral device <1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not

run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit.

<2> Check if the inverter output wiring is not running parallel to the

power supply wiring and the transmission lines.

<3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when

it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed prop-

erly on the shielded wire.

<4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter

<5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the fac-

tory for details of the service part settings.)

<6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other

electric appliances.

<7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output

can be considered. See (2)-[4].

*Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[7] Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.) <1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly.

<2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when

it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed prop-

erly on the shielded wire.

<3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connec-

tion wiring does not run close to another power supply system or

does not run through the same conduit pipe.

* Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 335 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Inverter output related troubles

Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy

[1]

Check the

INV board er-

ror detection

circuit.

(1) Disconnect the invert-

er output wire from

the terminals of the

INV board (SC-U,

SC-V, SC-W).

1) Overcurrent error

Error code: 4250

Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105,

106, and 107

Replace the INV board.

(2) Put the heat source

unit into operation.

2) Logic error

Error code: 4220

Detail code: No. 111

Replace the INV board.

3) ACCT sensor circuit failure

Error code: 5301

Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4) IPM open

Error code: 5301

Detail code: No.119

Normal

[2]

Check for

compressor

ground fault

or coil error.

Disconnect the compressor

wiring, and check the com-

pressor Meg, and coil resis-

tance.

1) Compressor Meg failure

Error if less than 1 Mohm.

Check that there is no liquid re-

frigerant in the compressor.

If there is none, replace the com-

pressor.

2) Compressor coil resistance failure

Coil resistance value of 1 ohm

(20°C [68°F])

Replace the compressor.

[3]

Check wheth-

er the inverter

is damaged.

(No load)

(1) Disconnect the invert-

er output wire from

the terminals of the

INV board (SC-U,

SC-V, SC-W).

1) Inverter-related problems are de-

tected.

Connect the short-circuit connec-

tor to CN6, and go to section [1].

(2) Disconnect the short-

circuit connector from

CN6 on the INV

board.

2) Inverter voltage is not output at the

terminals (SC-U, SC-V, and SC-W)

Replace the INV board.

(3) Put the heat source

unit into operation.

Check the inverter

output voltage after

the inverter output

frequency has stabi-

lized.

3) There is an voltage imbalance be-

tween the wires.

Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

4) There is no voltage imbalance be-

tween the wires.

Normal

*Reconnect the short-circuit con-

nector to CN6 after checking the

voltage.

[4]

Check wheth-

er the inverter

is damaged.

(During com-

pressor oper-

ation)

Put the heat source unit into

operation.

Check the inverter output

voltage after the inverter

output frequency has stabi-

lized.

1) There is an voltage imbalance be-

tween the wires.

Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 336 -

HWE09080 GB

(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped

(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped

The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended

period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please

use the following procedure to take care of this.

Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block.

If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wires still disconnected.

Leave the power on for at least 12 hours.

Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater.

Earth leakage current measurement method

For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter

functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure.

Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION

When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block.

Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy

[1] Check the breaker capacity. Use of a non-specified break-

Replace it with a specified breaker.

[2] Perform Meg check between the

terminals on the power terminal

block TB1.

Zero to several ohm, or Meg

failure

Check each part and wiring.

*Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures

for individual components of main inverter

circuit".

IGBT module

Rush current protection resistor

Electromagnetic relay

DC reactor

[3] Turn on the power again and

check again.

1) Main power breaker trip

2) No remote control display

[4] Turn on the heat source unit and

check that it operates normally.

1) Operates normally without

tripping the main breaker.

a) The wiring may have been short-circuit-

ed. Search for the wire that short-circuit-

ed, and repair it.

b) If item a) above is not the cause of the

problem, refer to (2)-[1]-[6].

2) Main power breaker trip

Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy

[1] Check the earth leakage breaker

capacity and the sensitivity cur-

rent.

Use of a non-specified earth

leakage breaker

Replace with a regulation earth leakage

breaker.

[2] Check the resistance at the power

supply terminal block with a meg-

ger.

Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring.

*Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures

for individual components of main inverter

circuit".

IGBT module

Rush current protection resistor

Electromagnetic relay

DC reactor

[3] Disconnect the compressor wir-

ings and check the resistance of

the compressor with a megger.

Failure compressor if the insu-

lating resistance value is not in

specified range.

Failure when the insulating re-

sistance value is 1 Mohm or

less.

Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in

the compressor. If there is none, replace

the compressor.

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 337 -

HWE09080 GB

(5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit

Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that

the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.

(6) Troubleshooting for IGBT Module

Measure the resistances between each pair of terminals on the IGBT with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting.

The terminals on the INV board are used for the measurement.

1) Notes on measurement

Check the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.)

Check that the resistance is not open ( ohm) or not shorted (to 0 ohm).

The values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed.

The result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed.

Disconnect all the wiring connected the INV board, and make the measurement.

2) Tester restriction

Use the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater

Use the dry-battery-powered tester.

(The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied volt-

age is low.)

Use a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured.

Part name Judgment method

IGBT module See "Troubleshooting for IGBT Module ". ( 9 [4] - 6 - (6) )

Rush current pro-

tection resistor

R1, R5

Measure the resistance between terminals R1 and R5: 22 ohm 10%

Electromagnetic

relay

72C This electromagnetic relay is rated at DC12V and is driven by a coil.

Check the resistance between terminals

DC reactor DCL Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm)

Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis:

234

Upper

Installation

direction

Check point Checking criteria( )

Between Terminals 5 and 6

Between Terminals 1 and 2

Between Terminals 3 and 4

Not to be short-circuited

(Center value 75 ohm)

Coil

Contact

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 338 -

HWE09080 GB

INV board external diagram

Judgment value (reference)

Black

SC-P1 FT-N SC-L1 SC-L2 SC-L3

Red

SC-P1 - - 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm

FT-N - -

SC-L1 5 - 200 ohm - - -

SC-L2 5 - 200 ohm - - -

SC-L3 5 - 200 ohm - - -

Black

SC-P2 FT-N SC-U SC-V SC-W

Red

SC-P2 - - 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm 5 - 200 ohm

FT-N - -

SC-U 5 - 200 ohm - - -

SC-V 5 - 200 ohm - - -

SC-W 5 - 200 ohm - - -

SC-U

SC-W

SC-V

FT-N

SC-P1SC-P2

SC-L1

SC-L2

SC-L3

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 339 -

HWE09080 GB

-7- Control Circuit (THMU-A)

(1) Control power source function block

Heat source unit

Power source system (AC 208 / 230 V)

Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.

(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

A, B

M-NET

transmission line

(Non-polar 2 wire)

AC 208 / 230 V

AC Power source

To next unit

(Indoor unit)

MA remote controller wiring

(Non-polar 2 wire)

DC 17 ~ 30 V

DC 9 ~ 12 V

M-NET remote

controller

MA remote

controller

Indoor unit

TB2

TB15

Terminal block for

power source

TB5

Terminal block

for MA remote

controller

Terminal block

for transmission

line connection

DC 17 ~ 30 V

AC 208 / 230 V

Terminal block for

power source

TB1

Noise filter

Fuse

LEV

Surge protection

INV board

Control board

63H1

72C DCL

DC / DC converter

Detection circuit for

the power supply to

the transmission line

M-NET board

DC / DC

converter

Microcomputer

5 V Power supply

18 V Power supply

12V Power supply

30 V Power supply

Relay drive circuit

Relay

5 V Power supply

17V Power supply

Smoothing capacitor

Inverter

Inverter drive

circuit

Inverter reset

circuit

Rectifier

Compressor

Smoothing capacitor

Relay, LEV

Drive circuit

72C

Solenoid valve

4-way valve

CH11

CN40

Terminal block for

transmission line

for centralized control

(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

TB7

Indoor/heat source

transmission block

(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

TB3

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 340 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the

CNS2 on the control board.

Check the wiring between the control board and power

supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),

and check for proper connection of connectors.

Check the wiring between the control board and power

supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),

and check for proper connection of connectors.

Is there a wiring

error or a connector

disconnection?

Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins

of the CNIT on the control board.

Is the voltage

measurement between

4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

Is there a connector

disconnection?

Fix the connector disconnection.

Replace the M-NET board

Replace the inrush current

limiting resistor.

Replace the INV board.

Check the wiring between the noise filter and the

INV board as well as screw tightness, and fix any

problems found.

Replace the noise filter.

Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power

supply problems found.

Check the inrush current resistance (R1).

Fix the wiring and connector

disconnection.

Check for shorted transmission

line for centralized control.

Replace the control board.

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the

CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of

the CNDC on the INV board.

Check the voltage between SC-P1 and TB-N on the INV board.

Check the voltages among SC-R, SC-S, and

SC-T on the INV board.

Check the voltages among TB21, TB22, and

TB23 on the noise filter.

Check the voltage at the power supply terminal block TB1.

DC24

30V

DC24

30V

DC24

30V

DC265

357V

DC265

357V

AC188

253V

AC188

253V

AC188

253V

DC24

30V

Turn on the

power again.

YES

22 10%

Check the voltage at the indoor/heat source

transmission terminal block (TB3) of heat source unit.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

Check whether the male connector is connected to

the female power supply connector (CN40).

Connected

Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

Check if the indoor/heat source transmission line

is not short-circuited, and repair the problem.

Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,

check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

[THMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 341 -

HWE09080 GB

-7- Control Circuit (YHMU-A)

(1) Control power source function block

Power source system (AC 230 / 460 V)

Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.

(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

A, B

M-NET

transmission line

(Non-polar 2 wire)

AC 220 / 240 V

AC Power source

To next unit

(Indoor unit)

MA remote controller wiring

(Non-polar 2 wire)

DC 17 ~ 30 V

DC 9 ~ 12 V

TB2

TB15

Terminal block for

power source

TB5

Terminal block

for MA remote

controller

Terminal block

for transmission

line connection

DC 17 ~ 30 V

AC 460V

Terminal block for

power source

TB1

Noise filter

Fuse

72C, LEV

Surge protection

INV board

Control board

63H1

72C DCL

DC / DC converter

Detection circuit for

the power supply to

the transmission line

M-NET board

DC / DC

converter

Microcomputer

5 V Power supply

18 V Power supply

12V Power supply

AC460V

AC230V AC230V

30 V Power supply

Relay drive circuit

Relay

5 V Power supply

17V Power supply

Smoothing capacitor

Inverter

Inverter drive

circuit

Inverter reset

circuit

Rectifier

Compressor

Relay, LEV

Drive circuit

Solenoid valve

4-way valve

CH11

CN40

Terminal block for

transmission line

for centralized control

(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

TB7

Indoor/heat source

transmission block

(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

TB3

Rectifier

Transformer

M-NET remote

controller

MA remote

controller

Indoor unit

Heat source unit

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 342 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit

YES

DC270

356V

AC41

506V

Fuse

F4 on the noise filter board is blown.

AC414

506V

YES

Check the voltage between L2 and L3 at the power supply

terminal block TB1.

Check the voltages among TB22 and TB23 on the

noise filter

Fuse

F5 is blown.

Fuse F5 is blown.

Check

fuse

F5.

Pull out CN4 and CN5 on the noise filter, replace fuse F5, and turn on the power.

YES

Check the voltage at the indoor/heat source

transmission terminal block (TB3) of heat source unit.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

Check whether the male connector is connected to

the female power supply connector (CN40).

Connected

Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the

CNS2 on the control board.

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of

the noise filter CN4.

DC270

356V

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of

the noise filter CN5.

Check the noise filter fuse F4 .

Turn on the

power again.

Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found.

Replace the noise filter.

Replace the M-NET board

Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on.

Replace the control board.

Replace the noise filter.

Replace the control board.

Fuse F4 on the

noise filter board is blown.

Fuse F4 on the

noise filter board is blown.

Disconnect the noise filters CN4 and CN5, and then replace fuse F4 on the noise filter

board, then turn the power on.

Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on.

Replace the M-NET board

Replace the control board.

Is the voltage

measurement between

4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

Replace the M-NET board

Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNIT

on the control board.

Is there a connector

disconnection?

Fix the connector disconnection.

Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,

check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

Check if the indoor/

heat source

transmission line is not

short-circuited, and repair the problem.

Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the

transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors.

Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the

transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors.

Fix the wiring and connector disconnection.

Check for shorted transmission line or power feed

collision for centralized control.

Replace the control board.

Is there a wiring

error or a connector

disconnection?

Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the

CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

[YHMU-A]

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 343 -

HWE09080 GB

[5] Refrigerant Leak

1. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season)<PQHY>

1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side.

2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the liquid service valve (BV2) inside the heat source unit while the compressor is being

stopped.

3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump

down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.)

4) In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches

0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors

when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches

0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started.

5) Close the gas service valve (BV1) inside the heat source unit.

6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere

when it is collected.

7) Repair the leak.

8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit.

9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2-4.

2. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Cooling season)<PQHY>

(1) Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode.

1) To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.

2) Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode.

3) Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation.

(2) Check the values of Tc and TH6.

(To display the values on the LED screen, use the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the heat source unit control board.)

1) When Tc-TH6 is 10°C [18°F] or more : See the next item (3).

2) When Tc-TH6 is less than 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor stops, collect the refrigerant inside the system, repair the leak,

perform evacuation, and recharge new refrigerant. (Leak spot: 4. In the case of heat source unit, handle in the same way as

heating season.)

(3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.

1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board

is ON.

2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped.

(4) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2).

(5) To prevent the liquid seal, extract small amount of refrigerant from the check joint of the liquid service valve (BV2),

as the liquid seal may cause a malfunction of the unit.

(6) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmo-

sphere when it is collected.

(7) Repair the leak.

(8) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation inside the heat source unit.

(9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit.

When the power to the heat source-indoor unit must be turned off to repair the leak after closing the service valves specified

in the item 4, turn the power off in approximately one hour after the heat source-indoor units stop.

1) When 30 minutes have passed after the item 4 above, the indoor unit lev turns from fully closed to slightly open to prevent the

refrigerant seal.

LEV2a and LEV2b open when the heat source unit remains stopped for 15 minutes to allow for the collection of refrigerant in

the heat source unit heat exchanger and to enable the evacuation of the heat source unit heat exchanger.

If the power is turned off in less than 5 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the heat

source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

Tc self-diagnosis switch TH6 self-diagnosis switch

12345678 9 10

SW1

12345678 9 10

SW1

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 344 -

HWE09080 GB

2) Therefore, if the power source is turned off within 30 minutes, the lev remains fully closed and the refrigerant remains sealed.

When only the power for the indoor unit is turned off, the indoor unit LEV turns from faintly open to fully closed.

3) In the cooling cycle, the section between "21S4b, c" and "LEV 2a, b" will form a closed circuit.

To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system, "LEV1" and "SV5b, c" will be open by setting SW5-8 to ON in the stop

mode.

Set SW5-8 to OFF upon completion of all work.

3. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season)<PQHY>

(1) Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode.

1) To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.

2) Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode.

3) Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation.

(2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.

1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board

is ON.

2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped.

(3) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2).

(4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere

when it is collected.

(5) Repair the leak.

(6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation*1 of the extension pipe for the indoor unit, and open the service valves

(BV1 and BV2) to adjust refrigerant.

4. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Heating season)<PQHY>

1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into

the atmosphere when it is collected.

2) Repair the leak.

3) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation of the entire system, and calculate the

standard amount of refrigerant to be added (for heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit), and charge the refrigerant.

Refer to "VIII [4] 3. "

If the indoor or heat source units need to be turned off for repairing leaks during Step 1) above, turn off the power approxi-

mately 1 hour after the units came to a stop.

If the power is turned off in less than 15 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the heat

source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation.

In the cooling cycle, the section between "21S4b, c" and "LEV 2a, b" will form a closed circuit.

To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system, "LEV1" and "SV5b, c" will be open by setting SW5-8 to ON in the stop

mode.

Set SW5-8 to OFF upon completion of all work.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 345 -

HWE09080 GB

5. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season)<PQRY>

1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side.

2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the high-pressure side refrigerant service valve (BV2) on the heat source unit while the

compressor is being stopped.

3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump

down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.)

4) In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches

0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors

when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches

0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started.

5) Close the service ball valve (BV1) on the low-pressure pipe on the heat source unit.

6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere

when it is collected.

7) Repair the leak.

8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit.

9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2-4.

6. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Cooling season)<PQRY>

(1) Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode.

1) To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.

2) Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode.

3) Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation.

(2) Check the SC16 value.

(This valve can be displayed on the LED by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the heat source unit control

board.)

1) When SC16 is 10°C [18°F] or above: Go to the next item (3).

2) When the SC16 value is below 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor has stopped, extract the refrigerant in the system, repair

the leak, evacuate the air from the system *1, and charge the system with refrigerant. (If the leak is in the heat source unit,

follow the same procedure as listed under "heating season.")

(3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.

1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board

is ON.

2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped.

(4) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2).

(5) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmo-

sphere when it is collected.

(6) Repair the leak.

(7) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation *1 inside the heat source unit.

(8) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

SC16 self-diagnosis switch

1 2 3 4

7 8 10 9

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 346 -

HWE09080 GB

7. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season)<PQRY>

(1) Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode.

1) To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.

2) Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode.

3) Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation.

(2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.

1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board

is ON.

2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped.

(3) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2).

(4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere

when it is collected.

(5) Repair the leak.

(6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation of the extension pipe*1 for the indoor unit, and open the ball valves (BV1

and BV2) to adjust refrigerant.

8. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Heating season)<PQRY>

1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into

the atmosphere when it is collected.

2) Repair the leak.

3) Repair the leak, and evacuate the air from the entire system *1 . Then, calculate the proper amount of refrigerant to be added

(heat source unit + extension pipe + indoor unit), and charge the system with that amount. Refer to Chapter VIII [4] 3. for the

proper amount of refrigerant charge.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 347 -

HWE09080 GB

[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions

1. Compressor Replacement Instructions

Follow the procedures below (Steps 1 through 5) to remove the compressor components and replace the compressor.

Reassemble them in the reverse order after replacing the compressor.

1. Remove the service panel (front panels).

3. Remove the wires that are secured to the frame,

and remove the frame.

Electric

wiring

Frame

Service panel Control box

2. Remove the control box.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 348 -

HWE09080 GB

Remove the insulation material and the belt heater

from the compressor.

First, move the nearby wiring, insulation material on

the accumulator, and pipe covers on the pipe and

water heat exchanger out of the way or protect them

from the brazing flame; then debraze the pipe, and

replace the compressor.

Acoustic insulation

on the compressor

Thermal insulation

on the accumulator

Pipe cover on the

water heat exchanger

Belt heater

Wiring adjacent to

the compressor

4. 5.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 349 -

HWE09080 GB

No. Parts to be replaced

1 Water-cooled heat

exchanger assembly

2 Check valve (CV8)

1. Water heat exchanger assembly and check valve (CV8) replacement instructions

* The following describes the procedures for replacing the water heat exchanger assembly and check valve (CV8).

1. Applicable models

• PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

• PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

2. Parts to be serviced, Set-contents

Required materials

Water-cooled heat exchanger service parts kit

[Kit contents]

Instructions sheet

Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly

Check valve service parts kit

[Kit contents]

Instructions sheet

Check valve assmbly

Connecting pipe

Qty.

1 kit

3. Procedures

* Precautions for starting replacement

• Check that the main power supply is OFF.

• Check that no refrigerant is in the heat source unit.

Remove each part according to the 1)-3) procedures on the next page before replacing service parts.

Mount the removed parts back in place in a reversed procedures of 1)-3) on the next page after replacing service

parts.

(1) Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly replacement procedures

Removal procedures

Remove the duct, solenoid valve block support, and INV heat exchanger support.

Hand the solenoid valve block support with wire from the beam so that it will not fall.

Remove the fastening plate and the screws holding the water-cooled heat exchanger, and

remove the braze

Pull the water-cooled heat exchanger forward toward the front of the unit.

Installation procedures

Install the water-cooled heat exchanger included in the replacement parts kit

Reinstall the fastening plate, fixing screws, INV heat exchanger support, solenoid valve block

support, and the duct.

* Precautions for replacing water-cooled heat exchanger assembly

• Be sure to perform no-oxidation brazing when brazing.

• After brazing, check the condition around the brazing. After confirming no leakage, evacuate the air

inside. (*1)

• Perform brazing with care of the flame direction so that it does not burn cables and plates etc. in the unit.

*1: Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 350 -

HWE09080 GB

1) Remove the service

panel and the water pipe

inlet/outlet panel.

2) Disconnect all wires inside the

control box, and remove the

control box.

3) Remove Frame M under the

control box.

Suspend the solenoid valve block

from the beam with wire.

Solenoid

valve block

Solenoid

valve block

INV heat exchanger support Duct

Solenoid valve

block support

2 fixing screws

Water heat exchanger

mounting bracket

(2 screws)

Debraze the sections here.

Beam

If the compressor is accessible by removing the rear service panel, it may facilitate compressor replacement.

Remove the duct, solenoid valve block support, and INV heat exchanger support.

Pull the water heat exchanger out forward.

Suspend the solenoid valve block from the beam with wire so it will not fall. (Refer to the figure below at right. )

Remove the water heat exchanger mounting bracket and the fixing screws (figure below at left), and debraze

the sections indicated with arrows in the figure below at right.

Install the replacement water heat exchanger.

Reinstall the mounting bracket, fixing screws, INV heat exchanger support, solenoid valve block support, and

duct as they were.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 351 -

HWE09080 GB

(2) Replacement procedures for check valve assembly

● Removing the check valve assembly

Remove the check valve (CV8), elbow, and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the brazing flux

from the sections that are indicated with arrows.

Check the shape of the water heat exchanger pipe end. Depending on its shape, the pipe end needs to be cut.

When cutting the pipe end, keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit.

● Installing the check valve assembly

Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit.

Depending on the shape of the pipe end, the connecting pipe needs to be brazed to the pipe.

Screw the screws back on.

Remove the brazing flux. (2 places)

Remove the check valve (CV8), elbow, and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the

brazing flux from the sections that are indicated with arrows.

Check valve (CV8)

Elbow

Before removal

Section of the pipe to

be removed After removal

Notes on replacing the check valve assembly

Braze the pipes under a nitrogen purge to prevent oxidation.

Before heating the pipes, place a wet towel on the check valve to keep its temperature

below 120°C [248°F].

After brazing the pipes, check for leaks, and evacuate the air from the pipes. (*1)

Direct the flame away from the cables and sheet metals inside the unit so as not to burn

them.

*1 Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for details.

The figures above are the views from behind to present a better view of the section to be removed.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 352 -

HWE09080 GB

*A connecting pipe is required only when the pipe section

that is circled in the figure above looks like the one shown in

the figure above in the middle entitled "Pipe type A."

Cut the pipe here.

Check valve assembly

Connecting pipe

Pipe type A Pipe type B

3 Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit.

When connecting the check valve assembly to the type of pipe shown in the figure above in the middle, braze

the connecting pipe that is included in the service parts kit to the check valve assembly.

4 Screw the screws back on.

36mm

2 Depending on the manufacturing period, the section of the pipe that is circled in the figure below at left (after the brazing

flux is removed) comes in two types.

If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below in the middle (Pipe type A), cut off 36 mm of the pipe at the

end. If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below at right (Pipe type B), the pipe end needs not be cut off.

When cutting the pipe end, keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit.

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 353 -

HWE09080 GB

[7] Servicing the BC controller

1. Service panel

2. Control box

*Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts.

Work procedure Explanatory figure

1) Remove the two lock nuts on the control box, loosen the

other two, and remove the control box.

2) Remove the three fixing screws on the service panel,

and remove the service panel.

3) Remove the nine machine screws on the ceiling panel,

and remove the ceiling panel.

Work procedure Explanatory figure

(1) To check the inside of the control box, remove the

two lock nuts on the control box cover.

1) Check the terminal connection of the power wire or of

the transmission line.

2) Check the transformer.

3) Check the address switch.

(2) When the control board is replaced, the followings

must be noted.

(1) Check that the board type is G,GA, or GB(HB).

(2) Check that the wire and the connector are properly con-

nected.

It is not required to remove the two fixing screws on the

control box when checking the inside.

Loosen Service panel

Control Box

Ceiling panel

CMB-1016NU-G, GA

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 354 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Thermistor (liquid pipe/gas pipe temperature detection)

4. Pressure sensor

*Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts.

Work procedure Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.

1) For TH11, TH12, and TH15, refer to 1. 1) - 2).

2) For TH16, refer to 1. 1) - 3) (GA type only)

(2) Remove the lead wire of the piping sensor from the

control board.

1) TH11,TH12 (CN10)

2) TH15,TH16 (CN11)

(3) Pull out the temperature sensor from the tempera-

ture sensor housing, and replace the temperature

sensor with the new one.

(4) Connect the lead wire of the temperature sensor se-

curely on the control board.

Work procedure Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.

1) For the pressure sensors PS1 and PS3, refer to 1. 1) - 2)

(2) Remove the pressure sensor connector in trouble

from the control board, and insulate the connector.

1) Liquid-side pressure sensor (CNP1)

2) Intermediate-part pressure sensor (CNP3)

(3) Attach a new pressure sensor to the place which is

shown in the figure, and insert the connector to the

control board.

When gas leaks from the pressure sensor, repair the

leak, and follow the instructions above if required.

CMB-1016NU-GA

TH16

TH11

TH15

TH12

SVM1

PS1

PS3

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 355 -

HWE09080 GB

5. LEV

6. Solenoid valve

Work procedure Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.(Refer to 1. 1) - 3)

(2) Replace the LEV in trouble.

Secure enough service space in the ceiling for welding

operation, and conduct the work carefully.If required,

dismount the unit from the ceiling, and conduct the work.

*Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts.

Work procedure Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.(Refer to 1. 1) - 3)

(2) Remove the connector of the solenoid valve in trou-

ble.

(3) Remove the solenoid valve coil.

1) The coils on the solenoid valves SVA, SVB, SVM1 and

SVM2 can be serviced through the inspection door. SVC

is accessible for replacement by removing the four

mounting screws on the rear panel and removing the

panel (if enough space is available on the back). (SVM1

is present only on the G and GA types, SVM2 on the GA

type.)

LEV3

LEV1

LEV2

SVM2

SVM2b

CMB-1016NU-G

Double-pipe heat exchanger

CMB-1016NU-GA

Solenoid valve

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

- 356 -

HWE09080 GB

[8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display

If the LED error display appear as follows while all the SW1 switches are set to OFF, check the items under the applicable item

numbers below.

1. Error code appears on the LED display.

Refer to IX [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller.(page 230)

2. LED is blank.

Take the following troubleshooting steps.

(1) If the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC on the control board is outside the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC,

refer to IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit.

(2) If the LED error display becomes lit when the power is turned on with all the connectors on the control board except

CNDC disconnected, there is a problem with the wiring to those connectors or with the connectors themselves.

(3) If nothing appears on the display under item (2) above AND the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC is within the

range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC, control board failure is suspected.

3. Only the software version appears on the LED display.

(1) Only the software version appears while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected.

1) Wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board.(CNIT, CNS2, CN102)

2) If item 1) checks out OK, the transmission line power supply board failure is suspected.

3) If items 1) and 2) check out OK, control board failure is suspected.

(2) If the LED display appears as noted in "X [1] 2. LED display at Initial setting" (page 359)while the transmission cables

to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected, failure with the transmission cable or the connected equipment is suspected.

- 357 -

HWE09080 GB

LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board

[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ............................................................... 359

- 358 -

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 359 -

HWE09080 GB

X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board

[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor

1. How to read the LED

By setting the DIP SW 1-1 through 1-10 (Switch number 10 is represented by 0), the operating condition of the unit can be

monitored on the service monitor. (Refer to the table on the following pages for DIP SW settings.)

The service monitor uses 4-digit 7-segment LED to display numerical values and other types of information.

Pressure and temperature are examples of numerical values, and operating conditions and the on-off status of solenoid valve

are examples of flag display.

2. LED display at initial setting

From power on until the completion of initial settings, the following information will be displayed on the monitor screen.

(Displays No. 1 through No. 4 in order repeatedly.)

After the initial settings have been completed, the information on these items can be checked by making the switch setting

that corresponds to No. 517 in the LED display table.

Only item No. 1 "Software Version" appears on the display if there is a wiring failure between the control board and the trans-

mission line power supply board or if the circuit board has failed.

1) Display of numerical values

Example: When the pressure data sensor reads 18.8kg/cm2 (Item No. 58)

The unit of pressure is in kg/cm2

 Use the following conversion formula to convert the displayed value into

a value in SI unit.

Value in SI unit (MPa) = Displayed value (kg/cm2) x 0.098

2) Flag display

Example: When 21S4a, 21S4b, SV1a are ON. (Item No. 3)

Example: 3-minutes restart mode (Item No. 14)

No Item Display Remarks

Software version

[0103] : Version 1.03

Refrigerant type

[ 410] : R410A

Model and capacity [H-20] : Cooling/Heating 20 HP

For the first few minutes after power on, the capacity of

each heat source unit is displayed. Thereafter, the

combined capacity is displayed.

Communication address

[ 51] : Address 51

SW1

12345678

SW1-10 is represented as “0” in the table.

910

7SEG LED

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

Upper

Lower

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 360 -

HWE09080 GB

3. Time data storage function

The heat source unit has a simple clock function that enables the unit to calculate the current time with an internal timer by

receiving the time set by the system controller, such as G(B)-50A.

If an error (including a preliminary error) occurs, the error history data and the error detection time are stored into the service

memory.

The error detection time stored in the service memory and the current time can be seen on the service LED.

1) Use the time displayed on the service LED as a reference.

2) The date and the time are set to "00" by default. If a system controller that sets the time, such as G(B)-50A is not connected,

the elapsed time and days since the first power on will be displayed.

If the time set on a system controller is received, the count will start from the set date and the time.

3) The time is not updated while the power of the heat source unit is turned off. When the power is turned off and then on again,

the count will resume from the time before the power was turned off. Thus, the time that differs the actual time will be displayed.

(This also applies when a power failure occurs.)

The system controller, such as G(B)-50A, adjusts the time once a day. When the system controller is connected, the time will

be automatically updated to the correct current time after the time set by the system controller is received. (The data stored

into the memory before the set time is received will not be updated.)

(1) Reading the time data:

1) Time display

Example: 12 past 9

2) Date display

When the main controller that can set the time is connected

Example: May 10, 2003

When the main controller that can set the time is not connected

Example: 52 days after power was turned on

* Disappears if the time data is deviated due to a power failure, or if a

system controller that sets the time is not connected.

Alternate display

Alternate display of year and month, and date

* Appears between the year and the month, and nothing appears

when the date is displayed.

Alternate display

Day count

* Appears between the year and the month, and nothing

appears when the date is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 361 -

HWE09080

XLED Monitor Disp lay on the Heat s ource Unit Board

LED monitor display

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

0 0000000000

Relay output display 1

Lighting

Comp in op-

eration 72C OC CPU in oper-

ation AA

Check (error) display 1

OC/OS error 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted) B B

1 1000000000

Check (error) display 2

OC/OS error

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted) A A

Display of the latest pre-

liminary error

If no preliminary errors

are detected, "----" ap-

pears on the display.

2 0100000000

Check (error) display 3

(Including IC and BC) 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted) B

If no errors are detected,

"----" appears on the dis-

play.

3 1100000000

Relay out-

put display

Top 21S4a CH11 SV1a

Bottom

4 0010000000

Relay out-

put display

Top

SV4a SV4b SV4d SV9

Power sup-

ply for indoor

transmis-

sion line AA

Bottom SV7a SV7b

5 1010000000

6 0110000000

7 1110000000

Special control

Retry opera-

tion

Emergency

operation

Communica-

tion error be-

tween the

OC and OS

Communica-

tion error

3-minute re-

start delay

mode

8 0001000000

9 1001000000

Communication de-

mand capacity 0000 to 9999 B

If not demanded con-

trolled, "----" [ % ] ap-

pears on the display.

10 0101000000

Contact point demand

capacity 0000 to 9999 B

If not demanded con-

trolled, "----" [ % ] ap-

pears on the display.

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 362 -

HWE09080

11 1101000000

External signal

(Open input contact

point)

Contact

point de-

mand

Low-noise

mode

(Capacity

priority )

Cooling-

heating

changeover

(Cooling)

Cooling-

heating

changeover

(Heating)

12 0011000000

External signal

(Open input contact

point)

Pump inter-

lock (Con-

tact: open)

Low-noise

mode

(Quiet priori-

ty)

13 1011000000

14 0111000000

Heat source unit opera-

tion status BC opera-

tion signal

3-minutes

restart mode

Compressor

in operation

Preliminary

error Error

3-minutes

restart after

instanta-

neous power

failure

Preliminary

low pres-

sure error

15 1111000000 OC/OS identification OC/OS A A

16 0000100000

Indoor unit

check

Top Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 B The lamp that corre-

sponds to the unit that

came to an abnormal stop

lights.

The lamp goes off when

the error is reset.

Each unit that comes to

an abnormal unit will be

given a sequential num-

ber in ascending order

starting with 1.

Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 16

17 1000100000

Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 24

Bottom Unit No. 25 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 32

18 0100100000

Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 40

Bottom Unit No. 41 Unit No. 42 Unit No.43 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 46 Unit No47 Unit No. 48

19 1100100000

Top Unit No. 49 Unit No. 50

Bottom

20 0010100000

Indoor unit

Operation

mode

Top Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 B Lit during cooling

Lit during heating

Unlit while the unit is

stopped or in the fan

mode

Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 16

21 1010100000

Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 24

Bottom Unit No. 25 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 32

22 0110100000

Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 40

Bottom Unit No. 41 Unit No. 42 Unit No.43 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 46 Unit No47 Unit No. 48

23 1110100000

Top Unit No. 49 Unit No. 50

Bottom

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 363 -

HWE09080

24 0001100000

Indoor unit

thermo-

stat

Top Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 B Lit when thermostat is on

Unlit when thermostat is

off

Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 16

25 1001100000

Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 24

Bottom Unit No. 25 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 32

26 0101100000

Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 40

Bottom Unit No. 41 Unit No. 42 Unit No.43 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 46 Unit No47 Unit No. 48

27 1101100000

Top Unit No. 49 Unit No. 50

Bottom

28 0011100000

29 1011100000

30 0111100000

31 1111100000

32 0000010000

33 1000010000

34 0100010000

35 1100010000

36 0010010000

37 1010010000 BC operation mode Cooling-only

Cooling-only

OFF

Heating-only

OFF

Mixed-mode

OFF Fan Stop B

38 0110010000

39 1110010000 Heat source unit Opera-

tion mode

Permissible

stop Standby Cooling Cooling-

main Heating Heating-

main AA

40 0001010000

41 1001010000

42 0101010000

Heat source unit control

mode Stop Thermo OFF Abnormal

stop

Scheduled

control

Initial start

up Defrost Oil balance

Low fre-

quency oil

recovery

43 1101010000 Refrigerant

recovery AA

44 0011010000

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 364 -

HWE09080

45 1011010000 TH4 -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [°C]

46 0111010000 TH3 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

47 1111010000 TH7 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

48 0000110000 TH6 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

49 1000110000 TH2 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

50 0100110000 TH5 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

51 1100110000 TH8 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

52 0010110000

53 1010110000 THINV -99.9 to 999.9 A A Unit in [°C]

54 0110110000

55 1110110000

56 0001110000 THHS1 -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [°C]

57 1001110000 THBOX -99.9 to 999.9 A A

58 0101110000 High-pressure sensor

data -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [kgf/cm2]

59 1101110000 Low-pressure sensor

data -99.9 to 999.9 A A

60 0011110000

61 1011110000

62 0111110000

63 1111110000

64 0000001000

65 1000001000

66 0100001000

67 1100001000

68 0010001000

69 1010001000

70 0110001000

71 1110001000

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 365 -

HWE09080

72 0001001000

73 1001001000

74 0101001000

75 1101001000

76 0011001000

77 1011001000

78 0111001000 Qj 0000 to 9999 B B

79 1111001000 Qjc 0000 to 9999 B B

80 0000101000 Qjh 0000 to 9999 B B

81 1000101000 Target Tc -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

82 0100101000 Target Te -99.9 to 999.9 B

83 1100101000 Tc -99.9 to 999.9 A A

84 0010101000 Te -99.9 to 999.9 A A

85 1010101000

86 0110101000 Total frequencies

(OC+OS) 0000 to 9999 B Control data [ Hz ]

87 1110101000 Total frequency of each

unit 0000 to 9999 A A

88 0001101000 COMP frequency 0000 to 9999 A A

89 1001101000

90 0101101000

91 1101101000

Comp operating fre-

quency

0000 to 9999 A A

Unit in [rsp]

The inverter output current

(voltage) frequency will

equal the integer multiples

of the operating frequency

of the compressor.

92 0011101000

93 1011101000 All AK (OC+OS) 0000 to 9999 B

94 0111101000 AK 0000 to 9999 A A

95 1111101000

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 366 -

HWE09080

96 0000011000

97 1000011000

98 0100011000

99 1100011000

100 0010011000

101 1010011000

102 0110011000 LEVINV 0 to 480 A A Heat source unit LEV

opening (Fully open: 480)

103 1110011000 LEV1 0 to 480 A A Heat source unit LEV

opening (Fully open: 480)

104 0001011000

LEV2

60 to 1400 A A

Heat source unit LEV

opening (Fully open:

1400)

105 1001011000

106 0101011000

107 1101011000

108 0011011000 COMP operating cur-

rent (DC) 00.0 to 999.9 A A Peak value[A]

109 1011011000

110 0111011000

111 1111011000 COMP bus voltage 00.0 to 999.9 A A The unit is

[ V ]

112 0000111000

113 1000111000

114 0100111000

115 1100111000

116 0010111000

Number of times the

unit went into the mode

to remedy wet vapor

suction

0000 to 9999 B

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 367 -

HWE09080

117 1010111000 COMP Operation time

Upper 4 digits 0000 to 9999 A A The unit is

[ h ]

118 0110111000 COMP Operation time

Lower 4 digits 0000 to 9999 A A

119 1110111000

120 0001111000

121 1001111000

Backup mode Abnormal

pressure rise

High-pres-

sure drop

Low-pres-

sure drop

Abnormal Td

rise

Control box

temperature

rise

Stays lit for 90 seconds

after the completion of

backup control

122 0101111000

123 1101111000

COMP number of start-

stop events

Upper 4 digits

0000 to 9999 A A

Count-up at start-up

The unit is [Time]

124 0011111000

COMP number of start-

stop events

Lower 4 digits

0000 to 9999 A A

125 1011111000

126 0111111000

127 1111111000

128 0000000100

129 1000000100

Integrated operation

time of compressor (for

rotation purpose)

0000 to 9999 B

The unit is [ h ]

130 0100000100

131 1100000100

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 368 -

HWE09080

132 0010000100

Relay out-

put display

BC(Main)

Top SVM1 SVM2 SVM1b SVM2b

Bottom

133 1010000100

Top SVA1 SVB1 SVC1 SVA2 SVB2 SVC2

Bottom SVA3 SVB3 SVC3 SVA4 SVB4 SVC4

134 0110000100

Top SVA5 SVB5 SVC5 SVA6 SVB6 SVC6

Bottom SVA7 SVB7 SVC7 SVA8 SVB8 SVC8

135 1110000100

Top SVA9 SVB9 SVC9 SVA10 SVB10 SVC10

Bottom SVA11 SVB11 SVC11 SVA12 SVB12 SVC12

136 0001000100

Top SVA13 SVB13 SVC13 SVA14 SVB14 SVC14

Bottom SVA15 SVB15 SVC15 SVA16 SVB16 SVC16

137 1001000100

138 0101000100

Relay out-

put display

BC(Sub1)

Top SVA1 SVB1 SVC1 SVA2 SVB2 SVC2

Bottom SVA3 SVB3 SVC3 SVA4 SVB4 SVC4

139 1101000100

Top SVA5 SVB5 SVC5 SVA6 SVB6 SVC6

Bottom SVA7 SVB7 SVC7 SVA8 SVB8 SVC8

140 0011000100

Top SVA9 SVB9 SVC9 SVA10 SVB10 SVC10

Bottom SVA11 SVB11 SVC11 SVA12 SVB12 SVC12

141 1011000100

Top SVA13 SVB13 SVC13 SVA14 SVB14 SVC14

Bottom SVA15 SVB15 SVC15 SVA16 SVB16 SVC16

142 0111000100

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 369 -

HWE09080

143 1111000100

Relay out-

put display

BC(Sub2)

Top SVA1 SVB1 SVC1 SVA2 SVB2 SVC2

Bottom SVA3 SVB3 SVC3 SVA4 SVB4 SVC4

144 0000100100

Top SVA5 SVB5 SVC5 SVA6 SVB6 SVC6

Bottom SVA7 SVB7 SVC7 SVA8 SVB8 SVC8

145 1000100100

Top SVA9 SVB9 SVC9 SVA10 SVB10 SVC10

Bottom SVA11 SVB11 SVC11 SVA12 SVB12 SVC12

146 0100100100

Top SVA13 SVB13 SVC13 SVA14 SVB14 SVC14

Bottom SVA15 SVB15 SVC15 SVA16 SVB16 SVC16

147 1100100100

148 0010100100

149 1010100100 BC(Main or standard)

TH11 -99.9 to 999.9 B

150 0110100100 BC(Main)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

151 1110100100 BC(Main)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9 B

152 0001100100 BC(Main)TH16 -99.9 to 999.9 B

153 1001100100 BC(Main)PS1 -99.9 to 999.9 B

154 0101100100 BC(Main)PS3 -99.9 to 999.9 B

155 1101100100 BC(Main)SC11 -99.9 to 999.9 B

156 0011100100 BC(Main)SH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

157 1011100100 BC(Main)SH13 -99.9 to 999.9 B

158 0111100100 BC(Main)SC16 -99.9 to 999.9 B

159 1111100100 BC(Main)LEV1 0000 to 2000 B LEV1 opening

(Fully open:2000)

160 0000010100 BC(Main)LEV3 0000 to 2000 B LEV3 opening

(Fully open:2000)

161 1000010100 BC(Sub1)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

162 0100010100 BC(Sub1)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9 B

163 1100010100 BC(Sub1)LEV3 0000 to 2000 B LEV3a opening

(Fully open:2000)

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 370 -

HWE09080

164 0010010100 BC(Sub2)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

165 1010010100 BC(Sub2)TH25 -99.9 to 999.9 B

166 0110010100 BC(Sub2)LEV3 0000 to 2000 B LEV3a opening

(Fully open:2000)

167 1110010100 BC(Main)LEV2 0000 to 2000 B LEV2 opening

(Fully open:2000)

168 0001010100

169 1001010100

170 0101010100

171 1101010100

172 0011010100

173 1011010100

174 0111010100

175 1111010100

176 0000110100

177 1000110100

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 371 -

HWE09080

178 0100110100 Error history 1 0000 to 9999 B B Address and error codes

highlighted

If no errors are detected,

"---- " appears on the dis-

play.

Preliminary error informa-

tion of the OS does not

appear on the OC.

Neither preliminary error

information of the OC nor

error information of the IC

appears on the OS.

179 1100110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

180 0010110100 Error history 2 0000 to 9999 B B

181 1010110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

182 0110110100 Error history 3 0000 to 9999 B B

183 1110110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

184 0001110100 Error history 4 0000 to 9999 B B

185 1001110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

186 0101110100 Error history 5 0000 to 9999 B B

187 1101110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

188 0011110100 Error history 6 0000 to 9999 B B

189 1011110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

190 0111110100 Error history 7 0000 to 9999 B B

191 1111110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

192 0000001100 Error history 8 0000 to 9999 B B

193 1000001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

194 0100001100 Error history 9 0000 to 9999 B B

195 1100001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

196 0010001100 Error history 10 0000 to 9999 B B

197 1010001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

198 0110001100

Error history of inverter

(At the time of last data

backup before error)

0000 to 9999 B B

199 1110001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120) A A

200 0001001100

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 372 -

HWE09080

Error history

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

201 1001001100

Heat source unit opera-

tion status BC opera-

tion signal

3-minutes

restart mode

Compressor

in operation

Preliminary

error Error

3-minutes

restart after

instanta-

neous power

failure

Preliminary

low pres-

sure error

202 0101001100 OC/OS identification OC/OS-1/OS-2 A A

203 1101001100 BC operation mode Cooling-only

Cooling-only

OFF

Heating-only

OFF

Mixed-mode

OFF Fan Stop A A

204 0011001100

205 1011001100 Heat source unit Opera-

tion mode

Permissible

stop Standby Cooling Cooling-

main Heating Heating-

main AA

206 0111001100

207 1111001100

208 0000101100

Heat source unit control

mode Stop Thermo OFF Abnormal

stop

Scheduled

control

Initial start

up Oil balance

Low fre-

quency oil

recovery

209 1000101100 Refrigerant

recovery AA

210 0100101100

211 1100101100 Relay output display 1

Lighting

Comp in op-

eration 72C OC Always lit A A

212 0010101100

Relay out-

put display

Lighting

Top 21S4a CH11 SV1a

Bottom

213 1010101100

Relay out-

put display

Lighting

Top

SV4a SV4b SV4d SV9

Lit while

power to the

indoor units

is being sup-

plied

Bottom SV7a SV7b

214 0110101100

215 1110101100

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 373 -

HWE09080

216 0001101100 TH4 -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [°C]

217 1001101100 TH3 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

218 0101101100 TH7 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

219 1101101100 TH6 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

220 0011101100 TH2 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

221 1011101100 TH5 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

222 0111101100 TH8 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

223 1111101100

224 0000011100 THINV -99.9 to 999.9 A A Unit in [°C]

225 1000011100

226 0100011100

227 1100011100 THHS1 -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [°C]

228 0010011100 THBOX -99.9 to 999.9 A A

229 1010011100 High-pressure sensor

data -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [kgf/cm2]

230 0110011100 Low-pressure sensor

data -99.9 to 999.9 A A

231 1110011100

232 0001011100

233 1001011100

234 0101011100

235 1101011100

236 0011011100

237 1011011100

238 0111011100

239 1111011100

240 0000111100

241 1000111100

242 0100111100

Error history

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 374 -

HWE09080

243 1100111100

244 0010111100

245 1010111100

246 0110111100

247 1110111100

248 0001111100

249 1001111100 Qj 0000 to 9999 B B

250 0101111100 Qjc 0000 to 9999 B B

251 1101111100 Qjh 0000 to 9999 B B

252 0011111100 Target Tc -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

253 1011111100 Target Te -99.9 to 999.9 B

254 0111111100 Tc -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [°C]

255 1111111100 Te -99.9 to 999.9 A A

256 0000000010

257 1000000010 Total frequencies

(OC+OS) 0000 to 9999 B Control data

[ Hz ]

258 0100000010 Total frequency of each

unit 0000 to 9999 A A

259 1100000010 COMP frequency 0000 to 9999 A A

260 0010000010

261 1010000010

262 0110000010 Comp operating fre-

quency 0000 to 9999 A A Unit in [rps]

263 1110000010

264 0001000010 All AK (OC+OS) 0000 to 9999 B

265 1001000010 AK 0000 to 9999 A A

266 0101000010

267 1101000010

268 0011000010

Error history

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 375 -

HWE09080

269 1011000010

270 0111000010

271 1111000010

272 0000100010

273 1000100010 LEVINV 0 to 480 A A Heat source unit LEV

opening (Fully open: 480)

274 0100100010 LEV1 0 to 480 A A Heat source unit LEV

opening (Fully open: 480)

275 1100100010 LEV2 60 to 1400 A A

Heat source unit LEV

opening (Fully open:

1400)

276 0010100010

277 1010100010

278 0110100010

279 1110100010 COMP operating cur-

rent (DC) 00.0 to 999.9 A A Peak value[A]

280 0001100010

281 1001100010

282 0101100010 COMP bus voltage 00.0 to 999.9 A A The unit is [ V ]

283 1101100010

284 0011100010

285 1011100010

286 0111100010

287 1111100010

288 0000010010 COMP Operation time

Upper 4 digits 0000 to 9999 A A The unit is [ h ]

289 1000010010 COMP Operation time

Lower 4 digits 0000 to 9999 A A

290 0100010010

291 1100010010

Error history

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 376 -

HWE09080

292 0010010010

293 1010010010

294 0110010010

COMP number of start-

stop events

Upper 4 digits

0000 to 9999 A A

Count-up at start-up

The unit is [Time]

295 1110010010

COMP number of start-

stop events

Lower 4 digits

0000 to 9999 A A

296 0001010010

297 1001010010

298 0101010010

299 1101010010

300 0011010010

Integrated operation

time of compressor (for

rotation purpose)

0000 to 9999 B

The unit is [ h ]

Error history

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 377 -

HWE09080

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

301 1011010010 Power supply unit OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address B

302 0111010010 Start-up unit OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address B

303 1111010010

304 0000110010

305 1000110010

306 0100110010

307 1100110010

308 0010110010

309 1010110010

310 0110110010

311 1110110010

312 0001110010

313 1001110010

314 0101110010

315 1101110010

316 0011110010

317 1011110010

318 0111110010

319 1111110010

320 0000001010 BC(Main)TH11 -99.9 to 999.9 B

321 1000001010 BC(Main)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

322 0100001010 BC(Main)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9 B

323 1100001010 BC(Main)TH16 -99.9 to 999.9 B

324 0010001010 BC(Main)PS1 -99.9 to 999.9 B

325 1010001010 BC(Main)PS3 -99.9 to 999.9 B

326 0110001010

327 1110001010

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 378 -

HWE09080

328 0001001010

329 1001001010

330 0101001010 BC(Main)LEV1 0000 to 2000 B

331 1101001010 BC(Main)LEV3 0000 to 2000 B

332 0011001010 BC(Sub1)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

333 1011001010 BC(Sub1)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9 B

334 0111001010 BC(Sub1)LEV3 0000 to 2000 B

335 1111001010 BC(Sub2)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9 B

336 0000101010 BC(Sub2)TH25 -99.9 to 999.9 B

337 1000101010 BC(Sub2)LEV3 0000 to 2000 B

338 0100101010 BC(Main)LEV2 0000 to 2000 B

339 1100101010

340 0010101010

341 1010101010

342 0110101010

343 1110101010

344 0001101010

345 1001101010

346 0101101010

347 1101101010

348 0011101010

349 1011101010

350 0111101010

Current data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 379 -

HWE09080

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

351 1111101010 IC1 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 B Displayed alternately ev-

ery 5 seconds

352 0000011010 IC2 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

353 1000011010 IC3 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

354 0100011010 IC4 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

355 1100011010 IC5 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

356 0010011010 IC6 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

357 1010011010 IC7 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

358 0110011010 IC8 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

359 1110011010 IC9 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

360 0001011010 IC10 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

361 1001011010 IC11 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

362 0101011010 IC12 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

363 1101011010 IC13 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

364 0011011010 IC14 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

365 1011011010 IC15 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

366 0111011010 IC16 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

367 1111011010 IC17 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 380 -

HWE09080

368 0000111010 IC18 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 B Displayed alternately ev-

ery 5 seconds

369 1000111010 IC19 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

370 0100111010 IC20 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

371 1100111010 IC21 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

372 0010111010 IC22 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

373 1010111010 IC23 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

374 0110111010 IC24 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

375 1110111010 IC25 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

376 0001111010 IC26 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

377 1001111010 IC27 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

378 0101111010 IC28 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

379 1101111010 IC29 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

380 0011111010 IC30 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

381 1011111010 IC31 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

382 0111111010 IC32 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

383 1111111010 IC33 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

384 0000000110 IC34 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

385 1000000110 IC35 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

386 0100000110 IC36 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

387 1100000110 IC37 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

388 0010000110 IC38 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

389 1010000110 IC39 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

390 0110000110 IC40 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

391 1110000110 IC41 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

392 0001000110 IC42 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

393 1001000110 IC43 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

394 0101000110 IC44 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

395 1101000110 IC45 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 381 -

HWE09080

396 0011000110 IC46 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 B Displayed alternately ev-

ery 5 seconds

397 1011000110 IC47 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

398 0111000110 IC48 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

399 1111000110 IC49 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

400 0000100110 IC50 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

401 1000100110

402 0100100110

403 1100100110

404 0010100110

405 1010100110

406 0110100110

407 1110100110

408 0001100110 IC1 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

409 1001100110 IC2 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

410 0101100110 IC3 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

411 1101100110 IC4 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 382 -

HWE09080

412 0011100110 IC5 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

413 1011100110 IC6 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

414 0111100110 IC7 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

415 1111100110 IC8 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

416 0000010110 IC9 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

417 1000010110 IC10 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

418 0100010110 IC11 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

419 1100010110 IC12 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

420 0010010110 IC13 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

421 1010010110 IC14 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

422 0110010110 IC15 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

423 1110010110 IC16 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

424 0001010110 IC17 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

425 1001010110 IC18 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

426 0101010110 IC19 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

427 1101010110 IC20 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

428 0011010110 IC21 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

429 1011010110 IC22 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

430 0111010110 IC23 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

431 1111010110 IC24 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

432 0000110110 IC25 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

433 1000110110 IC26 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

434 0100110110 IC27 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

435 1100110110 IC28 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 383 -

HWE09080

436 0010110110 IC29 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

437 1010110110 IC30 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

438 0110110110 IC31 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

439 1110110110 IC32 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

440 0001110110 IC33 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

441 1001110110 IC34 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

442 0101110110 IC35 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

443 1101110110 IC36 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

444 0011110110 IC37 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

445 1011110110 IC38 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

446 0111110110 IC39 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

447 1111110110 IC40 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

448 0000001110 IC41 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

449 1000001110 IC42 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

450 0100001110 IC43 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

451 1100001110 IC44 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

452 0010001110 IC45 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

453 1010001110 IC46 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

454 0110001110 IC47 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

455 1110001110 IC48 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

456 0001001110 IC49 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

457 1001001110 IC50 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

458 0101001110 IC1 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

459 1101001110 IC2 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

460 0011001110 IC3 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

461 1011001110 IC4 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

462 0111001110 IC5 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

463 1111001110 IC6 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 384 -

HWE09080

464 0000101110 IC7 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

465 1000101110 IC8 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

466 0100101110 IC9 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

467 1100101110 IC10 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

468 0010101110 IC11 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

469 1010101110 IC12 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

470 0110101110 IC13 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

471 1110101110 IC14 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

472 0001101110 IC15 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

473 1001101110 IC16 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

474 0101101110 IC17 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

475 1101101110 IC18 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

476 0011101110 IC19 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

477 1011101110 IC20 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

478 0111101110 IC21 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

479 1111101110 IC22 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

480 0000011110 IC23 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

481 1000011110 IC24 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

482 0100011110 IC25 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

483 1100011110 IC26 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

484 0010011110 IC27 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

485 1010011110 IC28 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

486 0110011110 IC29 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

487 1110011110 IC30 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

488 0001011110 IC31 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

489 1001011110 IC32 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

490 0101011110 IC33 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

491 1101011110 IC34 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 385 -

HWE09080

492 0011011110 IC35 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

493 1011011110 IC36 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

494 0111011110 IC37 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

495 1111011110 IC38 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

496 0000111110 IC39 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

497 1000111110 IC40 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

498 0100111110 IC41 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

499 1100111110 IC42 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

500 0010111110 IC43 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

501 1010111110 IC44 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

502 0110111110 IC45 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

503 1110111110 IC46 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

504 0001111110 IC47 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

505 1001111110 IC48 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

506 0101111110 IC49 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

507 1101111110 IC50 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

508 0011111110

509 1011111110

510 0111111110

511 1111111110

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 386 -

HWE09080

Setting data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

512 0000000001 Self-address Alternate display of self address and unit model A A

513 1000000001 IC/FU address Count-up display of number of connected units B

514 0100000001 RC address Count-up display of number of connected units B

515 1100000001 BC/BS/TU address Count-up display of number of connected units B

516 0010000001 OS address Count-up display of number of connected units B

517 1010000001 Version/Capacity S/W version -> Refrigerant type -> Model and capacity -> Communication address A A

518 0110000001 OC address OC address display B

519 1110000001

520 0001000001

521 1001000001

522 0101000001

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 387 -

HWE09080

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

523 1101000001 IC1 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

524 0011000001 IC2 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

525 1011000001 IC3 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

526 0111000001 IC4 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

527 1111000001 IC5 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

528 0000100001 IC6 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

529 1000100001 IC7 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

530 0100100001 IC8 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

531 1100100001 IC9 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

532 0010100001 IC10 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

533 1010100001 IC11 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

534 0110100001 IC12 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

535 1110100001 IC13 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

536 0001100001 IC14 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

537 1001100001 IC15 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

538 0101100001 IC16 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

539 1101100001 IC17 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

540 0011100001 IC18 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

541 1011100001 IC19 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

542 0111100001 IC20 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

543 1111100001 IC21 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

544 0000010001 IC22 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

545 1000010001 IC23 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

546 0100010001 IC24 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

547 1100010001 IC25 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

548 0010010001 IC26 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

549 1010010001 IC27 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 388 -

HWE09080

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

550 0110010001 IC28 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [°C]

551 1110010001 IC29 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

552 0001010001 IC30 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

553 1001010001 IC31 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

554 0101010001 IC32 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

555 1101010001 IC33 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

556 0011010001 IC34 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

557 1011010001 IC35 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

558 0111010001 IC36 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

559 1111010001 IC37 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

560 0000110001 IC38 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

561 1000110001 IC39 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

562 0100110001 IC40 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

563 1100110001 IC41 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

564 0010110001 IC42 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

565 1010110001 IC43 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

566 0110110001 IC44 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

567 1110110001 IC45 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

568 0001110001 IC46 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

569 1001110001 IC47 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

570 0101110001 IC48 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

571 1101110001 IC49 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

572 0011110001 IC50 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 389 -

HWE09080

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

573 1011110001 IC1SH -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [ °C ]

574 0111110001 IC2SH -99.9 to 999.9

575 1111110001 IC3SH -99.9 to 999.9

576 0000001001 IC4SH -99.9 to 999.9

577 1000001001 IC5SH -99.9 to 999.9

578 0100001001 IC6SH -99.9 to 999.9

579 1100001001 IC7SH -99.9 to 999.9

580 0010001001 IC8SH -99.9 to 999.9

581 1010001001 IC9SH -99.9 to 999.9

582 0110001001 IC10SH -99.9 to 999.9

583 1110001001 IC11SH -99.9 to 999.9

584 0001001001 IC12SH -99.9 to 999.9

585 1001001001 IC13SH -99.9 to 999.9

586 0101001001 IC14SH -99.9 to 999.9

587 1101001001 IC15SH -99.9 to 999.9

588 0011001001 IC16SH -99.9 to 999.9

589 1011001001 IC17SH -99.9 to 999.9

590 0111001001 IC18SH -99.9 to 999.9

591 1111001001 IC19SH -99.9 to 999.9

592 0000101001 IC20SH -99.9 to 999.9

593 1000101001 IC21SH -99.9 to 999.9

594 0100101001 IC22SH -99.9 to 999.9

595 1100101001 IC23SH -99.9 to 999.9

596 0010101001 IC24SH -99.9 to 999.9

597 1010101001 IC25SH -99.9 to 999.9

598 0110101001 IC26SH -99.9 to 999.9

599 1110101001 IC27SH -99.9 to 999.9

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 390 -

HWE09080

600 0001101001 IC28SH -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [ °C ]

601 1001101001 IC29SH -99.9 to 999.9

602 0101101001 IC30SH -99.9 to 999.9

603 1101101001 IC31SH -99.9 to 999.9

604 0011101001 IC32SH -99.9 to 999.9

605 1011101001 IC33SH -99.9 to 999.9

606 0111101001 IC34SH -99.9 to 999.9

607 1111101001 IC35SH -99.9 to 999.9

608 0000011001 IC36SH -99.9 to 999.9

609 1000011001 IC37SH -99.9 to 999.9

610 0100011001 IC38SH -99.9 to 999.9

611 1100011001 IC39SH -99.9 to 999.9

612 0010011001 IC40SH -99.9 to 999.9

613 1010011001 IC41SH -99.9 to 999.9

614 0110011001 IC42SH -99.9 to 999.9

615 1110011001 IC43SH -99.9 to 999.9

616 0001011001 IC44SH -99.9 to 999.9

617 1001011001 IC45SH -99.9 to 999.9

618 0101011001 IC46SH -99.9 to 999.9

619 1101011001 IC47SH -99.9 to 999.9

620 0011011001 IC48SH -99.9 to 999.9

621 1011011001 IC49SH -99.9 to 999.9

622 0111011001 IC50SH -99.9 to 999.9

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 391 -

HWE09080

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

623 1111011001 IC1SC -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [ °C ]

624 0000111001 IC2SC -99.9 to 999.9

625 1000111001 IC3SC -99.9 to 999.9

626 0100111001 IC4SC -99.9 to 999.9

627 1100111001 IC5SC -99.9 to 999.9

628 0010111001 IC6SC -99.9 to 999.9

629 1010111001 IC7SC -99.9 to 999.9

630 0110111001 IC8SC -99.9 to 999.9

631 1110111001 IC9SC -99.9 to 999.9

632 0001111001 IC10SC -99.9 to 999.9

633 1001111001 IC11SC -99.9 to 999.9

634 0101111001 IC12SC -99.9 to 999.9

635 1101111001 IC13SC -99.9 to 999.9

636 0011111001 IC14SC -99.9 to 999.9

637 1011111001 IC15SC -99.9 to 999.9

638 0111111001 IC16SC -99.9 to 999.9

639 1111111001 IC17SC -99.9 to 999.9

640 0000000101 IC18SC -99.9 to 999.9

641 1000000101 IC19SC -99.9 to 999.9

642 0100000101 IC20SC -99.9 to 999.9

643 1100000101 IC21SC -99.9 to 999.9

644 0010000101 IC22SC -99.9 to 999.9

645 1010000101 IC23SC -99.9 to 999.9

646 0110000101 IC24SC -99.9 to 999.9

647 1110000101 IC25SC -99.9 to 999.9

648 0001000101 IC26SC -99.9 to 999.9

649 1001000101 IC27SC -99.9 to 999.9

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 392 -

HWE09080

650 0101000101 IC28SC -99.9 to 999.9 B The unit is [ °C ]

651 1101000101 IC29SC -99.9 to 999.9

652 0011000101 IC30SC -99.9 to 999.9

653 1011000101 IC31SC -99.9 to 999.9

654 0111000101 IC32SC -99.9 to 999.9

655 1111000101 IC33SC -99.9 to 999.9

656 0000100101 IC34SC -99.9 to 999.9

657 1000100101 IC35SC -99.9 to 999.9

658 0100100101 IC36SC -99.9 to 999.9

659 1100100101 IC37SC -99.9 to 999.9

660 0010100101 IC38SC -99.9 to 999.9

661 1010100101 IC39SC -99.9 to 999.9

662 0110100101 IC40SC -99.9 to 999.9

663 1110100101 IC41SC -99.9 to 999.9

664 0001100101 IC42SC -99.9 to 999.9

665 1001100101 IC43SC -99.9 to 999.9

666 0101100101 IC44SC -99.9 to 999.9

667 1101100101 IC45SC -99.9 to 999.9

668 0011100101 IC46SC -99.9 to 999.9

669 1011100101 IC47SC -99.9 to 999.9

670 0111100101 IC48SC -99.9 to 999.9

671 1111100101 IC49SC -99.9 to 999.9

672 0000010101 IC50SC -99.9 to 999.9

673 1000010101

674 0100010101

675 1100010101

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)*1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 393 -

HWE09080

Setting data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

676 0010010101 INV board S/W version 0.00 to 99.99 A A

677 1010010101

678 0110010101

679 1110010101

680 0001010101

681 1001010101

682 0101010101

683 1101010101

684 0011010101

685 1011010101

686 0111010101

687 1111010101

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 394 -

HWE09080

688 0000110101 Current time 00:00 to 23:59 A A Hour: minute

689 1000110101 Current time -2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

690 0100110101 Time of error detection 1 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

691 1100110101 Time of error detection 1-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

692 0010110101 Time of error detection 2 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

693 1010110101 Time of error detection 2-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

694 0110110101 Time of error detection 3 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

695 1110110101 Time of error detection 3-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

696 0001110101 Time of error detection 4 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

697 1001110101 Time of error detection 4-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

698 0101110101 Time of error detection 5 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

699 1101110101 Time of error detection 5-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

700 0011110101 Time of error detection 6 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

701 1011110101 Time of error detection 6-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

Setting data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 395 -

HWE09080

702 0111110101 Time of error detection 7 00:00 to 23:59 A A Hour: minute

703 1111110101 Time of error detection 7-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

704 0000001101 Time of error detection 8 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

705 1000001101 Time of error detection 8-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

706 0100001101 Time of error detection 9 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

707 1100001101 Time of error detection 9-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

708 0010001101 Time of error detection 10 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

709 1010001101 Time of error detection 10-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

710 0110001101 Time of last data backup be-

fore error 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute

711 1110001101 Time of last data backup be-

fore error -2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date

alternate display

712 0001001101

713 1001001101

Setting data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 396 -

HWE09080

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

714 0101001101 IC1 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 B Fully open: 2000

715 1101001101 IC2 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

716 0011001101 IC3 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

717 1011001101 IC4 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

718 0111001101 IC5 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

719 1111001101 IC6 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

720 0000101101 IC7 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

721 1000101101 IC8 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

722 0100101101 IC9 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

723 1100101101 IC10 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

724 0010101101 IC11 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

725 1010101101 IC12 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

726 0110101101 IC13 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

727 1110101101 IC14 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

728 0001101101 IC15 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

729 1001101101 IC16 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

730 0101101101 IC17 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

731 1101101101 IC18 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

732 0011101101 IC19 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

733 1011101101 IC20 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

734 0111101101 IC21 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

735 1111101101 IC22 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

736 0000011101 IC23 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

737 1000011101 IC24 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

738 0100011101 IC25 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

739 1100011101 IC26 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

740 0010011101 IC27 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 397 -

HWE09080

741 1010011101 IC28 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 B Fully open: 2000

742 0110011101 IC29 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

743 1110011101 IC30 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

744 0001011101 IC31 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

745 1001011101 IC32 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

746 0101011101 IC33 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

747 1101011101 IC34 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

748 0011011101 IC35 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

749 1011011101 IC36 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

750 0111011101 IC37 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

751 1111011101 IC38 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

752 0000111101 IC39 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

753 1000111101 IC40 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

754 0100111101 IC41 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

755 1100111101 IC42 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

756 0010111101 IC43 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

757 1010111101 IC44 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

758 0110111101 IC45 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

759 1110111101 IC46 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

760 0001111101 IC47 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

761 1001111101 IC48 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

762 0101111101 IC49 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

763 1101111101 IC50 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 398 -

HWE09080

764 0011111101 IC1 Operation mode

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

B When WR2 is used, the

four LDs on the left (LD1-

4) display operation

mode, and the four LDs

on the right (LD5-LD8)

display port address.

(Displayed alternately ev-

ery five seconds)

765 1011111101 IC2 Operation mode

766 0111111101 IC3Operation mode

767 1111111101 IC4 Operation mode

768 0000000011 IC5 Operation mode

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 399 -

HWE09080

769 1000000011 IC6 Operation mode

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

BWhen WR2 is used, the

four LDs on the left

(LD1-4) display opera-

tion mode, and the four

LDs on the right (LD5-

LD8) display port ad-

dress.

(Displayed alternately

every five seconds)

770 0100000011 IC7 Operation mode

771 1100000011 IC8 Operation mode

772 0010000011 IC9 Operation mode

773 1010000011 IC10 Operation mode

774 0110000011 IC11 Operation mode

775 1110000011 IC12 Operation mode

776 0001000011 IC13 Operation mode

777 1001000011 IC14 Operation mode

778 0101000011 IC15 Operation mode

779 1101000011 IC16 Operation mode

780 0011000011 IC17 Operation mode

781 1011000011 IC18 Operation mode

782 0111000011 IC19 Operation mode

783 1111000011 IC20 Operation mode

784 0000100011 IC21 Operation mode

785 1000100011 IC22 Operation mode

786 0100100011 IC23 Operation mode

787 1100100011 IC24 Operation mode

788 0010100011 IC25 Operation mode

789 1010100011 IC26 Operation mode

790 0110100011 IC27 Operation mode

791 1110100011 IC28 Operation mode

792 0001100011 IC29 Operation mode

793 1001100011 IC30 Operation mode

794 0101100011 IC31 Operation mode

795 1101100011 IC32 Operation mode

796 0011100011 IC33 Operation mode

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 400 -

HWE09080

797 1011100011 IC34 Operation mode

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

BWhen WR2 is used, the

four LDs on the left

(LD1-4) display opera-

tion mode, and the four

LDs on the right (LD5-

LD8) display port ad-

dress.

(Displayed alternately

every five seconds)

798 0111100011 IC35 Operation mode

799 1111100011 IC36 Operation mode

800 0000010011 IC37 Operation mode

801 1000010011 IC38 Operation mode

802 0100010011 IC39 Operation mode

803 1100010011 IC40 Operation mode

804 0010010011 IC41 Operation mode

805 1010010011 IC42 Operation mode

806 0110010011 IC43 Operation mode

807 1110010011 IC44 Operation mode

808 0001010011 IC45 Operation mode

809 1001010011 IC46 Operation mode

810 0101010011 IC47 Operation mode

811 1101010011 IC48 Operation mode

812 0011010011 IC49 Operation mode

813 1011010011 IC50 Operation mode

814 0111010011 IC1 filter 0000 to 9999 B Hours since last mainte-

nance [ h ]

815 1111010011 IC2 filter 0000 to 9999

816 0000110011 IC3 filter 0000 to 9999

817 1000110011 IC4 filter 0000 to 9999

818 0100110011 IC5 filter 0000 to 9999

819 1100110011 IC6 filter 0000 to 9999

820 0010110011 IC7 filter 0000 to 9999

821 1010110011 IC8 filter 0000 to 9999

822 0110110011 IC9 filter 0000 to 9999

823 1110110011 IC10 filter 0000 to 9999

824 0001110011 IC11 filter 0000 to 9999

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 401 -

HWE09080

825 1001110011 IC12 filter 0000 to 9999 B Hours since last mainte-

nance [ h ]

826 0101110011 IC13 filter 0000 to 9999

827 1101110011 IC14 filter 0000 to 9999

828 0011110011 IC15 filter 0000 to 9999

829 1011110011 IC16 filter 0000 to 9999

830 0111110011 IC17 filter 0000 to 9999

831 1111110011 IC18 filter 0000 to 9999

832 0000001011 IC19 filter 0000 to 9999

833 1000001011 IC20 filter 0000 to 9999

834 0100001011 IC21 filter 0000 to 9999

835 1100001011 IC22 filter 0000 to 9999

836 0010001011 IC23 filter 0000 to 9999

837 1010001011 IC24 filter 0000 to 9999

838 0110001011 IC25 filter 0000 to 9999

839 1110001011 IC26 filter 0000 to 9999

840 0001001011 IC27 filter 0000 to 9999

841 1001001011 IC28 filter 0000 to 9999

842 0101001011 IC29 filter 0000 to 9999

843 1101001011 IC30 filter 0000 to 9999

844 0011001011 IC31 filter 0000 to 9999

845 1011001011 IC32 filter 0000 to 9999

846 0111001001 IC33 filter 0000 to 9999

847 1111001011 IC34 filter 0000 to 9999

848 0000101011 IC35 filter 0000 to 9999

849 1000101011 IC36 filter 0000 to 9999

850 0100101011 IC37 filter 0000 to 9999

851 1100101011 IC38 filter 0000 to 9999

852 0010101011 IC39 filter 0000 to 9999

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 402 -

HWE09080

853 1010101011 IC40 filter 0000 to 9999 B Hours since last mainte-

nance [ h ]

854 0110101011 IC41 filter 0000 to 9999

855 1110101011 IC42 filter 0000 to 9999

856 0001101011 IC43 filter 0000 to 9999

857 1001101011 IC44 filter 0000 to 9999

858 0101101011 IC45 filter 0000 to 9999

859 1101101011 IC46 filter 0000 to 9999

860 0011101011 IC47 filter 0000 to 9999

861 1011101011 IC48 filter 0000 to 9999

862 0111101011 IC49 filter 0000 to 9999

863 1111101011 IC50 filter 0000 to 9999

Data on indoor unit system

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B)* 1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 403 -

HWE09080

Other types of data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

864 0000011011

865 1000011011

866 0100011011

867 1100011011

868 0010011011

869 1010011011

870 0110011011

871 1110011011 U-phase current effec-

tive value 1 -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [ A ]

872 0001011011 W-phase current effec-

tive value 1 -99.9 to 999.9 A A

873 1001011011 Power factor phase an-

gle 1 -99.9 to 999.9 A A The unit is [ deg ]

874 0101011011

875 1101011011

876 0011011011

877 1011011011

878 0111011011

879 1111011011

880 0000111011 Control board

Reset counter 0 to 254 A A The unit is [ time ]

881 1000111011 INV board

Reset counter 0 to 254 A A

882 0100111011

883 1100111011

884 0010111011

885 1010111011

886 0110111011

887 1110111011

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 404 -

HWE09080

888 0001111011

889 1001111011

890 0101111011

891 1101111011

892 0011111011

893 1011111011

894 0111111011

895 1111111011

896 0000000111

897 1000000111

898 0100000111

899 1100000111

900 0010000111

901 1010000111

902 0110000111

903 1110000111

904 0001000111

905 1001000111

906 0101000111

907 1101000111

1020 0011111111

1021 1011111111

1022 0111111111

1023 1111111111

Other types of data

No.

SW1

Item

Display Unit

(A, B) *1 Remarks

1234567890 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8 OC OS

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

Haier R410A 0000001653 User Manual To The Fafb00f1 4123 49b3 A856 717a53959ad0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation